product range

Guide for Machine and Plant Safety

Tabel of contents

brühl company
B Page 12

brühl safety fence systems

B Page 23

brühl doors
B Page 73

brühl accessories
B Page 143

brühl machine guard lift gates

B Page 181

brühl platform elements

B Page 209

special structures
B Page 221

appendix
B Page 237
 editorial 1

For your safety – BRÜHL

Safety tailored to your needs

Dear customers and business partners,

For more than 25 years we have been producing high-quality safety fence systems for your machines, processes/
plants and people. During this time we have always remained committed to our founding principle: “providing the
optimal solution for every application.” The result: over the years we have developed a large variety of individual
safety guard systems, machine guard doors and gates, enclosures and inspection platforms.

We are presenting our entire range of innovative safety systems in a single catalogue. On 258 pages you can learn
all about our extensive array of products for the safeguarding of machines and processes.

Check out our wide range of doors and the impressive versatility of our mounting systems for safety switches. In the
back of the catalogue you will find an overview of our comprehensive power-operated gate systems.

We hope you will enjoy learning more about Hans Georg Brühl GmbH on the following pages. In addition to our ex-
tensive and diverse range of safety systems we provide you with useful information on current guidelines and stand-
ards for the safeguarding of machines and processes. We are certain you will find numerous ideas for the design of
your work environment. Please feel free to contact us if you have any questions. We are always happy to help.

And as you read this catalogue, we are already at work on the further development and optimisation of our safety
systems – for the protection of people and machines.

Safety you can rely on: Innovative safety systems by Brühl.

Hans Georg Brühl Heinrich Brühl

CEO/General Manager CEO/General Manager

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
2  product overview

Overview: Safety fence systems

safety fence system flex ii
B Page 27.

safety fence system fence ii

B Page 37.

safety fence system wall ii

B Page 45.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 product overview 3

safety fence system aluminium fence i

B Page 53.

safety fence system stainless steel flex ii

B Page 64.

safety fence system stainless steel fence ii

B Page 68.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
4  product overview

Overview Doors
hinged doors
FTS FTR E-FTS E-FTR A-FTS A-FTR FTSO FTRO

Hinged door with Hinged door for Stainless steel hinged Stainless steel Aluminium Aluminium Hinged door with Hinged door for
mortise lock handle or latch door with mortise hinged door for hinged door with hinged door for mortise lock and handle or latch with
lock handle or latch mortise lock handle or latch transom transom

B Page 78. B Page 80. B Page 82. B Page 84.

PFTS PFTR FTSEO FTREO FTSHV1 FTRHV1

Portal hinged door with Portal hinged door Hinged door with mortise Hinged door for handle Hinged door with mortise Hinged door for handle
mortise lock for handle or latch lock, inward opening or latch, inward opening lock and height adjustment or latch, with height
adjustment

B Page 86. B Page 88. B Page 90.

DFTS DFTR DFTSO DFTRO

Double-leaf hinged doors with mortise lock Double-leaf hinged doors for handle or latch Double-leaf hinged doors with mortise lock Double-leaf hinged doors for handle or latch
and transom with transom

B Page 92. B Page 94.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 product overview 5

sliding doors
STS STG E-STS E-STG A-STS A-STG STSO STGO

Sliding door with Sliding door for Stainless steel sliding Stainless steel sliding Aluminium sliding Aluminium sliding Sliding door with Sliding door for
hook latch handle door with hook latch door for handle door with hook latch door for handle hook latch and handle with transom
transom

B Page 104. B Page 106. B Page 108. B Page 110.

STSHV1 STGHV1 DSTS DSTG

Sliding door with hook latch Sliding door for handle, Double-leaf sliding doors with hook latch Double-leaf sliding doors for handle
and height adjustment with height adjustment

B Page 112. B Page 114.

STSW STGW DSTSO DSTGO

Sliding door with hook latch, Sliding door for handle, Double-leaf sliding door with Double-leaf sliding door for handle,
opening from both sides opening from both sides hook latch and transom with transom

B Page 116. B Page 118.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
6  product overview

double action swing doors single door unit folding hinged doors
PT TFS TFR FAFTR

Double action swing door Single door unit with Single door unit for Folding hinged door for latch
mortise lock handle or latch

B Page 98. B Page 100. B Page 122.

folding hinged doors, folding sliding doors folding sliding doors,

bi-parting bi-parting
DFAFTR FASTG DFASTG

Double-leaf folding hinged doors for latch Folding sliding door for handle Folding sliding door for handle, bi-parting

B Page 123. B Page 124. B Page 125.

sliding doors, telescopic

STST STGT STSWT STGWT DSTST DSTGT

Sliding door with hook latch, Sliding door for handle, Sliding door with hook latch, Sliding door for handle, Sliding doors with hook latch, Sliding doors for handle,
telescopic telescopic opening from both sides and opening from both sides and telescopic and bi-parting telescopic and bi-parting
telescopic telescopic

B Page 128. B Page 130. B Page 132.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 product overview 7

cantilever sliding doors

FSTS FSTG FSTST FSTGT

Cantilever sliding door with hook latch Cantilever sliding door for handle Cantilever sliding door with hook latch, Cantilever sliding door for handle, telescopic
telescopic

B Page 136. B Page 138.

lift panels vertically opening power-operated doors

HF HFE MSHT MSHTE MSRT

Lift panel Lift panel, single track Machine guard lift gate Machine guard lift gate, Machine guard rolling door
single-sided

B Page 140. B Page 141. B Page 184. B Page 186. B Page 188.

horizontally opening power-operated doors

MSST MSSTF

Machine guard sliding door Machine guard sliding door, cantilever

B Page 194. B Page 198.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
8  table of contents

Table of contents

Brühl Company Page 12

Once upon a time ... the BRÜHL company history 12

BRÜHL – Quality is guaranteed 13
Services 14
Certificates 16
BRÜHL Safety Fence Designer 17
Fence Planning Guide 18
BRÜHL Ordering guide 20
How to use this catalogue 21

Brühl Safety fence systems Page 23

Safety fence system Flex II 27

High safety fence system Flex II 34
Safety fence system Fence II 37
Safety fence system Wall II 45
Safety fence system Aluminium Fence I 53
Safety fence system Stainless Steel Flex II 64
Safety fence system Stainless Steel Fence II 68

BRÜHL Doors Page 73

Hinged doors 76

Hinged door with mortise lock 78

Hinged door for handle or latch 79
Stainless steel hinged door with mortise lock 80
Stainless steel hinged door for handle or latch 81
Aluminium hinged door with mortise lock 82
Aluminium hinged door for handle or latch 83
Hinged door with mortise lock and transom 84
Hinged door for handle or latch, with transom 85
Portal hinged door with mortise lock 86
Portal hinged door for handle or latch 87
Hinged door with mortise lock, inward opening 88
Hinged door for handle or latch, inward opening 89
Hinged door with mortise lock and adjustable height 90
Hinged door for handle or latch, with adjustable height 91
Double-leaf hinged door with mortise lock 92
Double-leaf hinged door for handle or latch 93
Double-leaf hinged door with mortise lock and transom 94
Double-leaf hinged door for handle or latch, with transom 95

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 table of contents 9

Double action swing doors and individual hinged doors 96

Double action swing door 98

Individual hinged door with mortise lock 100
Individual hinged door for handle or latch 101

Sliding doors 102

Sliding door with hook latch 104

Sliding door for handle 105
Stainless steel sliding door with hook latch 106
Stainless steel sliding door for handle 107
Aluminium sliding door with hook latch 108
Aluminium sliding door for handle 109
Sliding door with hook latch and transom 110
Sliding door for handle, with transom 111
Sliding door with hook latch and adjustable height 112
Sliding door for handle, with adjustable height 113
Double-leaf sliding door with hook latch 114
Double-leaf sliding door for handle 115
Sliding door with hook latch, opening from both sides 116
Sliding door for handle, opening from both sides 117
Double-leaf sliding door with hook latch and transom 118
Double-leaf sliding door for handle, with transom 119

Folding hinged doors and folding sliding doors 120

Folding hinged door for latch 122

Folding hinged door for latch, bi-parting 123
Folding sliding door for handle 124
Folding sliding door for handle, bi-parting 125

Sliding doors, telescopic 126

Sliding door with hook latch, telescopic 128

Sliding door for handle, telescopic 129
Sliding door with hook latch, opening from both sides and telescopic 130
Sliding door for handle, opening to both sides and telescopic 131
Sliding door with hook latch, bi-parting, telescopic 132
Sliding door for handle, bi-parting, telescopic 133

Cantilever sliding doors 134

Cantilever sliding door with hook latch 136

Cantilever sliding door for handle 137

Cantilever sliding door with hook latch, telescopic 138

Cantilever sliding door for handle, telescopic 139

Lift panels 140

Lift panel 140

Lift panel, single track 141

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
10  table of contents

Brühl Accessories Page 143

Accessories for safety fence system Flex II 144

Accessories for safety fence system Stainless Steel Flex II 145
Accessories for safety fence system Fence II 146
Accessories for safety fence system Stainless Steel Fence II 146
Accessories for safety fence system Aluminium Fence I 147
Floor mounting hardware 148
Accessories for posts 149

Accessories for doors 150

Handles 150
Door handle sets 150
Hold-open mechanisms 151
Castors 151
Profile cylinders 152
Mounting hardware for cable ducts 152
Safeguarding conveyor discharge points 153
Windows with clamping strip 154
Identification of danger zones 156

Mounting systems for safety switches 158

Handle systems Brühl-GR ® 160

Handle systems Brühl-GRK ® 162
Mounting plate systems for hinged doors Brühl-HP-F ® 164
Mounting plate systems for sliding doors Brühl-HP-S ® 166
Locking systems Brühl-RI ® 168
Locking system mounting fixtures Brühl-RI ® 170
Trip cam assemblies for hinged doors Brühl-SN-F ® 172
Trip cam assembly for sliding doors Brühl-SN-S ® 174
Safety switch mounting fixtures Brühl-SV 176
Bar latch systems Brühl-UER ® 178

BRÜHL Machine guard door and gates Page 181

Machine guard lift gate 184

Machine guard lift gate, single track 186

Machine guard rolling doors 188

Machine guard rolling door I 190

Machine guard rolling door II 191
Machine guard rolling door III 192

Machine guard sliding doors 194

Machine guard sliding door 196

Machine guard double sliding door 197
Cantilever machine guard sliding door 198

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 table of contents 11

Brühl Control systems Page 201

Control systems 202

Control system accessories 203
Door control components 204
Control connection position for machine guard doors and gates 205

Brühl Platform elements Page 209

Platform elements 210

Product overview: access platforms 212

Frame elements 213
Platform support legs 213
Platform floor panels and coatings 214
Handrails 215
Stairs / inclined ladders 216
Fixed ladders 217
Bridges 218

Special Structures Page 221

Robot cells 222

Partial access panel 224
Wall mounting systems 225
Cantilever sliding door with swivel unit 226
Cantilever sliding door, double-leaf 227
Sectional sliding door, single sided 228
Sectional sliding door, bi-parting 229
Special mesh panels for safety fence system Flex II 230
Special mesh panels for safety fence system Fence II 232
Crash barriers 234

Appendix Page 237

Colour palette/finishes 238

Safety distances 240
Standards for machine safety 245
Positioning of base plates 246
General information on switches 247
Glossary 248
Product index 250
BRÜHL Fields of application 252
Locations in Germany and Europe 254
Notes 256
Imprint 258

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
12  brühl company

Once upon a time … the BRÜHL company history

For more than 25 years BRÜHL has been working to ensure
the safety of people and machines. In this quarter of a century
BRÜHL has evolved into a quality-conscious industrial enterprise
and a modern service provider. What started as a one-man busi-
ness is now a medium-sized company that provides solutions for
machines, installations, and human safety throughout Europe.
The cornerstone for BRÜHL was laid on 15th April 1983, when
master locksmith Hans Georg Brühl founded his company for
safety guards, machine parts and welded parts. Two years later
his twin brother, Heinrich Brühl, joined the company. Together
they managed to make the breakthrough into the market for solid
safety fence systems. The company’s evolution into Hans Georg
Brühl GmbH in 1991 and the expansion of its production facili-
ties in 1996 and 2006 are two examples of its rapid growth and
success. The new production site in Netphen near Siegen repre-
sented an intentional decision in favour of Germany as a business
location. The basis for this decision was a strong sense of social
responsibility for job preservation, quality assurance and environ-
mental protection.
The managing directors understand the importance of on-go-
ing investment in high-tech manufacturing facilities as well as a
competent and friendly staff. With its more than 120 employees
BRÜHL guarantees the smooth handling of all incoming cus-
tomer requests and orders. In the future, BRÜHL will continue
to strengthen its position as the leading producer of innovative
safety technology and do everything in its power to provide the
optimal solution for every application.
It’s safe to say: This is a true success story!
We stand for
→ More than 25 years of experience
We offer you professional know-how based on
continuous growth.
→ Safety tailored to your needs
We provide the optimal solution for every
application.
→ Innovation
We work continuously and ambitiously on the
optimisation of our safety technologies.
→ High-tech
We use state-of-the-art production technology.
→ Trust
Our close co-operation with customers and under-
standing of their individual needs enables us to pro-
duce flexible, tailor-made safety guard solutions.
→ Team spirit
As a responsible team we do everything in our
power to satisfy our customers.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com

Brühl – Quality is guaranteed
1. Protection and safety
Damage to a machine is expensive; damage to person is tragic.
With its more than 25 years of experience and state-of-the-art
production technology BRÜHL ensures safety for your machines,
installation and people.
2. Robustness, stability and durability
BRÜHL produces durable, high-quality safety guard systems
­using quality materials. These materials are subjected to continu-
ous quality control through wear tests, ensuring flawless safety.
3. Made in Germany
BRÜHL boasts a highly specialised staff, optimal business condi-
tions and high environmental standards – and in order to keep it
this way, the whole line of safety systems is manufactured exclu-
sively in Germany.
4. Professional customer service
The first step is always the analysis of the individual application.
With know-how and competent service BRÜHL guarantees tailor-
made solutions.
5. Certified quality
Before introducing a product to the market BRÜHL subjects all
safety components to various quality tests in its in-house test lab-
oratory. TÜV confirms the consistent manufacturing quality with
certifications according to ISO 9001 and other standards.
brühl company 13
company
6. Quick delivery
Depending on the product BRÜHL guarantees prompt delivery.
7. All-round service and customer support
As a modern service provider BRÜHL supports its customers in
the assembly, maintenance and repair of all safety systems. Our
Europe-wide service network also offers door testing and risk
­assessment services.
8. Custom designed systems – tailored to your
requirements
The extensive BRÜHL product line offers individual solutions for all
sectors of industry – however, if you still cannot find the appropri-
ate safety solution for your installation a customised system will
be manufactured just for you.
9. First-class cost effectiveness
BRÜHL is continuously adapting to market demands. Our highly
efficient manufacturing processes enable us to offer customers
optimal safety systems at reasonable prices.
www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
14  brühl company
Services
Assistance with risk assessment
Most of all due to the current changes/developments in the EU
Machinery Directive, now even many small and medium-sized
businesses are focusing on the issue of danger analysis. The dan-
ger analysis required by law is a crucial step on the way to CE
marking. Its results are relevant to the assembly and mounting of
safety devices as well as for the compilation of operation instruc-
tions that comply with the directive.
Risk assessment and danger analysis enables us to support you
as early as the design phase but also after completion when it
comes to the assembly of your machines in accordance with the
safety guidelines. In addition we offer consultation for machine
and systems operators according to the legal requirements of the
industrial safety regulations. During the process of assessing risks
and dangers you will benefit from our long-time experience in pro-
ducing and customising safety guards and devices.
Optimal machine and plant safety can prevent severe accidents
and even fatal casualties. Safeguarding machines that could
become a danger to employees should have top priority for
managers.
www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
Safety check – Stop tampering on safety devices
“According to accident investigations there is evidence that ma-
chine safety devices are apparently being tampered with.” This
is a quote from a study by the Berufsgenossenschaft Metall (Ac-
cident Prevention & Insurance Association for the Mechanical and
Metal Industry). In order to prevent such tampering and the as-
sociated liabilities for machine and plant managers, Hans Georg
Brühl GmbH offers an annual safety check. This safety check in-
cludes an inspection of all relevant safety guards and devices in
accordance with the following DIN standards: DIN EN ISO 12100,
DIN EN ISO 13857, DIN EN 953 and DIN EN 1088.
Door inspection in accordance with BGR 232 –
Properly documented
According to the guidelines of German directive BGR 232 the op-
erator is obliged to regularly conduct inspections of their power-
operated doors depending on the number of lifts and operation
areas. We offer these inspections to our customers for power-
operated machine guard doors and gates by Hans Georg Brühl
GmbH as well as for those of other manufacturers. This is a ser-
vice that our specialised staff provides. Compliance is confirmed
through the required inspection documentation (inspection log-
book and maintenance stamp etc.).
Maintenance – Responsibility beyond the sale
The completion of the project doesn’t have to mean the end of it.
Proper maintenance increases the durability and efficiency of safe-
ty guards and devices. Therefore Brühl offers regular inspection
and maintenance of power-operated doors and gates on request.

World-wide installation service
Our customers can choose to have their new guards profession-
ally installed by our staff. We provide this service not only in Ger-
man-speaking countries, but also worldwide through our expe-
rienced specialists. In the past we have completed international
installation projects in Europe, China, Korea, the United States,
Singapore and Mexico. Either a specialist can be provided for
supervising the assembly of your new guards, or a team of Brühl
fitters can carry out the assembly and installation of the safety
fence systems.
Consulting
Every order is unique. All projects have very specific needs and
demands. Therefore we believe in extensive individual consulting
that includes, if required, an on-site analysis of conditions. In-
depth consulting pays off. The result: tailor-made systems – and
more: 100% satisfied customers.
Project management
Tight schedules, fixed delivery dates and custom-made systems
at short notice are not the exception, but the norm, when it comes
to the large-scale projects of our customers. Hans Georg Brühl
GmbH will provide you with a project manager as your reliable
contact person who supports you throughout the entire project: a
single source for communication and information about the pro-
ject status of your order. You will profit from our professional pro-
ject management services, offering maximum planning reliability.
brühl company 15
company
CAD processing
As a reliable partner in machinery and plant engineering, Hans
Georg Brühl GmbH has CAD workstations for order and project
processing. These workstations enable our competent and relia-
ble employees to create project layouts and make any requested
adjustments and changes in a flexible manner. This is one way we
guarantee efficient project implementation and complete custom-
er satisfaction.
Brühl Safety Fence Designer
Hans Georg Brühl GmbH, leading supplier of guards, is releasing
a new type of fence-planning tool, developed by CADENAS. This
interactive fence-planning tool represents an innovative solution
for both Brühl and its customers. With it, individualised plans for
safety fence systems can be easily created error-free and with no
previous CAD experience. Thanks to the user-friendly interface,
Brühl customers can effortlessly and efficiently design their de-
sired safety fence in 3D.
www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
16  brühl company

BRÜHL awarded seal of approval for “Systematic Safety”

Last year Hans Georg Brühl GmbH set up a management pro-
gram in the company’s intranet system on the subject of occu-
pational safety. This program included a control system that
monitors each employee’s training status. The maintenance and
inspection dates for all machines are also recorded and moni-
tored through this centralised system.

This newly structured occupational safety system convinced the

independent inspecting body BGHM that BRÜHL meets the re-
quirements of the national guidelines for health and safety man-
agement systems (NLF/ILO-OSH 2001). Following an in-depth in-
spection of our health and safety measures, the BGHM awarded
us the seal of approval “Sicher mit System” (“Systematic Safety”).

Hans Georg Brühl GmbH is one of Europe’s leading manufactur- Continual improvement of health and safety in the workplace re-
ers of safety guards for machines and installations. Our motto duces the downtime and costs associated with occupational ac-
is “For your safety – BRÜHL”. Accordingly it is also vital for us cidents, illnesses, and health hazards in the company. Small and
to comply with important occupational safety standards for the medium-sized companies can apply for the seal of approval.
protection of our employees in the production of safety fence
systems. In February 2011 our systematic and sustainable imple-
mentation of occupational safety requirements was confirmed by
the German Social Accident Insurance Institution for the wood-
working and metalworking industries (BGHM).

Certificates

ISO 9001 DocCert Production monitored, ”Made in Germany“ BG tested

type tested

As an innovative and
competitive company,
BRÜHL GmbH has a
quality management
system that meets all re-
quirements of the DIN EN
ISO 9001. Our products
not only offer maximum
safety and quality, but
are also adaptable to
our customers’ indi-
vidual needs. In order to
remain in compliance
with the quality manage-
ment standard, we are
constantly working to
improve our products
and services.
TÜV Süd certification Type testing by TÜV BRÜHL safety guards The occupational
for documentation with Süd certifies a safe are manufactured safety management
respect to external form product. The produc- exclusively in Netphen system of Hans Georg
and design, structure, tion is monitored by in the Siegerland Brühl GmbH is certified
target-group orienta- TÜV at regular intervals region of Germany. We by the German Social
tion, comprehensibility, directly at the manu- associate German pro- Accident Insurance
safety aspects, warn- facturing site. duction with qualified Institution BGHM in
ings and environmental personnel, sustainable accordance with the
information. employment and high- national guidelines
quality products for NLF/ILO-OSH 2001.
machinery and instal-
lations.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl company 17

company
Brühl Safety Fence Designer
Fast – Flexible – Efficient Design of Safety Fences

For whom is the Brühl Safety Fence Designer intended?

For designers who want to integrate For designers who would like to inte-
safety fences for machinery into their grate individual components of Brühl
plant layout. products into their plans.*

What can the Brühl Safety Fence Designer do?

1 2
Creation of realistic Planning of the fence line in
representations of the individual steps or using lines.
safety guards in 3D views.
Marketing support through
the realistic representation
of machinery with safety
guards.

3 4
Fence planning on the A dimensioned 2D drawing
basis of floor plans of the can be derived, and designs
plant by importing DXF can be integrated in your
files. Reference points can own drawings.
be used from an underly-
ing DXF file.

5 6
The products can be made available for further use by For ordering, an itemised list can be produced, summa-
means of an export interface. Neutral formats can be created rising all products used in the drawing.
in 2D (DWG) and 3D (STEP).

*The Brühl Safety Fence Designer includes a comprehensive 3D product catalogue of the safety fence system Flex II.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
18  brühl company

Fence Planning Guide

Before you start, please check the following:

Have a risk assessment
and hazard analysis been
conducted for your
machine/installation?
Is an engineering draw-
ing available for your
machine/installation?
Are the internal production
processes of your machine/
installation known? (When
does something move, and
where does it move to?)
Are there any areas that
must be viewable or ac-
cessible at certain times
or at all times?

1
Determination of machine dimensions
In the first step of fence planning, the external dimensions of the
machine must be determined. These dimensions can be determined
either based on an existing machine layout or by on-site measure-
ment and then sketched out. In this process any existing conveyor
lines, interference contours, such as hall girders or cable conduits in
the floor, and access areas should be taken into consideration and
included in the schematic drawing if possible.

2
Determining safety clearance
A risk assessment for your installation will be needed for determining the required safety clearance around the danger points. With
the risk level, which can be ascertained from the risk assessment, as well as the mesh size, safety fence height and ground clearance,
it is possible to determine the required the safety distances using the charts provided in the Appendix (p. 240 ff).

3 e.g. Fence height: 2200 mm

Ground clearance: 175 mm

Marking a simplified fence line

Using the safety distances determined in Step 2, a simplified fence
line can now be sketched around the installation. The respective
heights of the fence sections must also be entered here.

4
Determining the positions of access areas
The fence line, the total fence length, the height of the fence and the
safety fence system have already been determined. Therefore, it is
now possible to begin planning the details. Access doorways represent
fixed points in the fence line. For this reason the planning should also
begin from these points. The type, height and inside width of the door
can be determined based on the requirements of the respective door-
way. With this data and the safety fence system, which has already
been determined, all required information about the doors, such as
item number, post spacing or post-wall thickness, can be found on
the corresponding product pages. This data can then by noted at the
respective points in the sketch.
A Please note the opening direction of all doors!

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl company 19

company
5
Planning the posts and mesh panels
For planning the complete fence line, the posts and mesh panels must also be determined. In this process it is best to begin by plan-
ning the corner posts for all external corners and then plan the posts for the remaining internal corners. The exact specifications for
the posts and mesh panels can be found on the corresponding product pages. With this information the missing components can now
be added to the schematic drawing. For the remaining posts, larger spacing is preferable. This saves assembly time, reducing costs.

Please note the opening direction of all doors! Planning internal corners Planning straight sections of fence line

6
Addition of accessory components (optional)
To complete the planned safety fence, additional components can
be selected from the ACCESSORIES section of the catalogue. There
you can find an extensive range of accessory components, such as
mounting systems for safety switches for the safeguarding of your
installation-access areas, as well as floor mounting hardware for vari-
ous types of flooring.

7
Selecting the surface coating
In the final step, the surface coating should be determined. Fence
components are available with a wide range of colours in various price
categories or with a hot-dip galvanised surface. A two-tone colour
scheme can also be chosen for the fence. Additional information can
be found on page 238 ff.

Please use the respective catalogue pages for choosing details, and keep
Please send us your safety fence layout, specifying delivery
in mind the possibility of custom-made systems. For complicated fence
conditions (pick-up, delivery, delivery location) and whether
systems or if you need advice, feel free to contact us. Our sales repre-
you require professional assembly.
sentatives would be happy to schedule an on-site visit to your facility!

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
20  brühl ordering guide

BRÜHL Ordering guide

1 Select safety fence system 2 Select mesh panels 3 Select posts

Example: Safety Fence System Flex II Example: Flex II Mesh Panel SF2-1825-930 Example: Line Post

A Post-mounting hardware must be ordered separately,

depending on fence system!

4 Select hinged doors 5 Select sliding doors

6 Select floor mounting

Example: Hinged Door with Handle Example: Cantilever Sliding Door Example: Fix Anchor

Po
Po st
st sp
sp ac
in g
ac
ing
Fence height
Panel height

Fence height

Gr
ou
nd
cle
ara
nc
Panel height

Gr
ou
nd
cle
ara
nc
e

B Page 76. B Page 102. B Page 148.

7 Select switch type 8 Select mounting system for switch 9 Select finish

Example: Switch for Handle System Example: Mounting System for Handle

B Page 158. B Page 238.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 how to use this catalogue 21

company
How to use this catalogue

Product numbers Column headings

The numbers of the product Within individual sections, col-
groups and models are high- umn headings offer orientation.
lighted with a white background
throughout the entire catalogue.

company
safety fence systems
Index/tabs
Leafing through the
section tabs is easy. Use
these tabs to open the

doors
catalogue on the first page
of the respective section.

accessories
machine guard lift gates
Symbols
The “info” symbol high-
lights additional product
information.
platform elements

The exclamation point

stands for important tips
that should be consid-
special structures

ered during the planning

process.

The arrow symbol makes

reference to pages that
contain additional infor-
mation, complementary
Colour coding products or corresponding
accessories.
Every Safety Fence System has its
own colour code, which is also used
in the respective tables.

Safety Fence System Flex II

Safety Fence System Fence II
Safety Fence System Wall II
Item number system
Beneath the product tables, you can find examples for the respec-
tive item number system for easier understanding. In this number-
ing system, the abbreviations have a certain meaning, and the
abbreviations and sizes are given in a certain order.

Safety Fence System Aluminium Fence I

example for item number system
Product-Handing-Post profile-Safety fence system/infill-Fence height-Post spacing FTS-L-60-Z-P-1400-1200
Safety Fence System Stainless Steel Flex II

Safety Fence System Stainless Steel Fence II

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
22  brühl safety fence systems

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl safety fence systems 23

safety fence systems

brühl Safety fence systems

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
24  brühl safety fence systems
The optimal safety fence system
for every application
Twenty-five years of experience and progress in close cooperation
with our customers have proven this: With so many different ap-
plications, it’s simply impossible to come up with one “standard”
safety fence solution. Therefore we offer our customers the fence
systems Flex II, Fence II, Wall II, Aluminium Fence I, Stainless Steel
Flex II and Stainless Steel Fence II. By selecting the appropriate
fence system customers can be assured that they will receive the
optimal solution for every application and that all facility particu-
larities are being considered.
The safety fence system Flex II can be used universally and offers
first-class cost effectiveness. Since the mesh is quick and easy to
cut, this safety fence system represents the perfect combination
of high safety standards, modern design and simple installation.
The safety fence system Fence II, which consists of a square steel
frame and offers a choice of ten different infill materials, can be
easily adjusted to fit the specific environment in which it is used.
The fence components are reinforced for applications where the
risk assessment and hazard analysis show that the fence may be
exposed to significant force.
www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
The safety fence system Wall II is mainly used for danger zones
where sufficient protection through safety guards cannot be guar-
anteed or where further requirements of the environment must be
taken into consideration. These include smoke protection, visual
protection and protection against noise and flying particles.
Owing to its high-quality material the safety fence system
­Aluminium Fence I is predominantly used as fencing around al-
uminium-profile based machinery. However, because its frame al-
lows for the tension-free mounting of infill materials, it is also ideal
for applications where Polycarbonatee is used.
The stainless steel safety fence systems Stainless Steel Flex II
and Stainless Steel Fence II were specially developed to meet
the requirements of the food industry. Thanks to its frameless con-
struction there are particularly few surfaces where dust and resi-
dues can collect. Stainless Steel Flex II is also used in the meat pro-
cessing industry.
All safety fence systems are tested and certified by an independ-
ent institute for compliance with machinery and plant safety
standards.
Flex II in hot-dip galvanised finish used for a packing station
 brühl safety fence systems 25

overview product features overview sectors

Safety Fence Systems Safety Fence Systems

Stainless Steel

Stainless Steel

Stainless Steel

Stainless Steel

safety fence systems

Features Details Sectors

Aluminium

Aluminium
Fence II

Fence II

Fence II

Fence II
Fence I

Fence I
Wall II

Wall II
Flex II

Flex II

Flex II

Flex II
Smoke Protection ○ ○ ● ○x ○ ○ Logistics ● ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Visual Protection ○ ○x ● ○x ○ ○x Laser Technology ○ ○ ● ● ○ ○

Protection Against
Bright Light ○ ○x ● ○x ○ ○x Brewing Industry ● ○ ○ ○ ● ●

Splash Protection ○ ○x ● ○x ○ ○x Lumber Industry ● ● ○ ○ ○ ○

Soundproofing ○ ○x ● ○x ○ ○x Industrial Furnaces ○ ● ○ ○ ○ ○

Protection Against
Flying Particles ○ ○x ● ○x ○ ○x Food Industry ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ●

Heat protection ○ ○x ● ○x ○ ○x Warehouse Industry ● ○ ● ○ ○ ○

High Stability ● ○ ○ ● ● ○
Stability Rolling Mill Industry ○ ● ○ ○ ○ ○
Very High Stability ○ ● ● ○ ○ ●
Available in max. max. max. max. max. max.
Widths
Various Widths
2200 2400 1500 2200 1800 2400 Furniture Industry ● ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
mm mm mm mm mm mm

Available in
Heights
Various Heights ● ● ● ● ● ● Racking Technology ● ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Climb-over
Additional Climb-
over Protection
Protection Through ● ● ● ● ● ● Welding Technology ○ ○ ● ● ○ ○
Cross Wires

Fence Posts Are

Posts Are Not Hidden
Flush With Panels,
by Fence Panels ● ● ● ● ● ● Conveying Technology ● ○ ○ ○ ● ●
Modern Design

Safe Assembly
From The Outside ● ● ● ● ● ● Automation Robotics ● ● ○ ○ ○ ○

Systems Are
Height Adjustable ● ○ ● ● ● ○ Packaging Technology ● ○ ○ ○ ● ●
As Standard

Quick On-Site
Width Adjustment ● ○ ○ ○ ● ○ Forming Technology ● ● ○ ○ ○ ○

Easy To Assemble ● ● ● ● ● ● Car Industry ● ● ○ ○ ○ ○

Research and
Colour Variety ● ● ● ● ○ ○ Education ● ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

1 Hot-Dip Galvanised
Additional Surface Aeronautical
Protection
2 Sendzimir Galvanised ● 1 ● 1 ● 2 ● 2 ○ 3 ○ 3 Engineering ● ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 Stainless Steel

Product Certificate ● ● ● ● ● ● Plastics Technology ● ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Special Purpose
Assembly Service ● ● ● ● ● ● Machinery ● ● ○ ○ ○ ○
Manufacturing

User-friendly
Assembly ● ● ● ● ● ●
Instructions ●  appropriate  ○x   conditionally appropriate   ○ depends on frame and infill material

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
26  safety fence system flex ii

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 safety fence system flex ii 27

safety fence systems

Safety fence system Flex II
The flexible safety fence system for guards according to the Machinery Directive
2006/42/EG, DIN EN ISO 12100, DIN EN ISO 13857, DIN EN 953 and DIN EN 1088

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
28  safety fence system flex ii
Always on the safe side –
the safety fence system Flex II
The safety fence system Flex II is a fixed guard constructed from
standard mesh panels and posts that can be combined with all
Brühl door products. With its modular design, it can be adapted
Advantages at–a-glance:
→ The wire mesh panels consist of wire and flat bars. These
provide for high stability and rigidity with minimal weight.
→ Optimal viewing of operations through frameless construction
with a mesh size of 20x200 mm.
→ The width of the mesh panels can be reduced by 23 mm
sections.
→ For this system various ground clearances are available
(standard: 175 mm/ reduced ground clearance 20mm).
→ Assembly and disassembly is always performed from the safe
side (outside of danger zone).
→ The fasteners are captive, as required by the applicable
standards. The clips remain bolted to the mesh panel –
nothing gets lost.
The frameless construction style of the safety fence system Brühl Flex II ensures optimal viewing of operations with maximum safety
www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
to the widest variety of working environments and provides maxi-
mum safety. To make a long story short: With the flexible safety
fence system Flex II you are always on the safe side.
→ The fence line can be assembled in any angle. This has a
positive effect on installation time as well as on flexibility
during the assembly process.
→ Modern design with fence posts that are flush with panels:
the posts are not hidden by fence panels.
→ All products are grit blasted and powder coated, ensuring
maximum impact resistance.
→ The safety fence system Flex II is available in various colours
and with a hot-dip galvanised finish. B See page 238.
→ The safety fence system Flex II is also available in stainless
steel. B See page 64.
→ As necessary other elements (e.g. hinged doors, sliding doors,
lift gates, rolling doors, double action swing doors, platforms
etc.) can be built into the safety fence system Flex II, allowing
for complete, customised solutions.
safety fence system flex ii 29

safety fence systems

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
30  safety fence system flex ii

Safety fence system Flex II

Product group: SF2

ing
s pac
P ost
Mesh panel height
Fence height

Gro
und
cle
ara
nce

standard mesh panels for safety fence system flex ii

Mesh size 23 x 200 mm, vertical wires Ø 3.5 mm, horizontal flat steel 15 x 6 mm and wires Ø 5.5 mm
(Ground Clearance 175 mm)

Post Spacing (distance between centres of posts)   B See Post Spacing Information on page 31.
300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400
Mesh Panel Height

310 410 510 610 710 810 910 1010 1110 1210 1310 1410
Fence Height

Mesh Panel Width b (Post Spacing – Post Thickness - 20)  B See Fence Planning on page 32.
Product

b=230 b=330 b=430 b=530 b=630 b=730 b=830 b=930 b=1030 b=1130 b=1230 b=1330

1400 SF 2 -1225 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830 -930 -1030 -1130 -1230 -1330
1600 SF 2 -1425 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830 -930 -1030 -1130 -1230 -1330
1800 SF 2 -1625 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830 -930 -1030 -1130 -1230 -1330
2000 SF 2 -1825 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830 -930 -1030 -1130 -1230 -1330
2200 SF 2 -2025 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830 -930 -1030 -1130 -1230 -1330
2400 SF 2 -2225 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830 -930 -1030 -1130 -1230 -1330
2600* SF 2 -2425 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830 -930 -1030 -1130 -1230 -1330

example for item number system

Product-Mesh panel height-Mesh panel width SF2-1225-230

* For a fence height of 2600, the post profile 60 x 60 is used.

C The panel height is specified for all safety fence systems (Panel height = Fence height – Ground clearance 175 mm).  C A ground clearance of 20 mm is available upon request.
C The delivery time for preferred dimensions is shorter. Please take this into consideration when placing your order.   B Post-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 144.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 safety fence system flex ii 31

product advantages
Angular fence line

90°

safety fence systems

35°

Fence posts are flush with panels – the posts are not hidden by fence panels

180°

Oval fence line possible

Mesh is quick to cut / easy to assemble

Integrated height adjustment Captivity of the fasteners

on the mesh panel

No. of Clips
Post Spacing (distance between centres of posts)   B See Post Spacing Information on right. per Panel to post spacing information
be ordered
1500 1600 1700 1800 separately Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is equal to or
1900 2000 2100 2200 B p. 144.
1510 1610 1710 1810 greater than 2400, as the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm.

Mesh Panel Width b (Post Spacing – Post Thickness - 20)  B See Fence Planning on page 32. Post spacing=600
FL2
b=1430 b=1530 b=1630 b=1730 b=1830 b=1930 b=2030 b=2130 Mesh panel width b=530

-1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130 6

Post Profile QR50
-1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130 6
-1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130 8
-1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130 8
-1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130 8
-1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 — — 10 Post profile QR60
-1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 — — — — 10

Preferred dimensions
Mesh panel width b=530

Post spacing=610

B See Fence Planning on page 32.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
32  safety fence system flex ii

Posts for safety fence system Flex II

straight fence line flex ii angular fence line flex ii
Line post (DP …) Line post (DP …)

internal corner flex ii external corner flex ii

Line post (DP …) Corner post (EP …)

t-joint fence line flex ii

T-joint post (TP …) T-joint post (TP …)

C Panels can be mounted on the right or left side of the T-joint post – mounting sites are available on both sides.

fence planning: safety fence system flex ii

Posts 50x50 Posts 60x60

AM=985* AM=985* AM=995* AM=995*

Internal corner Internal corner 930 930 Internal corner Internal corner 930 930
SF2…930 SF2…930 SF2…930 SF2…930

External corner External corner External corner External corner

AM=1000

AM=1010
SF2…930

SF2…930
AM=1000

AM=1010
SF2…930

SF2…930
930

930
930

930

SF2…930 SF2…930 SF2…930 SF2…930

930 930 930 930
AM=1000 AM=1000 AM=1010 AM=1010

*Post spacing with internal corners is 15 mm shorter *Post spacing with internal corners is 15 mm shorter

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 180°
safety fence system flex ii 33

180°
product features and advantages 180°

Sturdy four-hole base plate Fully welded connection of Adjustable post bases for Height adjustment for eve- Rugged post wall thickness Flow-drilled threads for a
post profile and base plate easier mounting of the posts ning out irregularities in the of at least 2.0 mm secure fastening of the mesh

for optimal stability on uneven floors fence line (diagram shows panels

safety fence systems

neutral position)
2,0 mm

+52/+49 mm

Neutral position
–7 mm

posts for saftey fence system flex ii

Posts without Height Adjustment

Fence Line Post with Corner Post with T-joint Post with
Line Post Line Post Corner Post T-joint Post
Height Adjustable Base Adjustable Base Adjustable Base

1400 DP-F-1400-0613 DP-F-1400-1313 EP-F-1400-1313 TP-F-1400-1313 DPJ-F-1400-1313 EPJ-F-1400-1313 TPJ-F-1400-1313

1600 DP-F-1600-0613 DP-F-1600-1313 EP-F-1600-1313 TP-F-1600-1313 DPJ-F-1600-1313 EPJ-F-1600-1313 TPJ-F-1600-1313
1800 DP-F-1800-0613 DP-F-1800-1313 EP-F-1800-1313 TP-F-1800-1313 DPJ-F-1800-1313 EPJ-F-1800-1313 TPJ-F-1800-1313
2000 DP-F-2000-0613 DP-F-2000-1313 EP-F-2000-1313 TP-F-2000-1313 DPJ-F-2000-1313 EPJ-F-2000-1313 TPJ-F-2000-1313
2200 DP-F-2200-0613 DP-F-2200-1313 EP-F-2200-1313 TP-F-2200-1313 DPJ-F-2200-1313 EPJ-F-2200-1313 TPJ-F-2200-1313
2400 DP-F-2400-0613 DP-F-2400-1313 EP-F-2400-1313 TP-F-2400-1313 DPJ-F-2400-1313 EPJ-F-2400-1313 TPJ-F-2400-1313
2600* DP-F-2600-0715 DP-F-2600-1515 EP-F-2600-1515 TP-F-2600-1515 DPJ-F-2600-1515 EPJ-F-2600-1515 TPJ-F-2600-1515

Posts with Height Adjustment

Fence Line Post with Line Post with Corner Post with T-joint Post with Line Post with Corner Post with T-joint Post with
Height Height Adjustment Height Adjustment Height Adjustment Height Adjustment Height Adjustment Height Adjustment Height Adjustment

Height + 52 + 52 + 52 + 52 + 49 + 49 +49

Adjustment – 7 – 7 – 7 – 7 – 7 – 7 –7
1400 DPHV1-F-1400-0613 DPHV1-F-1400-1313 EPHV1-F-1400-1313 TPHV1-F-1400-1313 DPHV2-F-1400-50 EPHV2-F-1400-50 TPHV2-F-1400-50
1600 DPHV1-F-1600-0613 DPHV1-F-1600-1313 EPHV1-F-1600-1313 TPHV1-F-1600-1313 DPHV2-F-1600-50 EPHV2-F-1600-50 TPHV2-F-1600-50
1800 DPHV1-F-1800-0613 DPHV1-F-1800-1313 EPHV1-F-1800-1313 TPHV1-F-1800-1313 DPHV2-F-1800-50 EPHV2-F-1800-50 TPHV2-F-1800-50
2000 DPHV1-F-2000-0613 DPHV1-F-2000-1313 EPHV1-F-2000-1313 TPHV1-F-2000-1313 DPHV2-F-2000-50 EPHV2-F-2000-50 TPHV2-F-2000-50
2200 DPHV1-F-2200-0613 DPHV1-F-2200-1313 EPHV1-F-2200-1313 TPHV1-F-2200-1313 DPHV2-F-2200-50 EPHV2-F-2200-50 TPHV2-F-2200-50
2400 DPHV1-F-2400-0613 DPHV1-F-2400-1313 EPHV1-F-2400-1313 TPHV1-F-2400-1313 DPHV2-F-2400-50 EPHV2-F-2400-50 TPHV2-F-2400-50
2600* DPHV1-F-2600-0715 DPHV1-F-2600-1515 EPHV1-F-2600-1515 TPHV1-F-2600-1515 DPHV2-F-2600-60 ­EPHV2-F-2600-60 TPHV2-F-2600-60

*For a fence height of 2600, the post profile 60 x 60 is used.A Before placing your order, check to make sure that you have selected the correct corner post. (Internal corner: DP, External corner: EP) 
C Panels can be mounted on the right or left side of the T-joint post – mounting sites are available on both sides.  B Floor mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148. 

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
34  high safety fence system flex ii

product information

High safety fence system Flex II Posts available up to 4835 mm in height.

The Safety Fence System Flex II can be used for constructing fences up to 4835 mm in
height with two rows of fence panels for applications with higher protective heights.
Product group: HSF2

st
Pocing
a
sp

Application with an upper and lower row of

Flex II mesh panels.
Upper mesh panel

post spacing information

Add an additional 20 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than
3035 mm, as the post profile changes from 60 to 80 mm.

Post spacing=610

Fence height
Mesh panel width b=530
Lower mesh panel

Post profile QR60

e
nc
le ara
n dc
ou
Gr
Post profile QR80

Mesh panel width b=530

Post spacing=630

B See Fence Planning page 35.

standard mesh panels for high safety fence system flex ii

Mesh size 23 x 200 mm, vertical wires Ø 3.5 mm, horizontal flat steel 15 x 6 mm and wires Ø 5.5 mm

No. of Clips
Post Spacing (distance between centres of posts)  B See Post Spacing Information above. per Panel to
be ordered
410 610 810 1010 1210 1410 1610 1810 2010 2210 separately
Mesh Panel Height
(Ground Clearance

430 630 830 1030 1230 1430 1630 1830 2030 2230 B  s. p. 144.
Fence Height

Mesh Panel Width b (Post Spacing – Post Thickness – 20)  B See Fence Planning page 35.
Product

175 mm)

FL 2
b=330 b=530 b=730 b=930 b=1130 b=1330 b=1530 b=1730 b=1930 b=2130
2835 HSF2 -2660 -330 -530 -730 -930 -1130 -1330 -1530 -1730 -1930 -2130 14
3035 HSF2 -2860 -330 -530 -730 -930 -1130 -1330 -1530 -1730 -1930 -2130 14
3235 HSF2 -3060 -330 -530 -730 -930 -1130 -1330 -1530 -1730 -1930 -2130 14
3435 HSF2 -3260 -330 -530 -730 -930 -1130 -1330 -1530 -1730 -1930 -2130 14
3635 HSF2 -3460 -330 -530 -730 -930 -1130 -1330 -1530 -1730 -1930 -2130 16
3835 HSF2 -3660 -330 -530 -730 -930 -1130 -1330 -1530 -1730 -1930 -2130 16
4035 HSF2 -3860 -330 -530 -730 -930 -1130 -1330 -1530 -1730 -1930 -2130 16
4235 HSF2 -4060 -330 -530 -730 -930 -1130 -1330 -1530 -1730 -1930 -2130 18
4435 HSF2 -4260 -330 -530 -730 -930 -1130 -1330 -1530 -1730 -1930 -2130 18
4635 HSF2 -4460 -330 -530 -730 -930 -1130 -1330 -1530 -1730 -1930 -2130 18
4835 HSF2 -4660 -330 -530 -730 -930 -1130 -1330 -1530 -1730 -1930 -2130 20

example for item number system C For the fence heights 2835 and 3035, the post profile 60 x 60 is used. For all other heights, the post profile 80 x 80 is used.
Product-Mesh panel height-Mesh panel width HSF2-2860-330
C A ground clearance of 20 mm is available upon request.  C The ground clearance is 175 mm. The distance between the two panels is approx. 10 mm.
B Post-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 144.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 high safety fence system flex ii 35

fence planning: high safety fence system flex ii

Posts 60x60 Posts 80x80

safety fence systems

AM=995* AM=995* AM=1015* AM=1015*
Internal cornerInternal corner 930 930 Internal cornerInternal corner 930 930

SF2…930 SF2…930 SF2…930 SF2…930

External cornerExternal corner External cornerExternal corner

AM=1010

AM=1010
SF2…930

SF2…930

AM=1030

AM=1030
SF2…930

SF2…930
930

930

930

930
SF2…930 SF2…930 SF2…930 SF2…930
930 930 930 930
AM=1010 AM=1010 AM=1030 AM=1030

* Post spacing with internal corners is 15 mm shorter. * Post spacing with internal corners is 15 mm shorter.

posts for high safety fence system flex ii

Posts without Height Adjustment

Fence High Line Post High Corner Post T-joint Post with
High Line Post High Line Post High Corner Post HighT-joint Post
Height with Adjustable Base with Adjustable Base Adjustable Base

2835 HDP-F-2835-0715 HDP-F-2835-1515 HEP-F-2835-1515 HTP-F-2835-1515 HDPJ-F-2835-1515 HEPJ-F-2835-1515 HTPJ-F-2835-1515

3035 HDP-F-3035-0715 HDP-F-3035-1515 HEP-F-3035-1515 HTP-F-3035-1515 HDPJ-F-3035-1515 HEPJ-F-3035-1515 HTPJ-F-3035-1515

3235 HDP-F-3235-1020 HDP-F-3235-2020 HEP-F-3235-2020 HTP-F-3235-2020 HDPJ-F-3235-2020 HEPJ-F-3235-2020 HTPJ-F-3235-2020

3435 HDP-F-3435-1020 HDP-F-3435-2020 HEP-F-3435-2020 HTP-F-3435-2020 HDPJ-F-3435-2020 HEPJ-F-3435-2020 HTPJ-F-3435-2020

3635 HDP-F-3635-1020 HDP-F-3635-2020 HEP-F-3635-2020 HTP-F-3635-2020 HDPJ-F-3635-2020 HEPJ-F-3635-2020 HTPJ-F-3635-2020

3835 HDP-F-3835-1020 HDP-F-3835-2020 HEP-F-3835-2020 HTP-F-3835-2020 HDPJ-F-3835-2020 HEPJ-F-3835-2020 HTPJ-F-3835-2020

4035 HDP-F-4035-1020 HDP-F-4035-2020 HEP-F-4035-2020 HTP-F-4035-2020 HDPJ-F-4035-2020 HEPJ-F-4035-2020 HTPJ-F-4035-2020

4235 HDP-F-4235-1020 HDP-F-4235-2020 HEP-F-4235-2020 HTP-F-4235-2020 HDPJ-F-4235-2020 HEPJ-F-4235-2020 HTPJ-F-4235-2020

4435 HDP-F-4435-1020 HDP-F-4435-2020 HEP-F-4435-2020 HTP-F-4435-2020 HDPJ-F-4435-2020 HEPJ-F-4435-2020 HTPJ-F-4435-2020

4635 HDP-F-4635-1020 HDP-F-4635-2020 HEP-F-4635-2020 HTP-F-4635-2020 HDPJ-F-4635-2020 HEPJ-F-4635-2020 HTPJ-F-4635-2020

4835 HDP-F-4835-1020 HDP-F-4835-2020 HEP-F-4835-2020 HTP-F-4835-2020 HDPJ-F-4835-2020 HEPJ-F-4835-2020 HTPJ-F-4835-2020

C For the fence heights 2835 and 3035, the post profile 60 x 60 is used. For all other heights, the post profile 80 x 80 is used.  B Floor mounting hardware must be ordered separately. Please see page 148.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
36  safety fence system fence ii

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 safety fence system fence ii 37

safety fence systems

Safety fence system Fence II
Safety fence system with many options for guards in accordance with the Machinery
Directive 2006/42/EG, DIN EN ISO 12100, DIN EN ISO 13857, DIN EN 953 and
DIN EN 1088

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
38  safety fence system fence ii
One system, many options –
the safety fence system Fence II
With its modular design, the System Fence II by Brühl can be
adapted to the widest variety of working environments. This fixed
guard is constructed from standard mesh panels and posts that
Advantages at-a-glance:
→ The wire mesh panels consist of steel frames with welded or
mounted infill material.
→ The frame profiles comply with applicable stability and design
standards. Customised solutions are available upon request.
→ Assembly and disassembly is always performed from the safe
side (outside of danger zone).
→ The fasteners are captive, as required by the applicable
standards. The clips remain bolted to the mesh panel – noth-
ing gets lost.
→  For this system various ground clearances are available (stand-
ard: 175 mm / reduced ground clearance: 20 mm).
→ The elements can be easily mounted beside and above one
another (cutouts, diagonal edges, borders, dividing points etc.
can be integrated). B See Special Mesh Panels page 232.
www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
can be combined with all Brühl door products. Furthermore other
elements can be built into the System Fence II, allowing for com-
plete, customised solutions.
→ As necessary, other elements (e.g. hinged doors, sliding doors,
lift gates, rolling doors, double action swing doors, inspection
platforms, climb-over protection, crash barriers, cantilever
doors etc.) can be built into the system, allowing for complete,
customised solutions.
→ All products are grit blasted and powder coated, ensuring
maximum impact resistance.
→ Modern design with fence posts that are flush with panels –
the posts are not hidden by fence panels.
→ The safety fence system Fence II is available in various colours
and with hot-dip galvanised finish. B See page 238.
→  Fence II is also available in stainless steel. B See page 68.
→ Mounting clips that ensure captivity can also be ordered sepa-
rately. B See page 146.
Safety Fence System Fence II used for safeguarding a hot forging press
safety fence system fence ii 39

safety fence systems

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
40  safety fence system fence ii

Safety fence system Fence II

Product group: SZ2

g
cin
s pa
st
Po
Mesh panel height
Fence height

e
nc
le ara
n dc
ou
Gr

standard mesh panels for safety fence system fence ii

(Ground Clearance 175 mm)

Fence Line Infill Material Post Spacing (distance between centres of posts)

Internal Corner 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
Straight Fence Line

(thickness 1.5 mm)

Mesh Panel Height

310 410 510 610 710 810 910 1010

or External Corner

Visual Protection

Visual Protection
Welded Mesh 40
Perforated Plate

Perforated Plate

Woven Mesh 25

Woven mesh 40

Polycarbonatee
Square Holes
Fence Height

Round Holes
Sheet Metal
Corner Clip,

Corner Clip,

Square Holes
Right Side
Product

Left Side

Bronze

Green
Flex II

b=230 b=330 b=430 b=530 b=630 b=730 b=830 b=930

1400 SZ2 — -EL -ER -BL -F -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG25 -WG40 -P SSB SSG -1225 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830 -930
1600 SZ2 — -EL -ER -BL -F -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG25 -WG40 -P SSB SSG -1425 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830 -930
1800 SZ2 — -EL -ER -BL -F -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG25 -WG40 -P SSB SSG -1625 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830 -930
2000 SZ2 — -EL -ER -BL -F -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG25 -WG40 -P SSB SSG -1825 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830 -930
2200 SZ2 — -EL -ER -BL -F -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG25 -WG40 -P SSB SSG -2025 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830 -930
2400 SZ2 — -EL -ER -BL -F -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG25 -WG40 -P SSB SSG -2225 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830 -930
2600* SZ2 — -EL -ER -BL -F -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG25 -WG40 -P SSB SSG -2425 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830 -930

example for item number system example for item number system
Product-Infill material-Mesh panel height-Mesh panel width SZ2-BL-1225-230 Product-Fence line-Infill material-Mesh panel height-Mesh panel width SZ2-EL-BL-1225-230

* For a fence height of 2600, the post profile 60 x 60 is used.

C The panel height is specified for all safety fence systems (Panel height = Fence height – Ground clearance 175 mm)  C A ground clearance of 20 mm is available upon request.  

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 safety fence system fence ii 41

frame profiles
1 Standard 2 3

safety fence systems

4 5 6

7 1 Square tube  2 Square tube  3 Square tube

4 Square tube  5 Stop tube  6 Stop tube  7 Stop tube

C 2–7 available upon request.

frame infill materials
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

10 1 Woven mesh  2 Sheet metal  3 Polycarbonatee 

4 Woven mesh  5 Welded mesh 
6 Perforated plate, Round holes  7 Perforated plate,
Square holes  8 Visual protection bronze 
9 Visual protection green  10 Flex II

scope of delivery
Screws are included and pre-mounted to the clips so that captivity is ensured.

Post Spacing (distance between centres of posts)  B See Post Spacing Information on right. post spacing information
Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than
1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2400, as the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm.
1110 1210 1310 1410 1510 1610 1710 1810 1910 2010

Post spacing=600
Mesh Panel Width b (Post Spacing – Post Thickness – 20)  B See Fence Planning page 42.
Mesh panel width b=530
b=1030 b=1130 b=1230 b=1330 b=1430 b=1530 b=1630 b=1730 b=1830 b=1930 b=2030 b=2130 b=2230 b=2330

-1030 -1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130 -2230 -2330 Post profile QR50
-1030 -1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130 -2230 -2330
-1030 -1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130 -2230 -2330
-1030 -1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130 -2230 -2330
-1030 -1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130 -2230 -2330
Post profile QR60
-1030 -1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130 ­­­­— —
-1030 -1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 — — — —

Mesh panel width b=530

Post spacing=610

B See Fence Planning page 42.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
42  safety fence system fence ii

Posts for safety fence system Fence II

straight fence line fence ii bottom connection fence ii
Line post (DP …)

internal corner fence ii external corner fence ii

Line post (DP …) Corner post
(EP …)

t-joint fence line fence ii

T-joint post (TP …) T-joint post (TP …)

C Panels can be mounted on the right or left side of the T-joint post – mounting sites are available on both sides.

fence planning: safety fence system ii

Posts 50x50 Posts 60x60

AM=995* AM=995* AM=1005* AM=1005*

Internal corner Internal corner 930 930 Internal corner Internal corner 930 930
SZ2-EL…930 SZ2-EL…930 SZ2-EL…930 SZ2-EL…930

External corner External corner External corner External corner

AM=1010
AM=1000

SZ2…930
SZ2…930

AM=1010
AM=1000

SZ2…930
SZ2…930

930
930

930
930

SZ2…930 SZ2…930 SZ2…930 SZ2…930

930 930 930 930
AM=1000 AM=1000 AM=1010 AM=1010

* Post spacing with internal corners is 5 mm shorter. * Post spacing with internal corners is 5 mm shorter.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 180°
safety fence system fence ii 43

180°
product features and advantages 180°

Sturdy four-hole base plate Fully welded connection of Adjustable post bases for Height adjustment for eve- Rugged post wall thickness Flow-drilled threads for a
post profile and base plate easier mounting of the posts ning out irregularities in the of at least 2.0 mm secure fastening of the mesh

for optimal stability on uneven floors fence line (diagram shows panels

safety fence systems

neutral position)
2,0 mm

+52/+49 mm

Neutral position
–7 mm

posts for saftey fence system fence ii

Posts without Height Adjustment

Fence Line Post with Corner Post T-joint Post with

Line Post Line Post Corner Post T-joint Post
Height Adjustable Base with Adjustable Base Adjustable Base

1400 DP-Z-1400-0613 DP-Z-1400-1313 EP-Z-1400-1313 TP-Z-1400-1313 DPJ-Z-1400-1313 EPJ-Z-1400-1313 TPJ-Z-1400-1313

1600 DP-Z-1600-0613 DP-Z-1600-1313 EP-Z-1600-1313 TP-Z-1600-1313 DPJ-Z-1600-1313 EPJ-Z-1600-1313 TPJ-Z-1600-1313
1800 DP-Z-1800-0613 DP-Z-1800-1313 EP-Z-1800-1313 TP-Z-1800-1313 DPJ-Z-1800-1313 EPJ-Z-1800-1313 TPJ-Z-1800-1313
2000 DP-Z-2000-0613 DP-Z-2000-1313 EP-Z-2000-1313 TP-Z-2000-1313 DPJ-Z-2000-1313 EPJ-Z-2000-1313 TPJ-Z-2000-1313
2200 DP-Z-2200-0613 DP-Z-2200-1313 EP-Z-2200-1313 TP-Z-2200-1313 DPJ-Z-2200-1313 EPJ-Z-2200-1313 TPJ-Z-2200-1313
2400 DP-Z-2400-0613 DP-Z-2400-1313 EP-Z-2400-1313 TP-Z-2400-1313 DPJ-Z-2400-1313 EPJ-Z-2400-1313 TPJ-Z-2400-1313
2600** DP-Z-2600-0715 DP-Z-2600-1515 EP-Z-2600-1515 TP-Z-2600-1515 DPJ-Z-2600-1515 EPJ-Z-2600-1515 TPJ-Z-2600-1515

Posts with Height Adjustment

Fence Line Post with Line Post with Corner Post with T-joint Post with Line Post with Corner Post with T-joint Post with
Height Height Adjustment Height Adjustment Height Adjustment Height Adjustment Height Adjustment Height Adjustment* Height Adjustment*

Height Ad- + 52 + 52 + 52 + 52 + 49 + 49 + 49

justment – 7 – 7 – 7 – 7 – 7 – 7 – 7
1400 DPHV1-Z-1400-0613 DPHV1-Z-1400-1313 EPHV1-Z-1400-1313 TPHV1-Z-1400-1313 DPHV2-Z-1400-50 EPHV2-Z-1400-50 TPHV2-Z-1400-50
1600 DPHV1-Z-1600-0613 DPHV1-Z-1600-1313 EPHV1-Z-1600-1313 TPHV1-Z-1600-1313 DPHV2-Z-1600-50 EPHV2-Z-1600-50 TPHV2-Z-1600-50
1800 DPHV1-Z-1800-0613 DPHV1-Z-1800-1313 EPHV1-Z-1800-1313 TPHV1-Z-1800-1313 DPHV2-Z-1800-50 EPHV2-Z-1800-50 TPHV2-Z-1800-50
2000 DPHV1-Z-2000-0613 DPHV1-Z-2000-1313 EPHV1-Z-2000-1313 TPHV1-Z-2000-1313 DPHV2-Z-2000-50 EPHV2-Z-2000-50 TPHV2-Z-2000-50
2200 DPHV1-Z-2200-0613 DPHV1-Z-2200-1313 EPHV1-Z-2200-1313 TPHV1-Z-2200-1313 DPHV2-Z-2200-50 EPHV2-Z-2200-50 TPHV2-Z-2200-50
2400 DPHV1-Z-2400-0613 DPHV1-Z-2400-1313 EPHV1-Z-2400-1313 TPHV1-Z-2400-1313 DPHV2-Z-2400-50 EPHV2-Z-2400-50 TPHV2-Z-2400-50
2600** DPHV1-Z-2600-0715 DPHV1-Z-2600-1515 EPHV1-Z-2600-1515 TPHV1-Z-2600-1515 DPHV2-Z-2600-60 ­EPHV2-Z-2600-60 TPHV2-Z-2600-60

*The combination of height adjustment HV2 with 20mm ground clearance is only possible to a limited extent! **For a fence height of 2600, the post profile 60 x 60 is used.

B Floor mounting hardware must be ordered separately! See page 148.  A Before placing your order, check to make sure that you have selected the correct corner post. (Internal corner: DP, External corner: EP)

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
44  safety fence system wall ii

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 safety fence system wall ii 45

safety fence systems

Safety fence system Wall II
Modular safety fence system for guards in accordance with
DIN EN ISO 12100, DIN EN ISO 13857, DIN EN 953 and DIN EN 1088

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
46  safety fence system wall ii
Modular all-round protection –
the safety fence system Wall II
The safety fence system Wall II is constructed from standard sheet
metal panels and posts that can be combined with all Brühl door
products. This fixed guard is mainly used in places where suffi-
cient machinery safety through safety guards cannot be guaran-
Advantages at-a-glance:
→ The sheet metal panels consist of laser-cut and folded sheet
metal. This provides for high stability and rigidity with minimal
weight.
→ For this system various ground clearances are available
(standard: 175 mm).
→ Assembly and disassembly is always performed from the safe
side (outside of danger zone).
→ As necessary, other elements (e.g. hinged doors, sliding doors,
lift gates, double action swing doors, inspection platforms,
climb-over protection, crash barriers, cantilever doors etc.)
can be built into the system, allowing for complete, custom-
ised solutions.
www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
teed. These include danger zones where flying particles may be
released as well as danger zones where protection against radia-
tion, fumes etc. is required.
→ All products are grit blasted and powder coated, ensuring
maximum impact resistance.
→ The safety fence system Wall II is available in various colours
and with hot-dip galvanised finish. B See page 238.
→ Sound insulation can be integrated into the system upon
request.
→ Modern design with fence posts that are flush with panels –
the posts are not hidden by fence panels.
→ For adequate viewing, Wall II can be installed with safety
windows made from Polycarbonatee, laminated safety glass
or welding protection glass.
System Wall II used for safeguarding a portal machining centre
safety fence system wall ii 47

safety fence systems

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
48  safety fence system wall ii

Safety fence system Wall II

Product group: SW2

ing
p ac
s ts
Po
Fence height
Wall height

Gr
ou
nd
cle
ara
nc
e

standard mesh panels for safety fence system wall ii

Infill Material Post Spacing (distance between centres of posts)  B See Post Spacing Information on page 49.
300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500
Wall Height (Ground
Clearance 175 mm)
(thickness 1.5 mm)

310 410 510 610 710 810 910 1010 1110 1210 1310 1410 1510
Sound Insulation
Fence Height

Sheet Metal

Wall Width b (Post Spacing – Post Thickness – 20)  B See Fence Planning on page 50.
Product

(40 mm)

b=240 b=340 b=440 b=540 b=640 b=740 b=840 b=940 b=1040 b=1140 b=1240 b=1340 b=1440
1400 SW2 -BL -SH -1225 -240 -340 -440 -540 -640 -740 -840 -940 -1040 -1140 -1240 -1340 -1440
1600 SW2 -BL -SH -1425 -240 -340 -440 -540 -640 -740 -840 -940 -1040 -1140 -1240 -1340 -1440
1800 SW2 -BL -SH -1625 -240 -340 -440 -540 -640 -740 -840 -940 -1040 -1140 -1240 -1340 -1440
2000 SW2 -BL -SH -1825 -240 -340 -440 -540 -640 -740 -840 -940 -1040 -1140 -1240 -1340 -1440
2200 SW2 -BL -SH -2025 -240 -340 -440 -540 -640 -740 -840 -940 -1040 -1140 -1240 -1340 -1440
2400 SW2 -BL -SH -2225 -240 -340 -440 -540 -640 -740 -840 -940 -1040 -1140 -1240 -1340 -1440
2600* SW2 -BL -SH -2425 -240 -340 -440 -540 -640 -740 -840 -940 -1040 -1140 -1240 -1340 -1440

example for item number system

Product- Infill material-Wall height- Mesh panel width SW2-BL-1225-240

* For a fence height of 2600, the post profile 60 x 60 is used.

C The panel/wall height is specified for all safety fence systems (Panel height = Fence height – Ground clearance 175 mm).  C A ground clearance of 20 mm is available upon request.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 safety fence system wall ii 49

product advantages
Integrated height adjustment

safety fence systems

product types
1 2

1 Available with windows  B See page 154 for details. 

2 Infill material with sound insulation from machine side

product applications
Smoke protection Visual protection Protection against
bright light

Splash protection Protection against Heat protection

flying particles

scope of delivery
Screws for mounting the wall elements are included.

post spacing information

Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than
2400, as the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm.

Post spacing=600

Wall width b=540

Post profile QR50

Post profile QR60

Wall width b=540

Post spacing=610

System Wall II used for a welding system with tilting table B See Fence Planning page 50.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
50  safety fence system wall ii

Posts for safety fence system Wall II

straight fence line wall ii connection wall ii left side
Line post (DP …)

external corner wall ii internal corner wall ii

Corner post (EP …) Corner post (EP …)

t-joint fence line wall ii

T-joint post (TP …) T-joint post (TP …)

C Panels can be mounted on the right or left side of the T-joint post – mounting sites are available on both sides.

fence planning: safety fence system wall ii

Posts 50x50 Posts 60x60

AM=970* AM=970* AM=970* AM=970*

Internal cornerInternal corner 940 940 Internal cornerInternal corner 940 940

SW2…940 SW2…940 SW2…940 SW2…940

External cornerExternal corner External cornerExternal corner

SW2…940

SW2…940
SW2…940

SW2…940
AM=1000

AM=1010
AM=1000

AM=1010
940

940
940

940

SW2…940 SW2…940 SW2…940 SW2…940

940 940 940 940
AM=1000 AM=1000 AM=1010 AM=1010

* Post spacing with internal corners is 30 mm shorter. * Post spacing with internal corners is 40 mm shorter.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 180°
safety fence system wall ii 51

180°
product features and advantages 180°

Sturdy four-hole base plate Fully welded connection of Adjustable post bases for Height adjustment for eve- Rugged post wall thickness Flow-drilled threads for a
post profile and base plate easier mounting of the posts ning out irregularities in the of at least 2.0 mm secure fastening of the mesh

for optimal stability on uneven floors fence line (diagram shows panels

safety fence systems

neutral position)
2,0 mm

+52/+49 mm

Neutral position
–7 mm

posts for saftey fence system wall ii

Posts without Height Adjustment

Fence Line Post with Corner Post T-joint Post with

Line Post Line Post Corner Post T-joint Post
Height Adjustable Base with Adjustable Base Adjustable Base

1400 DP-W-1400-0613 DP-W-1400-1313 EP-W-1400-1313 TP-W-1400-1313 DPJ-W-1400-1313 EPJ-W-1400-1313 TPJ-W-1400-1313

1600 DP-W-1600-0613 DP-W-1600-1313 EP-W-1600-1313 TP-W-1600-1313 DPJ-W-1600-1313 EPJ-W-1600-1313 TPJ-W-1600-1313
1800 DP-W-1800-0613 DP-W-1800-1313 EP-W-1800-1313 TP-W-1800-1313 DPJ-W-1800-1313 EPJ-W-1800-1313 TPJ-W-1800-1313
2000 DP-W-2000-0613 DP-W-2000-1313 EP-W-2000-1313 TP-W-2000-1313 DPJ-W-2000-1313 EPJ-W-2000-1313 TPJ-W-2000-1313
2200 DP-W-2200-0613 DP-W-2200-1313 EP-W-2200-1313 TP-W-2200-1313 DPJ-W-2200-1313 EPJ-W-2200-1313 TPJ-W-2200-1313
2400 DP-W-2400-0613 DP-W-2400-1313 EP-W-2400-1313 TP-W-2400-1313 DPJ-W-2400-1313 EPJ-W-2400-1313 TPJ-W-2400-1313
2600** DP-W-2600-0715 DP-W-2600-1515 EP-W-2600-1515 TP-W-2600-1515 DPJ-W-2600-1515 EPJ-W-2600-1515 TPJ-W-2600-1515

Posts with Height Adjustment

Fence Line Post with Line Post with Corner Post with T-joint Post with Line Post with Corner Post with T-joint Post with
Height Height Adjustment Height Adjustment Height Adjustment Height Adjustment Height Adjustment* Height Adjustment* Height Adjustment*

Height Ad- + 52 + 52 + 52 + 52 + 49 + 49 + 49

justment – 7 – 7 – 7 – 7 – 7 – 7 – 7
1400 DPHV1-W-1400-0613 DPHV1-W-1400-1313 EPHV1-W-1400-1313 TPHV1-W-1400-1313 DPHV2-W-1400-50 EPHV2-W-1400-50 TPHV2-W-1400-50
1600 DPHV1-W-1600-0613 DPHV1-W-1600-1313 EPHV1-W-1600-1313 TPHV1-W-1600-1313 DPHV2-W-1600-50 EPHV2-W-1600-50 TPHV2-W-1600-50
1800 DPHV1-W-1800-0613 DPHV1-W-1800-1313 EPHV1-W-1800-1313 TPHV1-W-1800-1313 DPHV2-W-1800-50 EPHV2-W-1800-50 TPHV2-W-1800-50
2000 DPHV1-W-2000-0613 DPHV1-W-2000-1313 EPHV1-W-2000-1313 TPHV1-W-2000-1313 DPHV2-W-2000-50 EPHV2-W-2000-50 TPHV2-W-2000-50
2200 DPHV1-W-2200-0613 DPHV1-W-2200-1313 EPHV1-W-2200-1313 TPHV1-W-2200-1313 DPHV2-W-2200-50 EPHV2-W-2200-50 TPHV2-W-2200-50
2400 DPHV1-W-2400-0613 DPHV1-W-2400-1313 EPHV1-W-2400-1313 TPHV1-W-2400-1313 DPHV2-W-2400-50 EPHV2-W-2400-50 TPHV2-W-2400-50
2600** DPHV1-W-2600-0715 DPHV1-W-2600-1515 EPHV1-W-2600-1515 TPHV1-W-2600-1515 DPHV2-W-2600-60 ­EPHV2-W-2600-60 TPHV2-W-2600-60

* Height Adjustment HV2 cannot be combined with ground clearance 20 mm.  ** For a fence height of 2600, the post profile 60 x 60 is used.

B Floor mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
52  safety fence system aluminium fence i

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 safety fence system aluminium fence i 53

safety fence systems

Safety fence system
Aluminium Fence I
The most versatile aluminium-profile safety fence system for guards in accordance
with the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC, DIN EN ISO 12100,
DIN EN ISO 13857, DIN EN 953 and DIN EN 1088

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
54  safety fence system aluminium fence i
The most versatile aluminium-profile
safety fence system – Aluminium Fence I
The safety fence system Aluminium Fence I by Brühl is a fixed
guard constructed from safety fence panels and posts that can
be combined with all Brühl door products. For the Brühl System
Fence Aluminium we combine the best material features of steel
Advantages at-a-glance:
→ The safety fence panels consist of a 30/30 mm aluminium
profile with bolted corner connections.
→ The safety fence panels can be combined with woven mesh,
sheet metal, perforated plate, Polycarbonatee and visual
protection.
→ Assembly and disassembly is always performed from the safe
side (outside of danger zone).
→ The fasteners are captive, as required by the applicable
standards. The clips remain bolted to the mesh panel –
nothing gets lost.
www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
and aluminium in one continuous safety fence system. With its
modular design, the system can be adapted to the widest variety
of working environments and provides maximum safety.
→ For this safety fence system various ground clearances
are available (standard: 175 mm / reduced ground
clearance: 20 mm).
→ The steel posts are grit blasted and powder coated, ensuring
maximum impact resistance.
→ The infill materials and posts of the safety fence system
Aluminium Fence I are available in various colours and with
hot-dip galvanised finish. B See page 238.
→ Modern design with fence posts that are flush with fence line –
the posts are not hidden by fence panels.
The safety fence system Aluminium Fence I used for safeguarding an automation system
safety fence system aluminium fence i 55

safety fence systems

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
56  safety fence system aluminium fence i

Safety fence system Aluminium Fence I

Product group: A-SZ1

g
cin
s pa
P ost
Mesh panel height
Fence height

Gr
ou
nd
cle
ara
nce

standard mesh panels for safety fence system aluminium fence i

(Ground Clearance 175 mm)

Fence Line Infill Material Post Spacing (distance between centres of posts)

Internal Corner 300 400 500 600 700 800 900

Straight Fence Line

310 410 510 610 710 810 910

(thickness 1.5 mm)

Mesh Panel Height

or External Corner

Visual Protection

Visual Protection
Welded Mesh 40
Perforated Plate

Perforated Plate

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonatee
Square Holes
Fence Height

Mesh Panel Width b (Post Spacing – Post Thickness – 20)

Round Holes
Sheet Metal
Corner Clip,

Corner Clip,
Right Side
Product

Left Side

Bronze

Green

b=230 b=330 b=430 b=530 b=630 b=730 b=830

1400 A-SZ1 — -EL -ER -BL -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG40 -P -SSB -SSG -1225 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830
1600 A-SZ1 — -EL -ER -BL -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG40 -P -SSB -SSG -1425 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830
1800 A-SZ1 — -EL -ER -BL -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG40 -P -SSB -SSG -1625 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830
2000 A-SZ1 — -EL -ER -BL -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG40 -P -SSB -SSG -1825 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830
2200 A-SZ1 — -EL -ER -BL -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG40 -P -SSB -SSG -2025 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830
2400 A-SZ1 — -EL -ER -BL -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG40 -P -SSB -SSG -2225 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830
2600* A-SZ1 — -EL -ER -BL -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG40 -P -SSB -SSG -2425 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830

example for item number system for straight fence line or external corner: example for item number system for internal corner:
Product-Infill material-Mesh panel height-Mesh panel width A-SZ1-BL-1225-230 Product-Fence line-Infill material-Mesh panel height-Mesh panel width A-SZ1-EL-BL-1225-230

* For a fence height of 2600, the post profile 60 x 60 is used.

C The panel height is specified for all safety fence systems (Panel height = Fence height – Ground clearance 175 mm).  C A ground clearance of 20 mm is available upon request.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 safety fence system aluminium fence i 57

frame infill materials

1 2 3

safety fence systems

4 5 6

7 8

1 Welded mesh  2 Woven mesh  3 Polycarbonatee  4 Sheet metal 

5 Visual protection bronze  6 Visual protection green 
7 Perforated plate, Round holes  8 Perforated plate, Square holes

scope of delivery
Screws are included and pre-mounted to the clips so that
captivity is ensured.

post spacing information

Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater
than 2400, as the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm.

Post spacing=600

Mesh panel width b=530

Post profile QR50

Post profile QR60

Post Spacing (distance between centres of posts)  B See Post Spacing Information on right.
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200
1010 1110 1210 1310 1410 1510 1610 1710 1810 1910 2010 2110 2210
Mesh panel width b=530
Mesh Panel Width b (Post Spacing – Post Thickness – 20)  B See Fence Planning on page 58.
Post spacing=610

b=930 b=1030 b=1130 b=1230 b=1330 b=1430 b=1530 b=1630 b=1730 b=1830 b=1930 b=2030 b=2130

-930 -1030 -1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130
B See Fence Planning page 58.
-930 -1030 -1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130
-930 -1030 -1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130
-930 -1030 -1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130
-930 -1030 -1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130
-930 -1030 -1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130
-930 -1030 -1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
58  safety fence system aluminium fence i

Steel posts for safety fence system Aluminium Fence I

straight fence line aluminium fence i bottom connection aluminium fence i
Line post (DP …)

internal corner aluminium fence i external corner aluminium fence i

Line post (DP...) Corner post (EP …)

t-joint fence line aluminium fence i

T-joint post (TP …) T-joint post (TP …)

C Panels can be mounted on the right or left side of the T-joint post – mounting sites are available on both sides.  A When ordering fence panels the end caps are not included.

fence planning: safety fence system aluminium fence i

Posts 50x50 Posts 60x60

AM=995* AM=995* AM=1005* AM=1005*

Internal cornerInternal corner 930 930 Internal cornerInternal corner 930 930

A-SZ1-EL…930 A-SZ1-EL…930 A-SZ1-EL…930 A-SZ1-EL…930

A-SZ1…930

A-SZ1…930
A-SZ1…930

A-SZ1…930
AM=1000

AM=1010
AM=1000

AM=1010

External cornerExternal corner External cornerExternal corner

930

930
930

930

A-SZ1…930 A-SZ1…930 A-SZ1…930 A-SZ1…930

930 930 930 930

AM=1000 AM=1000 AM=1010 AM=1010

* Post spacing with internal corners is 5 mm shorter. * Post spacing with internal corners is 5 mm shorter.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 180°
safety fence system aluminium fence i 59

180°
product features and advantages 180°

Sturdy four-hole base plate Fully welded connection of Adjustable post bases for Height adjustment for eve- Rugged post wall thickness Flow-drilled threads for a
post profile and base plate easier mounting of the posts ning out irregularities in the of at least 2.0 mm secure fastening of the mesh

for optimal stability on uneven floors fence line (diagram shows panels

safety fence systems

neutral position)
2,0 mm

+52/+49 mm

Neutral position
–7 mm

steel posts for saftey fence system aluminium fence i

Posts without Height Adjustment

Fence Line Post with Corner Post T-joint Post with

Line Post Line Post Corner Post T-joint Post
Height Adjustable Base with Adjustable Base Adjustable Base

1400 DP-Z-1400-0613 DP-Z-1400-1313 EP-Z-1400-1313 TP-Z-1400-1313 DPJ-Z-1400-1313 EPJ-Z-1400-1313 TPJ-Z-1400-1313

1600 DP-Z-1600-0613 DP-Z-1600-1313 EP-Z-1600-1313 TP-Z-1600-1313 DPJ-Z-1600-1313 EPJ-Z-1600-1313 TPJ-Z-1600-1313
1800 DP-Z-1800-0613 DP-Z-1800-1313 EP-Z-1800-1313 TP-Z-1800-1313 DPJ-Z-1800-1313 EPJ-Z-1800-1313 TPJ-Z-1800-1313
2000 DP-Z-2000-0613 DP-Z-2000-1313 EP-Z-2000-1313 TP-Z-2000-1313 DPJ-Z-2000-1313 EPJ-Z-2000-1313 TPJ-Z-2000-1313
2200 DP-Z-2200-0613 DP-Z-2200-1313 EP-Z-2200-1313 TP-Z-2200-1313 DPJ-Z-2200-1313 EPJ-Z-2200-1313 TPJ-Z-2200-1313
2400 DP-Z-2400-0613 DP-Z-2400-1313 EP-Z-2400-1313 TP-Z-2400-1313 DPJ-Z-2400-1313 EPJ-Z-2400-1313 TPJ-Z-2400-1313
2600** DP-Z-2600-0715 DP-Z-2600-1515 EP-Z-2600-1515 TP-Z-2600-1515 DPJ-Z-2600-1515 EPJ-Z-2600-1515 TPJ-Z-2600-1515

Posts with Height Adjustment

Fence Line Post with Line Post with Corner Post with T-joint Post with Line Post with Corner Post with T-joint Post with
Height Height Adjustment Height Adjustment Height Adjustment Height Adjustment Height Adjustment Height Adjustment* Height Adjustment*

Height Ad- + 52 + 52 + 52 + 52 + 49 + 49 + 49

justment – 7 – 7 – 7 – 7 – 7 – 7 ­–  7
1400 DPHV1-Z-1400-0613 DPHV1-Z-1400-1313 EPHV1-Z-1400-1313 TPHV1-Z-1400-1313 DPHV2-Z-1400-50 EPHV2-Z-1400-50 TPHV2-Z-1400-50
1600 DPHV1-Z-1600-0613 DPHV1-Z-1600-1313 EPHV1-Z-1600-1313 TPHV1-Z-1600-1313 DPHV2-Z-1600-50 EPHV2-Z-1600-50 TPHV2-Z-1600-50
1800 DPHV1-Z-1800-0613 DPHV1-Z-1800-1313 EPHV1-Z-1800-1313 TPHV1-Z-1800-1313 DPHV2-Z-1800-50 EPHV2-Z-1800-50 TPHV2-Z-1800-50
2000 DPHV1-Z-2000-0613 DPHV1-Z-2000-1313 EPHV1-Z-2000-1313 TPHV1-Z-2000-1313 DPHV2-Z-2000-50 EPHV2-Z-2000-50 TPHV2-Z-2000-50
2200 DPHV1-Z-2200-0613 DPHV1-Z-2200-1313 EPHV1-Z-2200-1313 TPHV1-Z-2200-1313 DPHV2-Z-2200-50 EPHV2-Z-2200-50 TPHV2-Z-2200-50
2400 DPHV1-Z-2400-0613 DPHV1-Z-2400-1313 EPHV1-Z-2400-1313 TPHV1-Z-2400-1313 DPHV2-Z-2400-50 EPHV2-Z-2400-50 TPHV2-Z-2400-50
2600** DPHV1-Z-2600-0715 DPHV1-Z-2600-1515 EPHV1-Z-2600-1515 TPHV1-Z-2600-1515 DPHV2-Z-2600-60 ­EPHV2-Z-2600-60 TPHV2-Z-2600-60

* Height Adjustment HV2 cannot be combined with ground clearance 20 mm.   ** For a fence height of 2600, the post profile 60 x 60 is used.

B Floor mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  A Before placing your order, check to make sure that you have selected the correct corner post. (Internal corner: DP, External corner: EP)

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
60  stainless steel safety fence systems

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 stainless steel safety fence systems 61

safety fence systems

Stainless steel safety
fence systems
(Euronorm no. 1.4301)

Versatile stainless-steel safety fence systems for guards in

accordance with the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC,
DIN EN ISO 12100, DIN EN ISO 953 and DIN EN 1088

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
62  stainless steel safety fence systems
Stainless steel safety fence systems (Euronorm no. 1.4301)
Stainless steel safety fence systems are fixed guards that were
designed for special applications and environments. They are
used in the food industry as well as in workplaces where acids and
bases are used. (Please specify the right system when placing
Advantages of Stainless Steel Flex II at-a-glance:
→ The wire mesh panels consist of wires and flat bars. These
provide for high stability and rigidity with minimal weight.
→ The width of the mesh panels can be reduced by 23mm sec-
tions.
→ Assembly and disassembly is always performed from the safe
side (outside of danger zone).
→ The fence line can be assembled in any angle. This has a posi-
tive effect on installation time as well as on flexibility during
the assembly process.
→ The fasteners are captive, as required by the applicable
standards. The clips remain bolted to the mesh panel – noth-
ing gets lost.
→ Optimal viewing of operations through frameless construction
with a mesh size of 20x200 mm.
→ As necessary, other elements (e.g. hinged doors, sliding doors,
lift gates, double action swing doors, platforms etc.) can be
built into this safety fence system, allowing for complete,
customised solutions.
→ Modern design with fence posts that are flush with panels –
the posts are not hidden by fence panels.
With its frameless construction the stainless steel safety fence system Stainless Steel Flex II has particularly few surfaces.
www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
your order.) Due to its frameless construction there are particu-
larly few surfaces in the safety fence system Stainless Steel Flex II.
This prevents the collection of dust and residues.
→ The components of the safety fence system are pickled.
→ For this system various ground clearances are available
(standard: 175 mm / reduced ground clearance: 20 mm).
Advantages of Stainless Steel Fence II at-a-glance:
→ The wire mesh panels consist of steel frames with welded or
mounted infill material.
→ Assembly and disassembly is always performed from the safe
side (outside of danger zone).
→ The fasteners are captive, as required by the applicable
standards. The clips remain bolted to the mesh panel – noth-
ing gets lost.
→ For this system various ground clearances are available
(standard: 175 mm / reduced ground clearance: 20 mm).
→ Modern design with fence posts that are flush with panels –
the posts are not hidden by fence panels.
→ Mounting clips that ensure captivity can be ordered sepa-
rately. B See page 146.
→ The components of the safety fence system are pickled.
stainless steel safety fence systems 63

safety fence systems

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
64  safety fence system stainless steel flex ii

Safety fence system Stainless Steel Flex II

Product group: E-SF2

ing
s pac
P ost
Mesh panel height
Fence height

Gro
und
cle
ara
nce

standard mesh panels for safety fence system stainless steel flex ii

Post Spacing (distance between centres of posts)  B See Post Spacing Information on page 65.
(Ground Clearance 175 mm)

300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100

Mesh Panel Height
Fence Height

Mesh Panel Width b (Post Spacing – Post Thickness – 20)  B See Fence Planning page 66.
Product

b=230 b=330 b=430 b=530 b=630 b=730 b=830 b=930 b=1030

2000 E-SF2 -1825 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830 -930 -1030
2200 E-SF2 -2025 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830 -930 -1030
2400 E-SF2 -2225 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830 -930 -1030

example for item number system

Product- Mesh panel height- Mesh panel width E-SF2-1825-1730

C The panel height is specified for all safety fence systems (Panel height = Fence height – Ground clearance 175 mm).  C A ground clearance of 20 mm is available upon request.
C The material stainless steel (Euronorm no. 1.4301) may be slightly magnetic.   C The delivery time for preferred dimensions is shorter. Please take this into consideration when placing your order.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 safety fence system stainless steel flex ii 65

product advantages
Angular fence line

90°

safety fence systems

35°

Fence posts are flush with panels – the posts are not hidden by fence panels

180°

Oval fence line possible

Mesh is quick to cut / easy to assemble

Integrated height adjustment Captivity of the fasteners

on the mesh panel

No. of Clips
per Panel to
Post Spacing (distance between centres of posts)  B Post Spacing Information on right. be ordered post spacing information
separately
B s. p. 145.
Post spacing=600
1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800
Mesh panel width b=530

Mesh Panel Width b (Post Spacing – Post Thickness – 20)  B See Fence Planning page 66. E-FL2
Post profile QR50

b=1130 b=1230 b=1330 b=1430 b=1530 b=1630 b=1730

-1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 8

B See Fence Planning page 66.
-1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 8
-1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 10

Preferred dimensions

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
66  safety fence system stainless steel flex ii

Posts for safety fence system Stainless Steel Flex II

straight fence line stainless steel flex ii angular fence line stainless steel flex ii
Line post (DP …) Line post (DP …)

internal corner stainless steel flex ii external corner stainless steel flex ii
Line post (DP …) Corner post (EP …)

t-joint fence line stainless steel flex ii

T-joint post (TP …) T-joint post (TP …)

C Panels can be mounted on the right or left side of the T-joint post – mounting sites are available on both sides.

fence planning: safety fence system stainless steel flex ii

Posts 50x50

AM=985* AM=995*
Internal corner 930 Internal corner 930

E-SF2…930 SF2…0930
65
E-SF2…930

External corner External corner

SF2…0930
AM=1000

AM=1010
930

930

E-SF2…930 SF2…0930
930 930
AM=1000 AM=1010

* Post spacing with internal corners is 15 mm shorter.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 180°
safety fence system stainless steel flex ii 67

180°
product features and advantages 180°

Sturdy four-hole base plate Fully welded connection of Adjustable post bases for Height adjustment for eve- Rugged post wall thickness Flow-drilled threads for a
post profile and base plate easier mounting of the posts ning out irregularities in the of at least 2.0 mm secure fastening of the mesh

for optimal stability on uneven floors fence line (diagram shows panels

safety fence systems

neutral position)
2,0 mm

+52/+49 mm

Neutral position
–7 mm

posts for saftey fence system stainless steel flex ii

Posts without Height Adjustment

Fence Line Post with Corner Post T-joint Post with

Line Post Line Post Corner Post T-joint Post
Height Adjustable Base with Adjustable Base Adjustable Base

2000 E-DP-F-2000-0613 E-DP-F-2000-1313 E-EP-F-2000-1313 E-TP-F-2000-1313 E-DPJ-F-2000-1313 E-EPJ-F-2000-1313 E-TPJ-F-2000-1313

2200 E-DP-F-2200-0613 E-DP-F-2200-1313 E-EP-F-2200-1313 E-TP-F-2200-1313 E-DPJ-F-2200-1313 E-EPJ-F-2200-1313 E-TPJ-F-2200-1313
2400 E-DP-F-2400-0613 E-DP-F-2400-1313 E-EP-F-2400-1313 E-TP-F-2400-1313 E-DPJ-F-2400-1313 E-EPJ-F-2400-1313 E-TPJ-F-2400-1313

Posts with Height Adjustment

Fence Line Post with Line Post with Corner Post with T-joint Post with Line Post with Corner Post with T-joint Post with
Height Height Adjustment Height Adjustment Height Adjustment Height Adjustment Height Adjustment Height Adjustment Height Adjustment

Height Ad- + 52 + 52 + 52 + 52 + 49 + 49 + 49

justment – 7 – 7 – 7 – 7 – 7 – 7 – 7
2000 E-DPHV1-F-2000-0613 E-DPHV1-F-2000-1313 E-EPHV1-F-2000-1313 E-TPHV1-F-2000-1313 E-DPHV2-F-2000-50 E-EPHV2-F-2000-50 E-TPHV2-F-2000-50
2200 E-DPHV1-F-2200-0613 E-DPHV1-F-2200-1313 E-EPHV1-F-2200-1313 E-TPHV1-F-2200-1313 E-DPHV2-F-2200-50 E-EPHV2-F-2200-50 E-TPHV2-F-2200-50
2400 E-DPHV1-F-2400-0613 E-DPHV1-F-2400-1313 E-EPHV1-F-2400-1313 E-TPHV1-F-2400-1313 E-DPHV2-F-2400-50 E-EPHV2-F-2400-50 E-TPHV2-F-2400-50

B Floor mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  A Before placing your order, check to make sure that you have selected the correct corner post! (Internal corner: DP, External corner: EP)

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
68  safety fence system stainless steel fence ii

Safety fence system Stainless Steel Fence II

Product group: E-SZ2

g
cin
s pa
st
Po
Mesh panel height
Fence height

e
nc
le ara
n dc
ou
Gr

standard mesh panels for safety fence system stainless steel fence ii

Fence Line Infill Material Post Spacing (distance between centres of posts) 

Internal Corner 300 400 500 600 700 800 900

Mesh Panel Height
(Ground Clearance

310 410 510 610 710 810 910

Woven Mesh 40
Line or External

Polycarbonatee
Straight Fence
Fence Height

Corner Clip,

Corner Clip,

Mesh Panel Width b (Post Spacing – Post Thickness – 20)

Right Side

175 mm)
Product

Left Side
Corner

Flex II

b=230 b=330 b=430 b=530 b=630 b=730 b=830

1400 E-SZ2 — -EL -ER -F -WG40 -P -1225 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830
1600 E-SZ2 — -EL -ER -F -WG40 -P -1425 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830
1800 E-SZ2 — -EL -ER -F -WG40 -P -1625 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830
2000 E-SZ2 — -EL -ER -F -WG40 -P -1825 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830
2200 E-SZ2 — -EL -ER -F -WG40 -P -2025 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830
2400 E-SZ2 — -EL -ER -F -WG40 -P -2225 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830
2600* E-SZ2 — -EL -ER -F -WG40 -P -2425 -230 -330 -430 -530 -630 -730 -830

example for item number system for straight fence line and external corner example for item number system für innenecke:
Product-Infill material-Mesh panel height-Mesh panel width E-SZ2-WG40-1225-230 Product-Fence line-Infill material-Mesh panel height-Mesh panel width E-SZ2-EL-WG40-1225-230

* For a fence height of 2600, the post profile 60 x 60 is used.

C The panel height is specified for all safety fence systems (Panel height = Fence height – Ground clearance 175 mm)  C A ground clearance of 20 mm is available upon request.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 safety fence system stainless steel fence ii 69

frame profiles
Vierkantrohr 25/25

safety fence systems

frame infill materials

1 2 3
P

1 Woven mesh 40/40  2 Polycarbonatee  3 Flex

product advantages
Fence posts are flush with panels – the posts are not hidden by fence panels

post spacing information

Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater
than 2400, as the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm.

Post spacing=600

Mesh panel width b=530

Post profile QR50

Post profile QR60

Mesh panel width b=530

Post spacing=610

B See Fence Planning page 70.

Post Spacing (distance between centres of posts)  B See Post Spacing Information on page 69.
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400
1010 1110 1210 1310 1410 1510 1610 1710 1810 1910 2010

Mesh Panel Width b (Post Spacing – Post Thickness – 20)  B See Fence Planning on page 70.
b=930 b=1030 b=1130 b=1230 b=1330 b=1430 b=1530 b=1630 b=1730 b=1830 b=1930 b=2030 b=2130 b=2230 b=2330

-930 -1030 -1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130 -2230 -2330
-930 -1030 -1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130 -2230 -2330
-930 -1030 -1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130 -2230 -2330
-930 -1030 -1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130 -2230 -2330
-930 -1030 -1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130 -2230 -2330
-930 -1030 -1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 -2030 -2130 ­— ­—
-930 -1030 -1130 -1230 -1330 -1430 -1530 -1630 -1730 -1830 -1930 ­— ­— ­— ­—

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
70  safety fence system stainless steel fence ii

Posts for safety fence system Stainless Steel Fence II

straight fence line stainless steel fence ii bottom connection stainless steel fence ii
Line post (DP …)

internal corner stainless steel fence ii external corner stainless steel fence ii
Line post (DP...) Corner post (EP …)

t-joint fence line stainless steel fence ii

T-joint post (TP …) T-joint post (TP …)

C Panels can be mounted on the right or left side of the T-joint post – mounting sites are available on both sides.

fence planning: safety fence system stainless steel fence ii

Posts 50x50 Posts 60x60

AM=995* AM=995* AM=1005* AM=1005*

Internal corner Internal corner 930 930 Internal corner Internal corner 930 930

E-SZ2-EL…930 E-SZ2-EL…930 E-SZ2-EL…930 E-SZ2-EL…930

E-SZ2…930
E-SZ2…930
E-SZ2…930
E-SZ2…930

AM=1010
AM=1010
AM=1000
AM=1000

External corner External corner External corner External corner

930
930
930
930

E-SZ2…930 E-SZ2…930 E-SZ2…930 E-SZ2…930

930 930 930 930

AM=1000 AM=1000 AM=1010 AM=1010

* Post spacing with internal corners is 5 mm shorter. * Post spacing with internal corners is 5 mm shorter.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 180°
safety fence system stainless steel fence ii 71

180°
product features and advantages 180°

Sturdy four-hole base plate Fully welded connection of Adjustable post bases for Height adjustment for eve- Rugged post wall thickness Flow-drilled threads for a
post profile and base plate easier mounting of the posts ning out irregularities in the of at least 2.0 mm secure fastening of the mesh

for optimal stability on uneven floors fence line (diagram shows panels

safety fence systems

neutral position)
2,0 mm

+52/+49 mm

Neutral position
–7 mm

posts for stainless steel saftey fence system fence ii

Posts without Height Adjustment

Fence Line Post with Corner Post T-joint Post with

Line Post Line Post Corner Post T-joint Post
Height Adjustable Base with Adjustable Base Adjustable Base

1400 E-DP-Z-1400-0613 E-DP-Z-1400-1313 E-EP-Z-1400-1313 E-TP-Z-1400-1313 E-DPJ-Z-1400-1313 E-EPJ-Z-1400-1313 E-TPJ-Z-1400-1313

1600 E-DP-Z-1600-0613 E-DP-Z-1600-1313 E-EP-Z-1600-1313 E-TP-Z-1600-1313 E-DPJ-Z-1600-1313 E-EPJ-Z-1600-1313 E-TPJ-Z-1600-1313
1800 E-DP-Z-1800-0613 E-DP-Z-1800-1313 E-EP-Z-1800-1313 E-TP-Z-1800-1313 E-DPJ-Z-1800-1313 E-EPJ-Z-1800-1313 E-TPJ-Z-1800-1313
2000 E-DP-Z-2000-0613 E-DP-Z-2000-1313 E-EP-Z-2000-1313 E-TP-Z-2000-1313 E-DPJ-Z-2000-1313 E-EPJ-Z-2000-1313 E-TPJ-Z-2000-1313
2200 E-DP-Z-2200-0613 E-DP-Z-2200-1313 E-EP-Z-2200-1313 E-TP-Z-2200-1313 E-DPJ-Z-2200-1313 E-EPJ-Z-2200-1313 E-TPJ-Z-2200-1313
2400 E-DP-Z-2400-0613 E-DP-Z-2400-1313 E-EP-Z-2400-1313 E-TP-Z-2400-1313 E-DPJ-Z-2400-1313 E-EPJ-Z-2400-1313 E-TPJ-Z-2400-1313
2600** E-DP-Z-2600-0715 E-DP-Z-2600-1515 E-EP-Z-2600-1515 E-TP-Z-2600-1515 E-DPJ-Z-2600-1515 E-EPJ-Z-2600-1515 E-TPJ-Z-2600-1515

Posts with Height Adjustment

Fence Line Post with Line Post with Corner Post with T-joint Post with Line Post with Corner Post with T-joint Post with
Height Height Adjustment Height Adjustment Height Adjustment* Height Adjustment* Height Adjustment Height Adjustment* Height Adjustment*

Height Ad- + 52 + 52 + 52 + 52 + 49 + 49 + 49

justment – 7 – 7 – 7 – 7 – 7 – 7 – 7
1400 E-DPHV1-Z-1400-0613 E-DPHV1-Z-1400-1313 E-EPHV1-Z-1400-1313 E-TPHV1-Z-1400-1313 E-DPHV2-Z-1400-50 E-EPHV2-Z-1400-50 E-TPHV2-Z-1400-50
1600 E-DPHV1-Z-1600-0613 E-DPHV1-Z-1600-1313 E-EPHV1-Z-1600-1313 E-TPHV1-Z-1600-1313 E-DPHV2-Z-1600-50 E-EPHV2-Z-1600-50 E-TPHV2-Z-1600-50
1800 E-DPHV1-Z-1800-0613 E-DPHV1-Z-1800-1313 E-EPHV1-Z-1800-1313 E-TPHV1-Z-1800-1313 E-DPHV2-Z-1800-50 E-EPHV2-Z-1800-50 E-TPHV2-Z-1800-50
2000 E-DPHV1-Z-2000-0613 E-DPHV1-Z-2000-1313 E-EPHV1-Z-2000-1313 E-TPHV1-Z-2000-1313 E-DPHV2-Z-2000-50 E-EPHV2-Z-2000-50 E-TPHV2-Z-2000-50
2200 E-DPHV1-Z-2200-0613 E-DPHV1-Z-2200-1313 E-EPHV1-Z-2200-1313 E-TPHV1-Z-2200-1313 E-DPHV2-Z-2200-50 E-EPHV2-Z-2200-50 E-TPHV2-Z-2200-50
2400 E-DPHV1-Z-2400-0613 E-DPHV1-Z-2400-1313 E-EPHV1-Z-2400-1313 E-TPHV1-Z-2400-1313 E-DPHV2-Z-2400-50 E-EPHV2-Z-2400-50 E-TPHV2-Z-2400-50
2600** E-DPHV1-Z-2600-0715 E-DPHV1-Z-2600-1515 E-EPHV1-Z-2600-1515 E-TPHV1-Z-2600-1515 E-DPHV2-Z-2600-60 E-­EPHV2-Z-2600-60 E-TPHV2-Z-2600-60

* The combination of height adjustment HV2 with 20mm ground clearance is only possible to a limited extent.  **For a fence height of 2600, the post profile 60 x 60 is used.

B Floor mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  A Before placing your order, check to make sure that you have selected the correct corner post. (Internal corner: DP, External corner: EP)

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
72  brühl doors

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl doors 73

doors
Brühl Doors

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
74  brühl doors

Brühl Doors
On the following pages we provide you with information on the
different door models by Hans Georg Brühl GmbH. There will be
a subsection for each of these door types: hinged doors, sliding
doors, double action swing doors and special doors. Technical
specifications are included in the product overviews. In these tables
each infill material will be printed in a special colour. Additionally
you can find information on door accessories such as mounting
systems for safety switches on the corresponding product pages.

Each safety fence system is printed in a special colour that can be found in the tables and product overviews as well.

Safety fence Safety fence Safety fence Safety fence Safety fence Safety fence
system Flex II system Fence II system Wall II system Aluminium system Stainless system Stainless
Fence I Steel Flex II Steel Fence II

Flex II fence line with telescopic cantilever siding door

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl doors 75

overview of possible combinations of doors and safety fence systems / infill material
Safety Fence Systems

Product Group /
Stainless
Aluminium Stainless
Product Description Flex II Fence II Wall II Steel
Fence I Steel Flex II
Fence II

Model
B s. p. 27 B s. p. 37 B s. p. 45 B s. p. 53 B s. p. 64 B s. p. 68
Hinged door with mortise lock FTS ● ● ● — — —
Hinged door for handle or latch FTR ● ● ● — — —
Stainless steel hinged door with mortise lock E-FTS — — — — ● ●
Stainless steel hinged door for handle or latch E-FTR — — — — ● ●
Aluminium hinged door with mortise lock A-FTS — — — ● — —
Aluminium hinged door for handle or latch A-FTR — — — ● — —
Hinged door with mortise lock and transom FTSO ● — — — — —
Hinged door for handle or latch, with transom FTRO ● — — — — —
Hinged Doors

— — —

B s. p. 76
Portal hinged door with mortise lock PFTS ● ● ●
● ● ● — — —

doors
Portal hinged door for handle or latch PFTR
Hinged door with mortise lock, inward opening FTSEO ● ● ● — — —
Hinged door for handle or latch, inward opening FTREO ● ● ● — — —
Hinged door with mortise lock and adjustable height FTSHV1 ● ● ● — — —
Hinged door for handle or latch, with adjustable height FTRHV1 ● ● ● — — —
Double-leaf hinged door with mortise lock DFTS ● ● ● — — —
Double-leaf hinged door for handle or latch DFTR ● ● ● — — —
Double-leaf hinged door with mortise lock and transom DFTSO ● — — — — —
Hinged door for handle or latch, with transom DFTRO ● — — — — —
● ● ● — — —
Double Action

Double action swing door PT

Hinged Doors
Swing Doors,

B s. p. 96
Individual

Individual hinged door with mortise lock TFS ● ● ● — — —

Individual hinged door for handle or latch TFR ● ● ● — — —
Sliding door with hook latch STS ● ● ● — — —
Sliding door for handle STG ● ● ● — — —
Stainless steel sliding door with hook latch E-STS — — — — ● ●
Stainless steel sliding door for handle E-STG — — — — ● ●
Aluminium sliding door with hook latch A-STS — — — ● — —
Aluminium sliding door for handle A-STG — — — ● — —
Sliding door with hook latch and transom STSO ● — — — — —
Sliding Doors

B s. p. 102
Sliding door for handle, with transom STGO ● — — — — —
Sliding door with adjustable height and hook latch STSHV1 ● ● ● — — —
Sliding door with adjustable height, for handle STGHV1 ● ● ● — — —
Double-leaf sliding door with hook latch DSTS ● ● ● — — —
Double-leaf sliding door for handle DSTG ● ● ● — — —
Sliding door with hook latch, opening from both sides STSW ● ● ● — — —
Sliding door for handle, opening from both sides STGW ● ● ● — — —
Double-leaf sliding door with hook latch and transom DSTSO ● — — — — —
Double-leaf sliding door for handle, with transom DSTGO ● — — — — —
Folding hinged door for bar latch FAFTR ● ● ● — — —
Folding Hinged
Doors, Folding
Sliding Doors

B s. p. 120

Folding hinged door for bar latch, bi-parting DFAFTR ● ● ● — — —

Folding sliding door for handle FASTG ● ● ● — — —
Folding sliding door for handle, bi-parting DFASTG ● ● ● — — —
Sliding door with hook latch, telescopic STST ● ● ● — — —
Sliding door for handle, telescopic STGT ● ● ● — — —
Sliding Doors,

B s. p. 126

— — —
Telescopic

Sliding door for handle, telescopic and bi-parting STSWT ● ● ●

Sliding door for handle, telescopic and bi-parting STGWT ● ● ● — — —
Sliding door with hook latch, telescopic and bi-parting DSTST ● ● ● — — —
Sliding door for handle, telescopic and bi-parting DSTGT ● ● ● — — —
Cantilever sliding door with hook latch FSTS ● ● ● — — —
Sliding Doors

B s. p. 134

— — —
Cantilever

Cantilever sliding door for handle FSTG ● ● ●

Cantilever sliding door with hook latch, telescopic FSTST ● ● ● — — —
Cantilever sliding door for handle, telescopic FSTGT ● ● ● — — —
●  Combination is possible. ­­—  Combination is not possible.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
76  brühl hinged doors

Hinged doors
We place great importance on customised solutions that guar-
antee effective workflows for our customers. As a result we have
developed a wide range of hinged doors that can be adapted for
any and every application as optimal solutions that meet the re-
quirements of individual production processes. All doors can be
integrated as modular units in any of our safety fence systems
and are available in all colours.

Bauart FTS / FTR Product advantages and features of all models at-a-glance:

→ Special sizes and custom-designed units are available upon request.
→ These doors can be combined with all frame infill materials.
→ Robust, durable hinges well suited to door size.
→ Hinged doors can be combined with standard Brühl door
accessories. B See page 150.
→ Special doors are compatible with the standard mounting systems f
or safety switches from BRÜHL. B See page 158.
→ The components are grit blasted and powder coated – guaranteeing
maximum impact resistance.
→ Hinged doors are available in various colours and with a hot-dip
galvanised finish. B See page 238.
→ Two-tone colour combination available, i.e. posts and mesh panels
can be ordered in different colours.

additional hinged door models

Stainless steel hinged doors – Model e-fts / e-ftr Aluminium hinged doors – Model a-fts / a-ftr

→ Hinged door made from stainless → Steel lock box profile with
steel (Euronorm no. 1.4301). mounted aluminium profile.

B For specifications for this model see page 80/81. B For specifications for this model see page 82/83.

Hinged doors with transom – Model ftso / ftro Portal hinged doors – Model pfts / pftr

→ For fence heights up to 4835 mm → Precise mounting thanks to a

with transom bar and transom sturdy portal consisting of posts
mesh panel. and transom bar.

B For specifications for this model see page 84/85. B For specifications for this model see page 86/87.

Inward opening hinged doors – Model ftseo / ftreo Hinged doors with adjustable height – Model ftshv1 / ftrhv1

→  Inward opening hinged doors for → Height adjustment for variations

individual applications where the of +52/-7 mm from the neutral
door is not used as an escape or position.
emergency exit and where the
installation of standard hinged
B For specifications for this model see page 90/91.
doors is impossible.
B For specifications for this model see page 88/89.
Double-leaf hinged doors – Model dfts / dftr Double-leaf hinged doors with transom – Model dftso / dftro

→ For post spacings up to → For fence heights up to 4835 mm

4030 mm – drop rod on the with transom bar and transom
machine side. mesh panel.

B For specifications for this model see page 92/93. B For specifications for this model see page 94/95.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl hinged doors 77

technical specifications for standard hinged doors

C Custom designed units available upon request.

Product Group / Model fts ftr e-fts e-ftr a-fts a-ftr ftso ftro pfts pftr ftseo ftreo ftshv1 ftrhv1 dfts dftr dftso dftro

Dimensions

Max. post spacing in mm 1410 1410 1410 1410 1410 1410 1430 1430 1410 1410 1410 1410 1410 1410 4030 4030 2830 2830

Max. door/fence height in mm 2600 2600 2600 2600 2600 2600 4835 4835 2600 2600 2600 2600 2600 2600 2600 2600 4835 4835

Infill Material

Flex ● ● ● ● — — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Woven mesh 40 ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ○ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ○
● ● — — ● ● ○ ○ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ○

doors
Sheet metal 1.5 mm

Polycarbonatee 5 mm ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ○ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ○
Woven mesh 25 ● ● — — — — ○ ○ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ○
Welded mesh 40 ● ● — — ● ● ○ ○ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ○
Perforated plate, Round hole RV 5-8 ● ● — — ● ● ○ ○ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ○
Perforated plate, Square hole Qg 8-12 ● ● — — ● ● ○ ○ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ○
Visual protection, bronze ● ● — — ● ● ○ ○ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ○
Visual protection, green ● ● — — ● ● ○ ○ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ○

Brühl Door Accessories

Door handle sets ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● —

Door stop mechanism ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● — — ● ● ● ● ● ●

Mounting Systems for Safety Switches

BRÜHL-GR-F ® — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ●
Brühl-GRK-F ® — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ●
BRÜHL-HP-F ® ● — ○ — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● —
BRÜHL-RI ® — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — — — ● — ● — ●
BRÜHL-SN-F ●● ● ● ● ● — — — — — — ● ● ● ● — —
BRÜHL-UER ® — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ●

Finishes

Powder-coated finish/colour ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Hot-dip galvanised finish ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

●  Combination is possible.   —  Combination is not possible.   ○  Combination is possible as option.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
78  brühl hinged doors

door handle sets

Hinged door with mortise lock
The strike posts and hinge posts for these door sets are made from a sturdy steel profile with
welded four-hole base plates. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts.
Owing to the positioning of the welded-on hinges, the door cannot be lifted off its hinges.
Item no. TG-V1 Item no. TG-V2 Item no. TG-V5
Product Group / Model: FTS   C Illustration shows FTS with door handle set TG-V5. B Door handle sets must be ordered separately. See page 150.
A TG-V1 only for use with solid infill materials, sheet metal / Polycarbonatee.
mounting systems for safety switches

Po
st
sp
ac
ing machine side
Item no. HP-F-V… Item no. HP-F-V… Item no. SN-F-V…

B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
Panel height

close-up views
11 2
Fence height

1 Door with handle  2 Sturdy welded door hinge

post spacing information

Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400, as
the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Gr
ou Post spacing=1000
outside nd
cle 950
ara
nc
e Post profile QR50

DIN left DIN right

Post profile QR60
Machine side Machine side
Outside Outside 950
Post spacing=1010

hinged door with mortise lock

Post Spacing (distance
Handing Safety Fence System / Infill Material between centres of posts)
800 1000 1200 1400
Fence II 810 1010 1210 1410
Clear Opening*
Visual Protection

Visual Protection
Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Woven Mesh 25

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonate
Square Holes
Fence Height

Fence Height
Round Holes
Sheet Metal
Post Profile

685 885 1085 1285

DIN right

(1.5 mm)
Product

DIN left

Bronze
Wall II

Green
Flex II

Flex II

1400 FTS -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1600 FTS -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1600 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1800 FTS -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1800 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2000 FTS -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2000 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2200 FTS -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2200 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2400 FTS -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 FTS -L -R -60 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-FTS-L-50-Z-P-1400-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing).
example for item number system
Product-Handing-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing FTS-L-50-Z-P-1400-1200

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.
B All standard doors open outward. For inward opening doors, see pages 88.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm. 

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl hinged doors 79

handles
Hinged door for handle or latch
The strike posts and hinge posts for these door sets are made from a sturdy steel profile with
welded four-hole base plates. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts.
Owing to the positioning of the welded-on hinges, the door cannot be lifted off its hinges.
Item no. GRK-F-V1 Item no. GR-F-V… Item no. GR-F-V…
Product Group / Model: FTR   C Illustration shows FTR with handle GRK-F-V1. B Handles must be ordered separately. See page 150/160.

mounting systems for safety switches

Po
st
sp machine side
ac
ing Item no. RI-F-V… Item no. RI-F-V… Item no. SN-F-V…

B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.

doors
close-up views
Panel height

1 2

1 Door with handle  2 Sturdy welded door hinge

Fence height

post spacing information

Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400, as
the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Post spacing=1000
outside Gr
ou 950
nd
cle
ara Post profile QR50
nc
e

DIN left DIN right

Post profile QR60
Machine side Machine side
Outside Outside 950
Post spacing=1010

hinged door for handle or latch

Post Spacing (distance between
Handing Safety Fence System / Infill Material centres of posts)
800 1000 1200 1400
Fence II 810 1010 1210 1410
Clear Opening*
Visual Protection

Visual Protection
Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Woven Mesh 25

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonate
Square Holes
Fence Height

Fence Height
Round Holes
Sheet Metal
Post Profile

700 900 1100 1300

DIN right

(1.5 mm)
Product

DIN left

Bronze
Wall II

Green
Flex II

Flex II

1400 FTR -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1600 FTR -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1600 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1800 FTR -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1800 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2000 FTR -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2000 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2200 FTR -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2200 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2400 FTR -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 FTR -L -R -60 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-FTR-L-50-Z-P-1400-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product-Handing-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing FTR-L-50-Z-P-1400-1200

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.
B All standard doors open outward. For inward opening doors, see pages 88.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm. 

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
80  brühl hinged doors

door handle sets

Stainless steel hinged door
with mortise lock
The strike posts and hinge posts for these door sets are made from a sturdy stainless steel
profile with welded four-hole base plates. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line Upon request Upon request

posts. Owing to the positioning of the welded-on hinges, the door cannot be lifted off its hinges.
mounting systems for safety switches
Product Group / Model: E-FTS   C Illustration shows E-FTS with door handle set.

Po Upon request Upon request

st
sp machine side A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
ac
ing
close-up views

1 2
Panel height

1 Door with handle  2 Sturdy welded door hinge

post spacing information

Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400, as
the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.
Fence height

Post spacing=1000
950

Post profile QR50

outside
Gr
ou
nd
cle Post profile QR60
ara
nc
e 950
DIN left DIN right Post spacing=1010
Machine side Machine side
Outside Outside

stainless steel hinged door with mortise lock

Post Spacing
Handing Safety Fence System / Infill Material (distance between centres of posts)
800 1000 1200 1400
Stainless Steel Fence II 810 1010 1210 1410
Stainless Steel Flex II

Clear Opening*
Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonatee
Fence Height

Fence Height
Post Profile

685 885 1085 1285

DIN right
Product

DIN left

Flex II

1400 E-FTS -L -R -50 -F -Z-F -Z-WG40 -Z-P -1400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1600 E-FTS -L -R -50 -F -Z-F -Z-WG40 -Z-P -1600 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1800 E-FTS -L -R -50 -F -Z-F -Z-WG40 -Z-P -1800 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2000 E-FTS -L -R -50 -F -Z-F -Z-WG40 -Z-P -2000 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2200 E-FTS -L -R -50 -F -Z-F -Z-WG40 -Z-P -2200 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2400 E-FTS -L -R -50 -F -Z-F -Z-WG40 -Z-P -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 E-FTS -L -R -60 -F -Z-F -Z-WG40 -Z-P -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-E-FTS-L-50-Z-P-1400-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product- Handing-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing E-FTS-L-50-Z-P-1400-1200

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.
C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.  C Lock parts are made from galvanised steel.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl hinged doors 81

handles
Stainless steel hinged door
for handle or latch
The strike posts and hinge posts for these door sets are made from a sturdy stainless steel
profile with welded four-hole base plates. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line Upon request Upon request Upon request

posts. Owing to the positioning of the welded-on hinges, the door cannot be lifted off its hinges.
mounting systems for safety switches
Product Group / Model: E-FTR   C Illustration shows E-FTR with handle.

Upon request Upon request

Po machine side A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
st
sp
ac close-up views
ing

doors
1
Panel height

1 Latch for safety switches

2 Sturdy welded door hinge

post spacing information

Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400, as
Fence height

the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Post spacing=1000
950

outside Post profile QR50

Gr
ou
nd
cle
ara Post profile QR60
nc
e
DIN left DIN right 950
Machine side Machine side Post spacing=1010
Outside Outside

stainless steel hinged door for handle or latch

Post Spacing (distance between centres of
Handing Safety Fence System / Infill Material posts)
800 1000 1200 1400
Stainless Steel Fence II 810 1010 1210 1410
Stainless Steel Flex II

Clear Opening*
Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonatee
Fence Height

Fence Height
Post Profile

700 900 1100 1300

DIN right
Product

DIN left

Flex II

1400 E-FTR -L -R -50 -F -Z-F -Z-WG40 -Z-P -1400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1600 E-FTR -L -R -50 -F -Z-F -Z-WG40 -Z-P -1600 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1800 E-FTR -L -R -50 -F -Z-F -Z-WG40 -Z-P -1800 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2000 E-FTR -L -R -50 -F -Z-F -Z-WG40 -Z-P -2000 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2200 E-FTR -L -R -50 -F -Z-F -Z-WG40 -Z-P -2200 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2400 E-FTR -L -R -50 -F -Z-F -Z-WG40 -Z-P -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 E-FTR -L -R -60 -F -Z-F -Z-WG40 -Z-P -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-E-FTR-L-50-Z-P-1400-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product- Handing-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing E-FTR-L-50-Z-P-1400-1200

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
82  brühl hinged doors

door handle sets

Aluminium hinged door
with mortise lock
The strike posts and hinge posts for these door sets are made from a sturdy steel profile with
welded four-hole base plates. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. Item no. TG-V1 Item no. TG-V2 Item no. TG-V5

Owing to the positioning of the welded-on hinges, the door cannot be lifted off its hinges. B Door handle sets must be ordered separately. See page 150.
A TG-V1 only for use with solid infill materials, sheet metal / Polycarbonatee.
Product Group / Model: A-FTS  (Aluminium door can be combined with steel posts)  

C Illustration shows A-FTS with door handle set TG-V2. mounting systems for safety switches

Po machine side
st
sp Item no. HP-F-V… Item no. HP-F-V… Item no. SN-F-V…
ac
ing Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
B
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.

post spacing information

Panel height

Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400, as
the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Post spacing=1000
950

Post profile QR50

Fence height

Post profile QR60

950
Post spacing=1010
outside Gr
ou
nd
cle
ara
nc
e

DIN left DIN right

Machine side Machine side
Outside Outside

aluminium hinged door with mortise lock

Post Spacing
Handing Safety Fence System / Infill Material (distance between centres of posts)
800 1000 1200 1400
Aluminium Fence I 810 1010 1210 1410
Clear Opening*
Visual Protection

Visual Protection
Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonatee
Square Holes
Fence Height

Fence Height
Round Holes
Sheet Metal
Post Profile

685 885 1085 1285

DIN right

(1.5 mm)
Product

DIN left

Bronze

Green

1400 A-FTS -L -R -50 -Z-BL -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1600 A-FTS -L -R -50 -Z-BL -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1600 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1800 A-FTS -L -R -50 -Z-BL -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1800 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2000 A-FTS -L -R -50 -Z-BL -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2000 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2200 A-FTS -L -R -50 -Z-BL -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2200 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2400 A-FTS -L -R -50 -Z-BL -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 A-FTS -L -R -60 -Z-BL -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-A-FTS-L-50-Z-P-1400-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product- Handing-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing A-FTS-L-50-Z-P-1400-1200

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm. 

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl hinged doors 83

handles
Aluminium hinged door
for handle or latch
The strike posts and hinge posts for these door sets are made from a sturdy steel profile with
welded four-hole base plates. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. Item no. GRK-F-V1 Item no. GR-F-… Item no. GR-F-…

Owing to the positioning of the welded-on hinges, the door cannot be lifted off its hinges. B Handles must be ordered separately. See page 150/160.
Product Group / Model: A-FTR (Aluminium door combined with steel posts)   C Illustration shows A-FTR with handle. mounting systems for safety switches

machine side Item no. RI-F-V… Item no. RI-F-V… Item no. SN-F-…
Po
st B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
sp
ac A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
ing

close-up views

doors
1 2
Panel height

1 Door with handle   2 Door stop with ball catch

post spacing information

Fence height

Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400, as
the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Post spacing=1000
950
outside
Gr
ou Post profile QR50
nd
cle
ara
nc
e

Post profile QR60

DIN left DIN right
Machine side Machine side 950
Outside Outside Post spacing=1010

aluminium hinged door for handle or latch

Post Spacing
Handing Safety Fence System / Infill Material (distance between centres of posts)
800 1000 1200 1400
Aluminium Fence I 810 1010 1210 1410
Clear Opening*
Visual Protection

Visual Protection
Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonatee
Square Holes
Fence Height

Fence Height
Round Holes
Sheet Metal
Post Profile

700 900 1100 1300

DIN right

(1.5 mm)
Product

DIN left

Bronze

Green

1400 A-FTR -L -R -50 -Z-BL -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1600 A-FTR -L -R -50 -Z-BL -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1600 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1800 A-FTR -L -R -50 -Z-BL -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1800 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2000 A-FTR -L -R -50 -Z-BL -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2000 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2200 A-FTR -L -R -50 -Z-BL -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2200 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2400 A-FTR -L -R -50 -Z-BL -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 A-FTR -L -R -60 -Z-BL -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-A-FTR-L-50-Z-P-1400-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product- Handing-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing A-FTR-L-50-Z-P-1400-1200

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm. 

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
84  brühl hinged doors

door handle sets

Hinged door with mortise lock
and transom
The strike posts and hinge posts for these door sets are made from a sturdy steel profile with
welded four-hole base plates. The two posts are connected by a transom bar and transom Item no. TG-V2 Item no. TG-V5

mesh panel. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. Owing to the posi- B Door handle sets must be ordered separately. See page 150.
tioning of the welded-on hinges, the door cannot be lifted off its hinges.
mounting systems for safety switches
Product Group / Model: FTSO   C Illustration shows FTSO with door handle set TG-V2.

Po
st
sp
ac
ing
machine side Item no. HP-F-V… Item no. HP-F-V…

B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
Upper mesh panel

A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.

post spacing information
Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400,
as the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Add an additional 30 mm to the post spacing
when the fence height is greater than 3035. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Post spacing=1000

950
Fence height

Post profile QR50

Lower mesh panel

Post profile QR60

950
outside
Post spacing=1010

Gr
ou
nd
cle
ara
nc Post profile QR80
e
DIN left DIN right
Machine side Machine side
950
Outside Outside
Post spacing=1030

hinged door with mortise lock and transom

Handing Post Spacing (distance between centres of posts)
800 1000 1200 1400
810 1010 1210 1410
Fence Height

Fence Height

830 1030 1230 1430

Post Profile
DIN right
Product

DIN left

Clear Opening*
Flex II

685 885 1085 1285

2400 FTSO -L -R -50 -F -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 FTSO -L -R -60 -F -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
2835 FTSO -L -R -60 -F -2835 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
3035 FTSO -L -R -60 -F -3035 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
3235 FTSO -L -R -80 -F -3235 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
3435 FTSO -L -R -80 -F -3435 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
3635 FTSO -L -R -80 -F -3635 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
3835 FTSO -L -R -80 -F -3835 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
4035 FTSO -L -R -80 -F -4035 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
4235 FTSO -L -R -80 -F -4235 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
4435 FTSO -L -R -80 -F -4435 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
4635 FTSO -L -R -80 -F -4635 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
4835 FTSO -L -R -80 -F -4835 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-FTSO-L-60-F-3035-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product-Handing-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing FTSO-L-60-F-3035-1210

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl hinged doors 85

handles
Hinged door for handle or latch,
with transom
The strike posts and hinge posts for these door sets are made from a sturdy steel profile with
welded four-hole base plates. The two posts are connected by a transom bar and transom Item no. GRK-F-V1 Item no. GR-F-V… Item no. GR-F-V…

mesh panel. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. Owing to the posi- B Handles must be ordered separately. See page 150/160.
tioning of the welded-on hinges, the door cannot be lifted off its hinges.
mounting systems for safety switches
Product Group / Model: FTRO   C Illustration shows FTRO with handle.

Po
st
sp
ac
ing
machine side Item no. RI-F-V… Item no. RI-F-V…

B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
Upper mesh panel

A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.

post spacing information

doors
Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400,
as the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Add an additional 30 mm to the post spacing
when the fence height is greater than 3035. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Post spacing=1000

950
Fence height

Post profile QR50

Lower mesh panel

Post profile QR60

950
outside
Post spacing=1010

Gr
ou
nd
cle
ara
nc Post profile QR80
e
DIN left DIN right
Machine side Machine side
950
Outside Outside
Post spacing=1030

hinged door for handle or latch, with transom

Handing Post Spacing (distance between centres of posts)
800 1000 1200 1400
810 1010 1210 1410
Fence Height

Fence Height

830 1030 1230 1430

Post Profile
DIN right
Product

DIN left

Clear Opening*
Flex II

700 900 1100 1300

2400 FTRO -L -R -50 -F -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 FTRO -L -R -60 -F -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
2835 FTRO -L -R -60 -F -2835 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
3035 FTRO -L -R -60 -F -3035 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
3235 FTRO -L -R -80 -F -3235 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
3435 FTRO -L -R -80 -F -3435 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
3635 FTRO -L -R -80 -F -3635 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
3835 FTRO -L -R -80 -F -3835 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
4035 FTRO -L -R -80 -F -4035 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
4235 FTRO -L -R -80 -F -4235 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
4435 FTRO -L -R -80 -F -4435 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
4635 FTRO -L -R -80 -F -4635 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
4835 FTRO -L -R -80 -F -4835 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-FTRO-L-60-F-3035-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product-Handing-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing FTRO-L-60-F-3035-1210

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
86  brühl hinged doors

door handle sets

Portal hinged door
with mortise lock
The strike posts and hinge posts of portal doors are connected with a welded steel profile to
form a portal frame. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. Owing to Item no. TG-V1 Item no. TG-V2 Item no. TG-V5

the positioning of the welded-on hinges, the door cannot be lifted off its hinges. B Door handle sets must be ordered separately. See page 150.
A TG-V1 only for use with solid infill materials, sheet metal / Polycarbonatee.
Product Group / Model: PFTS   C Illustration shows PFTS with door handle set TG-V2.
mounting systems for safety switches

Po
st
sp machine side
ac
ing Item no. HP-F-V… Item no. HP-F-V…

B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.

close-up views
Clear height

1 2
Fence height

Door leaf height

1
Installation height

1 Door with handle  2 Sturdy welded door hinge

post spacing information

Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400, as
the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Gr Post spacing=1000
outside ou
nd 950
cle
ara
C

nc
le

e Post profile QR50

ar
w
id
th

DIN left DIN right

Post profile QR60
Machine side Machine side
Outside Outside 950
Post spacing=1010

portal hinged door with mortise lock

Post Spacing (distance between
Handing Safety Fence System / Infill Material centres of posts)
800 1000 1200 1400
Fence II 810 1010 1210 1410
Clear Opening*
Visual Protection

Visual Protection
Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Woven Mesh 25

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonatee
Square Holes
Fence Height

Fence Height
Round Holes
Sheet Metal
Post Profile

685 885 1085 1285

DIN right

(1.5 mm)
Product

DIN left

Bronze
Wall II

Green
Flex II

Flex II

1400 PFTS -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1600 PFTS -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1600 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1800 PFTS -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1800 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2000 PFTS -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2000 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2200 PFTS -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2200 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2400 PFTS -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 PFTS -L -R -60 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-PFTS-L-50-Z-P-1400-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product-Handing-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing PFTS-L-50-Z-P-1400-1200

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl hinged doors 87

handles
Portal hinged door for
handle or latch
The strike posts and hinge posts of portal doors are connected with a welded steel profile to
form a portal frame. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. Owing to Item no. GRK-F-V1 Item no. GR-F-V… Item no. GR-F-V…

the positioning of the welded-on hinges, the door cannot be lifted off its hinges. B Handles must be ordered separately. See page 150/160.
Product Group / Model: PFTR   C Illustration shows PFTR with handle. mounting systems for safety switches

Po
st machine side Item no. RI-F-V… Item no. RI-F-V…
sp
ac
ing B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.

close-up views

doors
Clear height

1 2
Door leaf height
Fence height

1 Door with handle  2 Sturdy welded door hinge

Installation height

post spacing information

Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400, as
the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Post spacing=1000
Gr
outside ou 950
nd
cle
ara Post profile QR50
C

nc
le
ar

e
w
id
th

Post profile QR60

DIN left DIN right
Machine side Machine side
950
Outside Outside
Post spacing=1010

portal hinged door for handle or latch

Post Spacing (distance between
Handing Safety Fence System / Infill Material centres of posts)
800 1000 1200 1400
Fence II 810 1010 1210 1410
Clear Opening*
Visual Protection

Visual Protection
Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Woven Mesh 25

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonatee
Square Holes
Fence Height

Fence Height
Round Holes
Sheet Metal
Post Profile

700 900 1100 1300

DIN right

(1.5 mm)
Product

DIN left

Bronze
Wall II

Green
Flex II

Flex II

1400 PFTR -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1600 PFTR -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1600 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1800 PFTR -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1800 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2000 PFTR -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2000 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2200 PFTR -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2200 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2400 PFTR -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 PFTR -L -R -60 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-PFTR-L-50-Z-P-1400-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product-Handing-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing PFTR-L-50-Z-P-1400-1200

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
88  brühl hinged doors

door handle sets

Hinged door with mortise lock,
inward opening
The strike posts and hinge posts for these door sets are made from a sturdy steel profile with
welded four-hole base plates. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. Item no. TG-V1 Item no. TG-V2 Item no. TG-V5
Owing to the positioning of the welded-on hinges, the door cannot be lifted off its hinges. The B Door handle sets must be ordered separately. See page 150.
door leaf is specially constructed for inward opening. A TG-V1 only for use with solid infill materials, sheet metal / Polycarbonatee .
Product Group / Model: FTSEO   C Illustration shows FTSEO with door handle set TG-V2. mounting systems for safety switches

Po
st
sp machine side
ac
ing Item no. HP-FEO-V… Item no. HP-FEO-V…

B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.

close-up views
Panel height

11

1 Door with handle

Fence height

post spacing information

Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400, as
the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

outside Gr Post spacing=1000

ou
nd 950
cle
ara
nc Post profile QR50
e

DIN left DIN right

Post profile QR60

Machine side Machine side 950

Outside Outside
Post spacing=1010
Left opens inwards Right opens inwards

hinged door with mortise lock, inward opening

Post Spacing (distance between
Handing Safety Fence System / Infill Material centres of posts)
800 1000 1200 1400
Fence II 810 1010 1210 1410
Clear Opening*
Visual Protection

Visual Protection
Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Woven Mesh 25

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonatee
Square Holes
Fence Height

Fence Height
Round Holes
Sheet Metal
Post Profile

685 885 1085 1285

DIN right

(1.5 mm)
Product

DIN left

Bronze
Wall II

Green
Flex II

Flex II

1400 FTSEO -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1600 FTSEO -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1600 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1800 FTSEO -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1800 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2000 FTSEO -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2000 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2200 FTSEO -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2200 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2400 FTSEO -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 FTSEO -L -R -60 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-FTSEO-L-50-Z-P-1400-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product-Handing-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing FTSEO-L-50-Z-P-1400-800

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl hinged doors 89

handles
Hinged door for handle or latch,
inward opening
The strike posts and hinge posts for these door sets are made from a sturdy steel profile with
welded four-hole base plates. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. Item no. GRK-FEO-V…

Owing to the positioning of the welded-on hinges, the door cannot be lifted off its hinges. The B Handles must be ordered separately. See page 163.
door leaf is specially constructed for inward opening.
close-up views
Product Group / Model: FTREO   C Illustration shows FTREO with handle.
1 2

Po machine side
st
sp
ac 1 Door with handle  2 Sturdy welded door hinge
ing
post spacing information

doors
Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400, as
the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.
Panel height

Post spacing=1000
950

Post profile QR50

Fence height

Post profile QR60

950
Post spacing=1010

outside
Gr
ou
nd
cle
ara
nc
e
DIN left DIN right

Machine side Machine side

Outside Outside

Left opens inwards Right opens inwards

hinged door for handle or latch, inward opening

Post Spacing (distance between
Handing Safety Fence System / Infill Material centres of posts)
800 1000 1200 1400
Fence II 810 1010 1210 1410
Clear Opening*
Visual Protection

Visual Protection
Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Woven Mesh 25

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonate
Square Holes
Fence Height

Fence Height
Round Holes
Sheet Metal
Post Profile

700 900 1100 1300

DIN right

(1.5 mm)
Product

DIN left

Bronze
Wall II

Green
Flex II

Flex II

1400 FTREO -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1600 FTREO -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1600 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1800 FTREO -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1800 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2000 FTREO -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2000 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2200 FTREO -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2200 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2400 FTREO -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 FTREO -L -R -60 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-FTREO-L-50-Z-P-1400-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product-Handing-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing FTREO-L-50-Z-P-1400-800

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
90  brühl hinged doors

door handle sets

Hinged door with mortise lock
and adjustable height
The strike posts and hinge posts for these door sets are made from a sturdy steel profile with
adjustable height. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. Owing to the Item no. TG-V1 Item no. TG-V2 Item no. TG-V5

positioning of the welded-on hinges, the door cannot be lifted off its hinges. B Door handle sets must be ordered separately. See page 150.
A TG-V1 only for use with solid infill materials, sheet metal / Polycarbonatee.
Product Group / Model: FTSHV1   C Illustration shows FTSHV1 with door handle set TG-V2.
mounting systems for safety switches

Po
st machine side
sp
ac Item no. HP-F-V… Item no. HP-F-V… Item no. SN-F-V…
ing
B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.

close-up views
Panel height

1 2

1 Door with handle  2 Sturdy welded door hinge

Fence height

post spacing information

Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400, as
the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Post spacing=1000
outside Gr
ou 950
nd
cle
ara Post profile QR50
nc
e

DIN left DIN right

Post profile QR60
Machine side Machine side
Outside Outside 950
Post spacing=1010

hinged door with mortise lock and adjustable height

Post Spacing (distance between
Handing Safety Fence System / Infill Material centres of posts)
800 1000 1200 1400
Fence II 810 1010 1210 1410
Clear Opening*
Visual Protection

Visual Protection
Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Woven Mesh 25

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonate
Square Holes
Fence Height

Fence Height
Round Holes
Sheet Metal
Post Profile

685 885 1085 1285

DIN right

(1.5 mm)
Product

DIN left

Bronze
Wall II

Green
Flex II

Flex II

1400 FTSHV1 -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1600 FTSHV1 -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1600 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1800 FTSHV1 -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1800 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2000 FTSHV1 -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2000 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2200 FTSHV1 -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2200 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2400 FTSHV1 -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 FTSHV1 -L -R -60 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-FTSHV1-L-50-Z-P-1400-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product-Handing-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing FTSHV1-L-50-Z-P-1400-1200

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl hinged doors 91

handles
Hinged door for handle or latch,
with adjustable height
The strike posts and hinge posts for these door sets are made from a sturdy steel profile with
welded four-hole base plates. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. Item no. GRK-F-V1 Item no. GR-F-V… Item no. GR-F-V…

Owing to the positioning of the welded-on hinges, the door cannot be lifted off its hinges. B Handles must be ordered separately. See page 150/160.
Product Group / Model: FTRHV1   C Illustration shows FTRHV1 with handle GRK-F-V1. mounting systems for safety switches

Po machine side Item no. RI-F-V… Item no. RI-F-V… Item no. SN-F-V…
st
sp
ac B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
ing
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
close-up views

doors
1 2
Panel height

1 Door with handle  2 Sturdy welded door hinge

post spacing information

Fence height

Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400, as
the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Post spacing=1000
950
outside Gr
ou
nd Post profile QR50
cle
ara
nc
e

Post profile QR60

DIN left DIN right
Machine side Machine side 950
Outside Outside
Post spacing=1010

hinged door for handle or latch, with adjustable height

Post Spacing (distance between
Handing Safety Fence System / Infill Material centres of posts)
800 1000 1200 1400
Fence II 810 1010 1210 1410
Clear Opening*
Visual Protection

Visual Protection
Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Woven Mesh 25

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonate
Square Holes
Fence Height

Fence Height
Round Holes
Sheet Metal
Post Profile

700 900 1100 1300

DIN right

(1.5 mm)
Product

DIN left

Bronze
Wall II

Green
Flex II

Flex II

1400 FTRHV1 -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1600 FTRHV1 -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1600 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1800 FTRHV1 -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1800 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2000 FTRHV1 -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2000 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2200 FTRHV1 -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2200 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2400 FTRHV1 -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 FTRHV1 -L -R -60 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-FTRHV1-L-50-Z-P-1400-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product-Handing-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing FTRHV1-L-50-Z-P-1400-1200

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
92  brühl hinged doors

door handle sets

Double-leaf hinged door
with mortise lock
The hinge posts for these door sets are made from a sturdy steel profile with welded four-
hole base plates. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. Owing to the Item no. TG-V1 Item no. TG-V2 Item no. TG-V5

positioning of the welded-on hinges, the door cannot be lifted off its hinges. B Door handle sets must be ordered separately. See page 150.
A TG-V1 only for use with solid infill materials, sheet metal / Polycarbonatee.
Product Group / Model: DFTS   C Illustration shows DFTS with door handle set TG-V2.
mounting systems for safety switches

machine side
Item no. HP-F-V… Item no. HP-F-V… Item no. SN-F-V… (2 x)
Panel height

Po
st
sp B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
ac
ing A Two sets of the mounting system SN-F-V... are required.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.

close-up views
1 2 3

Gr
ou
nd
cle
ara 1 Door with handle  2+3 Sturdy welded door hinge
nc
Fence height

e
post spacing information
Add an additional 20 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2610, as
the post profile changes from 60 to 80 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

outside Post spacing=2610

2550

Post profile QR50

Active leaf left Active leaf right All door units come
with drop rod on the
Machine side Machine side Post profile QR60
machine side.
Active leaf Inactive leaf Inactive leaf Active leaf
2750
Post spacing=2830

Outside Outside

double-leaf hinged door with mortise lock / for handle or latch

Handing Post profile Safety Fence System / Infill Material

Fence II
For Post Spacing ≤ 2610

For Post Spacing > 2610

Visual Protection

Visual Protection
Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Woven Mesh 25

Woven Mesh 40
Active leaf right

Polycarbonate
Active leaf left

Square Holes
Fence Height

Round Holes
Sheet Metal
(1.5 mm)
Product

Bronze
Wall II

Green
Flex II

Flex II

1400 DFTS DFTR -L -R -60 -80 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG
1600 DFTS DFTR -L -R -60 -80 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG
1800 DFTS DFTR -L -R -60 -80 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG
2000 DFTS DFTR -L -R -60 -80 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG
2200 DFTS DFTR -L -R -60 -80 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG
2400 DFTS DFTR -L -R -60 -80 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG
2600 DFTS DFTR -L -R -60 -80 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG

C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-DFTS-L-60-Z-P-3035-1750, where 1750 stands for special post spacing).
example for item number system
Product-Handing-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing DFTS-L-60-Z-P-1400-1610

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl hinged doors 93

handles
Double-leaf hinged door
for handle or latch
The hinge posts for these door sets are made from a sturdy steel profile with welded four-
hole base plates. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. Owing to the Item no. GR-S-V1 (2 x) Item no. GR-F-V… Item no. GR-F-V…

positioning of the welded-on hinges, the door cannot be lifted off its hinges. B Handles must be ordered separately. See page 150/160.
Product Group / Model: DFTR   C Illustration shows DFTR with bar latch UER. mounting systems for safety switches

machine side Item no. UER-FL / FR-V… Item no. RI-F-V… Item no. SN-F-V… (2 x)
Po B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
st
Panel height

sp A Two sets of the mounting system SN-F-V... are required.

ac
ing A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.

doors
close-up views
1 2 3

Gr
ou
nd
cle 1 Bar latch for safety switch
ara 2+3 Sturdy welded door hinge
nc
Fence height

e
post spacing information
Add an additional 20 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2610, as
the post profile changes from 60 to 80 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Post spacing=2610
outside
2550

Post profile QR60

Active leaf left Active leaf right All door units come
Machine side Machine side
with drop rod on the Post profile QR80
machine side.
Active leaf Inactive leaf Inactive leaf Active leaf 2750
Post spacing=2830

Outside Outside

Post profile QR60 Post profile QR80

Post Spacing (distance between centres of posts)

1610 1810 2010 2210 2410 2610 2830 3030 3230 3430 3630 3830 4030

Clear Opening*
Fence Height

1445 1645 1845 2045 2245 2445 2625 2825 3025 3225 3425 3625 3825

-1400 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2830 -3030 -3230 -3430 -3630 -3830 -4030
-1600 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2830 -3030 -3230 -3430 -3630 -3830 -4030
-1800 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2830 -3030 -3230 -3430 -3630 -3830 -4030
-2000 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2830 -3030 -3230 -3430 -3630 -3830 -4030
-2200 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2830 -3030 -3230 -3430 -3630 -3830 -4030
-2400 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2830 -3030 -3230 -3430 -3630 -3830 -4030
-2600 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2830 -3030 -3230 -3430 -3630 -3830 -4030

* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.

Post profile QR60 Post profile QR80

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
94  brühl hinged doors

door handle sets

Double-leaf hinged door with
mortise lock and transom
The hinge posts for these door sets are made from a sturdy steel profile with welded four-
hole base plates. The two posts are connected by transom bar and transom mesh panel. Item no. TG-V2 Item no. TG-V5

Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. Owing to the positioning of the B Door handle sets must be ordered separately. See page 150.
welded-on hinges, the door cannot be lifted off its hinges.
mounting systems for safety switches
Product Group / Model: DFTSO   C Illustration shows DFTSO with door handle set TG-V2.

Po
st
sp
ac
ing machine side Item no. HP-F-V… Item no. HP-F-V…
Upper mesh panel

B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
post spacing information
Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400,
as the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Add an additional 30 mm to the post spacing
when the fence height is greater than 3035. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Post spacing=2000
1950
Fence height
Panel height

Post profile QR50

Post profile QR60

1950
Gr
ou Post spacing=2010
nd
outside cle
ara
nc
e

Post profile QR80

Active leaf left Active leaf right All door units come 1950
with drop rod on the Post spacing=2030
Machine side Machine side
machine side.
Active leaf Inactive leaf Inactive leaf Active leaf

Outside Outside

double-leaf hinged door with mortise lock and transom

Handing Post Spacing (distance between centres of posts)
1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800
1610 1810 2010 2210 2410 2610 2810
Fence Height

Fence Height
Post Profile

1630 1830 2030 2230 2430 2630 2830

Active leaf

Active leaf
Product

Clear Opening*
Flex II
right
left

1425 1625 1825 2025 2225 2425 2625

2400 DFTSO -L -R -50 -F -2400 -1600 -1800 -2000 -2200 -2400 -2600 -2800
2600 DFTSO -L -R -60 -F -2600 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2810
2835 DFTSO -L -R -60 -F -2835 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2810
3035 DFTSO -L -R -60 -F -3035 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2810
3235 DFTSO -L -R -80 -F -3235 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
3435 DFTSO -L -R -80 -F -3435 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
3635 DFTSO -L -R -80 -F -3635 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
3835 DFTSO -L -R -80 -F -3835 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
4035 DFTSO -L -R -80 -F -4035 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
4235 DFTSO -L -R -80 -F -4235 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
4435 DFTSO -L -R -80 -F -4435 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
4635 DFTSO -L -R -80 -F -4635 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
4835 DFTSO -L -R -80 -F -4835 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-DFTSO-L-60-F-3035-1750, where 1750 stands for special post spacing). 

example for item number system

Product-Handing-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing DFTSO-L-60-F-3035-1810

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl hinged doors 95

handles
Double-leaf hinged door for
handle or latch, with transom
The hinge posts for these door sets are made from a sturdy steel profile with welded four-
hole base plates. The two posts are connected by transom bar and transom mesh panel. Item no. GR-S-V1 (2 x) Item no. GR-F-V… Item no. GR-F-V…

Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. Owing to the positioning of the B Handles must be ordered separately. See page 150/160.
welded-on hinges, the door cannot be lifted off its hinges.
mounting systems for safety switches
Product Group / Model: DFTRO   C Illustration shows DFTRO with bar latch UER.

Po
st
sp
ac
ing machine side Item no. UER-FL / FR-V… Item no. RI-F-V…
Upper mesh panel

B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
post spacing information

doors
Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400,
as the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Add an additional 30 mm to the post spacing
when the fence height is greater than 3035. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Post spacing=2000
1950
Panel height

Fence height

Post profile QR50

Post profile QR60

1950
Gr
ou Post spacing=2010
nd
outside cle
ara
nc
e

Post profile QR80

Active leaf left Active leaf right All door units come 1950
with drop rod on the Post spacing=2030
Machine side Machine side
machine side.
Active leaf Inactive leaf Inactive leaf Active leaf

Outside Outside

double-leaf hinged door for handle or latch, with transom

Handing Post Spacing (distance between centres of posts)
1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800
1610 1810 2010 2210 2410 2610 2810
Fence Height

Fence Height
Post Profile

1630 1830 2030 2230 2430 2630 2830

Active leaf

Active leaf
Product

Clear Opening*
Flex II
right
left

1425 1625 1825 2025 2225 2425 2625

2400 DFTRO -L -R -50 -F -2400 -1600 -1800 -2000 -2200 -2400 -2600 -2800
2600 DFTRO -L -R -60 -F -2600 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2810
2835 DFTRO -L -R -60 -F -2835 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2810
3035 DFTRO -L -R -60 -F -3035 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2810
3235 DFTRO -L -R -80 -F -3235 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
3435 DFTRO -L -R -80 -F -3435 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
3635 DFTRO -L -R -80 -F -3635 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
3835 DFTRO -L -R -80 -F -3835 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
4035 DFTRO -L -R -80 -F -4035 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
4235 DFTRO -L -R -80 -F -4235 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
4435 DFTRO -L -R -80 -F -4435 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
4635 DFTRO -L -R -80 -F -4635 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
4835 DFTRO -L -R -80 -F -4835 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-DFTRO-L-60-F-3035-1750, where 1750 stands for special post spacing). 

example for item number system

Product-Handing-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing DFTRO-L-60-F-3035-1810

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
96  brühl double action swing doors and individual hinged doors

Double action swing doors

We use double action swing doors for machinery work areas and danger zones with minimal machine movement and high access
frequency for operating personnel. Typical application areas include rotary and tilting tables as well as assembly lines.

Model PT Product advantages and features of all models at-a-glance:

→ Robust, durable hinges well suited to door size.

→ Provide quick access to machinery area.
→ Open inwards and outwards – up to 90 degrees.
→ No pendulum motion thanks to engagement in a fixed, middle position.
→ When rubber infill materials are used, the door can be fitted around the
contours of the machine.
→ Double action swing doors are also available in stainless steel.
→ The components are grit blasted and powder coated, guaranteeing
maximum impact resistance.
→ Double action swing doors are available in various colours and with a hot-dip
galvanised finish. B See page 238.

Individual hinged doors

Along with standard hinged door sets we offer individual doors for machine access areas as well as removal and pick-and-place
stations. The two door types (locking and handle door) can be combined with our door accessories and the appropriate mounting
systems for safety switches, depending on the application.

Model TFS / TFR Product advantages and features of all models at-a-glance:

→ Robust construction: The doors consist of a steel frame with welded or

inserted infill material.
→ In order to provide a view of the production process the frames can be
combined with woven mesh, welded mesh, Flex, Polycarbonatee, laminated
safety glass or visual protection glass.
→ The individual doors are compatible with Brühl mounting systems for safety
switches, whose structural specifications must be met.
→ The individual doors are also available in stainless steel.
→ The components are grit blasted and powder coated, guaranteeing
maximum impact resistance.
→ The individual doors are available in various colours and with a hot-dip
galvanised finish. B See page 238.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl double action swing doors and individual hinged doors 97

technical specifications for standard double action swing doors and individual hinged doors
C Custom designed units available upon request.

Product Group / Model pt tfs tfr

Dimensions

Max. installation width (outer edge of post to outer edge of door) 1400 — —
Max. inside width (of door) in mm — 1350 1350

Max. door/fence height in mm 2600 2600 2600

Infill Material

Flex ● ● ●
● ● ●

doors
Woven mesh 40

Sheet metal 1.5 mm ● ● ●

Polycarbonatee 5 mm ● ● ●
Woven mesh 25 ● ● ●
Welded mesh 40 ● ● ●
Perforated plate, Round hole RV 5-8 ● ● ●
Perforated plate, Square hole Qg 8-12 ● ● ●
Visual protection, bronze ● ● ●
Visual protection, green ● ● ●

Mounting Systems for Safety Switches

BRÜHL-RI ® — ­— ○
BRÜHL-HP-F ® — ○ —
BRÜHL-GR-F ® — — ○
BRÜHL-SN-F ● ○ ○

Finishes

Powder-coated finish/colour ● ● ●
Hot-dip galvanised finish ● ● ●

●  Combination is possible. ­­  —  Combination is not possible.   ○  Combination may be possible, depending on the specific application.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
98  brühl double action swing doors and individual hinged doors

mounting systems for safety switches

Double action swing door
The door post of this model is made from a sturdy steel profile with welded four-hole base
plates and durable hinges. The door is held in the middle position by means of a ball catch
mechanism, which prevents pendulum motion.
Item no. SN-F-V…
Product Group / Model: PT
B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
close-up views
1 2 3

machine side
Fence height

1– 2 Mounting arrangement for the complementary actuation of two

roller plunger switches  3 Door engaged in fixed middle position

product variants
Double action swing door Double action swing Double action swing door
with sheet metal infill door with Flex II infill with plastic sheeting for
Panel height

fitting around machine

contour

outside Gro
un
ed Dista dc
lea
ge nc ran
o e
ed f po fro ce
ge st m
of to out
do ou sid
or tsid e
e
Left hand Right hand

180° 180°

double action swing door

Installation Width (outer edge of
Handing Safety Fence System / Infill Material post to outer edge of door)
Fence II 800 1000 1200 1400
Visual Protection

Visual Protection
Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Clear Opening
Woven Mesh 25

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonate
Square Holes
Fence Height

Fence Height

Panel Height
Round Holes
Sheet Metal
Post Profile

(1.5 mm)
Product

Bronze

660 860 1060 1260

Wall II

Green
Flex II

Flex II
right
left

1400 PT -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1400 -1225 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1600 PT -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1600 -1425 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
1800 PT -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -1800 -1625 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2000 PT -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2000 -1825 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
-1825
2200 PT -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2200 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
-2025
-1825
2400 PT -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2400 -2025 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
-2225
-1825
-2025
2600 PT -L -R -60 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2600 -2225 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
-2425

C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-PT-L-50-Z-P-1400-1225-1150, where 1150 stands for special width.
example for item number system
Product-Handing-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing PT-L-50-Z-P-1400-1225-800

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl double action swing doors and individual hinged doors 99

application example

Double action swing doors are often used to reduce the risk of crushing injuries for rotary
and tilting tables as well as assembly lines and other installations with moving parts.

doors

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
100  brühl double action swing doors and individual hinged doors

door handle sets

Individual hinged door
with mortise lock
These doors can be fitted into access doorways for machine and installation areas. The
frame of the door leaf has welded mitre joints and can be ordered with any of the infill mate- Item no. TG-V1 Item no. TG-V2 Item no. TG-V5

rials available in the product range. Individual doors come with mounting hinges as well as B Door handle sets must be ordered separately. See page 150.
hinge pins with cotters as protection against tampering. A TG-V1 only for use with solid infill materials, sheet metal / Polycarbonatee.
Product Group / Model: TFS close-up views
1 2 3

Do machine side
or
lea
fw
idt
h 1 Door with handle  2 Door without fittings  3 Door mounting

installation diagram
Door leaf height

20 mm 14 mm

Clear width

outside

DIN left DIN right

Machine side Machine side
Outside Outside

individual hinged door with mortise lock

Clear Width
Handing Infill Material
750 950 1150 1350

Door Leaf Width

Door Leaf Height
Visual Protection

Visual Protection
Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Woven Mesh 25

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonate
Square Holes
Fence Height

Round Holes
Sheet Metal
Leaf Profile

716 916 1116 1316

DIN right

(1.5 mm)
Product

DIN left

Bronze

Green
Flex II

1400 TFS -L -R -30 -BL -F -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG25 -WG40 -P -SSB -SSG -1225 -750 -950 -1150 -1350
1600 TFS -L -R -30 -BL -F -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG25 -WG40 -P -SSB -SSG -1425 -750 -950 -1150 -1350
1800 TFS -L -R -30 -BL -F -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG25 -WG40 -P -SSB -SSG -1625 -750 -950 -1150 -1350
2000 TFS -L -R -30 -BL -F -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG25 -WG40 -P -SSB -SSG -1825 -750 -950 -1150 -1350
2200 TFS -L -R -30 -BL -F -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG25 -WG40 -P -SSB -SSG -2025 -750 -950 -1150 -1350
2400 TFS -L -R -30 -BL -F -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG25 -WG40 -P -SSB -SSG -2225 -750 -950 -1150 -1350
2600 TFS -L -R -30 -BL -F -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG25 -WG40 -P -SSB -SSG -2425 -750 -950 -1150 -1350

C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-TFS-L-30-F-1425-870, where 870 stands for special size).

example for item number system

Product-Handing-Leaf profile-Infill material-Door leaf height-Clear width TFS-L-30-F-1425-750

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl double action swing doors and individual hinged doors 101

handles
Individual hinged door
for handle or latch
These doors can be fitted into access doorways for machine and installation areas. The
frame of the door leaf has welded mitre joints and can be ordered with any of the infill mate- Item no. GR-S-V1

rials available in the product range. Individual doors come with mounting hinges, hinge pins B Handles must be ordered separately. See page 150.
with cotters and mounting hardware.
close-up views
Product Group / Model: TFR
Door mounting

Do machine side
or
lea
fw
idt installation diagram
h

doors
20 mm 14 mm
Door leaf height

Clear width

outside

DIN left DIN right

Machine side Machine side
Outside Outside

individual hinged door for handle or latch

Clear Width
Handing Infill Material
750 950 1150 1350

Door Leaf Width

Door Leaf Height
Visual Protection

Visual Protection
Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Woven Mesh 25

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonate
Square Holes
Fence Height

Round Holes
Sheet Metal
Leaf Profile

716 916 1116 1316

DIN right

(1.5 mm)
Product

DIN left

Bronze

Green
Flex II

1400 TFR -L -R -25 -BL -F -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG25 -WG40 -P -SSB -SSG -1225 -750 -950 -1150 -1350
1600 TFR -L -R -25 -BL -F -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG25 -WG40 -P -SSB -SSG -1425 -750 -950 -1150 -1350
1800 TFR -L -R -25 -BL -F -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG25 -WG40 -P -SSB -SSG -1625 -750 -950 -1150 -1350
2000 TFR -L -R -25 -BL -F -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG25 -WG40 -P -SSB -SSG -1825 -750 -950 -1150 -1350
2200 TFR -L -R -25 -BL -F -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG25 -WG40 -P -SSB -SSG -2025 -750 -950 -1150 -1350
2400 TFR -L -R -25 -BL -F -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG25 -WG40 -P -SSB -SSG -2225 -750 -950 -1150 -1350
2600 TFR -L -R -30 -BL -F -LBR -LBQ -SG40 -WG25 -WG40 -P -SSB -SSG -2425 -750 -950 -1150 -1350

C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-TFR-L-25-F-1425-870, where 870 stands for special size).

example for item number system

Product- Handing- Leaf profile-Infill material-Door leaf height-Clear width TFR-L-25-F-1425-750

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
102  brühl sliding doors

Sliding doors
We place great importance on customised solutions that guaran-
tee effective workflows for our customers. As a result we have de-
veloped a wide range of sliding doors that can be adapted for any
and every application as optimal solutions that meet the require-
ments of individual production processes. All doors can be inte-
grated as modular units in any of our safety fence systems and
are available in all colours. Special sizes and custom designed
units are available upon request.

Model STS / STG Product advantages and features of all models at-a-glance:

→ These doors can be combined with all frame infill materials.

→ Standard: Aluminium profile; optional: combination with steel profile.
→ Sliding doors can be combined with standard Brühl door accessories.
B See page 150.
→ Sliding doors are compatible with the standard mounting systems for
safety switches from Brühl. B See page 158.
→ The components are grit blasted and powder coated, guaranteeing
maximum impact resistance.
→ These models are available in various colours and with a hot-dip
galvanised finish. B See page 238.

additional sliding door models

Stainless steel sliding door – Model e-sts / e-stg Aluminium sliding door – Model a-sts / a-stg

→ Sliding door made from stainless → Steel lock box profile with
steel (Euronorm no. 1.4301). mounted aluminium profile

B For specifications for this model see page 106 / 107. B For specifications for this model see page 108 / 109.

Sliding door with transom –Model stso / stgo Sliding door with adjustable height – Model stshv1 /stghv1

→ For fence heights up to 4835 mm → Height adjustment for variations

with transom bar and transom of +52/-7 mm from the neutral
mesh panel. position for easier mounting on
uneven floors.
B For specifications for this model see page 110 / 111.
B For specifications for this model see page 112 / 113.

Double-leaf sliding door – Model dset / dstg Sliding door opening from both sides – Model stsw / stgw

→ Leaves open to the right → With two leaves in parallel

and left side. guide channels.
→ Cable guide assembly for special → Right and left opening,
door-mounted switches available no back-run.
upon request.
B For specifications for this model see page 116 / 117.
B For specifications for this model see page 114 / 115.

Double-leaf sliding door with transom – Model dstso / dstgo

→ For fence heights up to 4835 mm

with transom bar and transom
mesh panel.

B For specifications for this model see page 118 / 119.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl sliding doors 103

technical specifications for standard sliding doors

C Custom designed units available upon request.

Product Group / Model STS STG E-STS E-STG A-STS A-STG STSO STGO STSHV1 STGHV1 DSTS DSTG STSW STGW DSTSO DSTGO

Dimensions

Max. post spacing in mm 1410 1410 1410 1410 1410 1410 1430 1430 1410 1410 2810 2810 2810 2810 2830 2830

Max. door/fence height in mm 2600 2600 2600 2600 2600 2600 4835 4835 2600 2600 2600 2600 2600 2600 4835 4835

Track

Aluminium track with bearing rollers ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● — — ● ●

Steel track with bearing rollers — — — — — — — — — — — — ● ● — —

doors
Infill Material

Flex ● ● ● ● — — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Woven mesh 40 ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ○ ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ○
Sheet metal 1.5 mm ● ● — — ● ● ○ ○ ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ○
Polycarbonatee 5 mm ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ○ ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ○
Woven mesh 25 ● ● — — — — ○ ○ ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ○
Welded mesh 40 ● ● — — ● ● ○ ○ ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ○
Perforated plate, Round hole RV 5-8 ● ● — — ● ● ○ ○ ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ○
Perforated plate, Square hole Qg 8-12 ● ● — — ● ● ○ ○ ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ○
Visual protection, bronze ● ● — — ● ● ○ ○ ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ○
Visual protection, green ● ● — — ● ● ○ ○ ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ○

Brühl Door Accessories

Door handle sets ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● —

Mounting Systems for Safety Switches

BRÜHL-HP-S ® ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
BRÜHL-GR-S ® — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ● — ●
BRÜHL-SN-S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Special latches and safety switch mounting arrangements available upon request

Finishes

Powder-coated finish/colour ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Hot-dip galvanised finish ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

●  Combination is possible. ­­  —  Combination is not possible.   ○  Combination may be possible, depending on the specific application.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
104  brühl sliding doors

door handle sets

Sliding door with hook latch B Mounting systems for safety switches must be
ordered separately. See pages 150.
The door posts of these doors are made of a sturdy steel profile with welded four-hole base
plates. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. The special aluminium
track, durable steel rollers and polyamide guides guarantee very smooth and precise open-
ing and closing. Item no. TG-V2

Product Group / Model: STS   C Illustration shows STS with door handle set TG-V2. mounting systems for safety switches

Po
st
sp
ac
ing Item no. HP-S-V… Item no. HP-S-V… Item no. SN-S-V…
machine side B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
close-up views
Panel height

1 2 3

Installation height (fence height + approx. 160 mm)

Fence height

4 1 Door with handle

2 Special aluminium track with steel rollers
3 Mounting system for a safety switch
4 Polyamide guide

Gro
un
dc
lea
ran
ce post spacing information
Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400, as
outside
the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Post spacing=800
750

Post profile QR50

left opening right opening 1000 mm 1000 mm For doors with a post spacing of at
least 1000 mm an additional post
Machine side Machine side Post profile QR60
(a) is included. When planning the
fence line: please be sure to order
a separate mesh panel (b) in the 750
Outside Outside fence height. Post spacing=810

sliding door with hook latch

Opening Post Spacing (distance between
Safety Fence System / Infill Material
Direction centres of posts)
800 1000 1200 1400
Fence II 810 1010 1210 1410
Clear Opening*
Visual Protection Bronze

Visual Protection Green

Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Woven Mesh 25

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonate
Square Holes
right opening
Fence Height

Fence Height

630 830 1030 1230

Round Holes
Sheet Metal
left opening

Post Profile

(1.5 mm)
Product

Wall II
Flex II

Flex II

2000 STS -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2000 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2200 STS -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2200 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2400 STS -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 STS -L -R -60 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-STS-L-50-Z-P-2000-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product-Opening direction-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing STS-L-50-Z-P-2000-800

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl sliding doors 105

handles
Sliding door for handle B Handles must be
ordered separately.
The door posts of these doors are made of a sturdy steel profile with welded four-hole base See page 150.
plates. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. The special aluminium
profile, durable steel rollers and polyamide guides guarantee very smooth and precise open-
ing and closing. Item no. GR-S-V1 Item no. GRK-S-V1

Product Group / Model: STG   C Illustration shows STG with handle GR-S-V1. mounting systems for safety switches

Po
st
sp
ac
ing
Item no. HP-S-V… Item no. HP-S-V… Item no. SN-S-V…
machine side B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
close-up views
Panel height

doors
Installation height (fence height + approx. 160 mm) 1 2 3

4 1 Door with handle

2 Special aluminium track with steel rollers
Fence height

3 Mounting system for a safety switch

4 Polyamide guide

Gr
ou
nd
cle
ara
nc
e
post spacing information
Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400, as
outside
the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Post spacing=800
750

Post profile QR50

left opening right opening 1000 mm 1000 mm For doors with a post spacing of at
Machine side Machine side least 1000 mm an additional post
(a) is included. When planning the Post profile QR60
fence line: please be sure to order
a separate mesh panel (b) in the 750
Outside Outside fence height. Post spacing=810

sliding door for handle

Opening Post Spacing (distance between
Safety Fence System / Infill Material
Direction centres of posts)
800 1000 1200 1400
Fence II 810 1010 1210 1410
Clear Opening*
Visual Protection Bronze

Visual Protection Green

Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Woven Mesh 25

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonate
Square Holes
right opening
Fence Height

Fence Height

720 920 1120 1320

Round Holes
Sheet Metal
left opening

Post Profile

(1.5 mm)
Product

Wall II
Flex II

Flex II

2000 STG -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2000 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2200 STG -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2200 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2400 STG -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 STG -L -R -60 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-STG-L-50-Z-P-2000-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product-Opening direction-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing STG-L-50-Z-P-2000-800

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
106  brühl sliding doors

door handle sets

Stainless steel sliding door B Mounting systems for safety switches must be
ordered separately. See pages 150.

with hook latch

The door posts of these doors are made of a sturdy stainless steel profile with welded four-hole
base plates. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. The special aluminium Upon request

track, durable stainless steel rollers and polyamide guides guarantee very smooth and precise
mounting systems for safety switches
opening and closing.
Product Group / Model: E-STS   C Illustration shows E-STS with door handle set.

Po Upon request Upon request Upon request

st
sp
ac machine side
ing B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
close-up views
Panel height

1 2 3
Installation height (fence height + approx. 160 mm)

4 1 Door with handle

Fence height

2 Special aluminium track with stainless steel rollers

3 Mounting system for a safety switch
4 Polyamide guide

Gro
un
dc
lea
ran
ce post spacing information
Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400, as
outside
the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Post spacing=800
750

Post profile QR50

left opening right opening 1000 mm 1000 mm For doors with a post spacing of at
Machine side Machine side least 1000 mm an additional post
(a) is included. When planning the Post profile QR60
fence line: please be sure to order
a separate mesh panel (b) in the 750
Outside Outside fence height. Post spacing=810

stainless steel sliding door with hook latch

Opening direction Safety Fence System / Infill Material Post Spacing (distance between centres of posts)

800 1000 1200 1400

Stainless Steel Fence II 810 1010 1210 1410
Clear Opening*
Stainless Steel Flex II

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonatee
right opening
Fence Height

Fence Height

630 830 1030 1230

left opening

Post Profile
Product

Flex II

2000 E-STS -L -R -50 -F -Z-F -Z-WG40 -Z-P -2000 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2200 E-STS -L -R -50 -F -Z-F -Z-WG40 -Z-P -2200 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2400 E-STS -L -R -50 -F -Z-F -Z-WG40 -Z-P -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 E-STS -L -R -60 -F -Z-F -Z-WG40 -Z-P -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-E-STS-L-50-Z-P-2000-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product- Opening direction-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing E-STS-L-50-Z-P-2000-800

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.
C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.  C Lock parts are made of galvanised steel.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl sliding doors 107

handles
Stainless steel sliding door B Handles must be
ordered separately.

for handle See page 150.

The door posts of these doors are made of a sturdy stainless steel profile with welded
four-hole base plates. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. The Upon request Upon request

special aluminium track, durable stainless steel rollers and polyamide guides guarantee very
mounting systems for safety switches
smooth and precise opening and closing.
Product Group / Model: E-STG   C Illustration shows E-STG mit Griff E-GR-S-V1.

Po
st
sp Upon request Upon request Upon request
ac
ing
machine side B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
close-up views

doors
Panel height

1 2 3
Installation height (fence height + approx. 160 mm)

4 1 Door with handle

2 Special aluminium track with stainless steel rollers
Fence height

3 Mounting system for a safety switch

4 Polyamide guide

Gr
ou
nd
cle
ara
nc
e post spacing information
Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400, as
outside
the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Post spacing=800
750

Post profile QR50

left opening right opening 1000 mm 1000 mm For doors with a post spacing of at
Machine side Machine side least 1000 mm an additional post
(a) is included. When planning the Post profile QR60
fence line: please be sure to order
a separate mesh panel (b) in the 750
Outside Outside fence height. Post spacing=810

stainless steel sliding door for handle

Opening direction Safety Fence System / Infill Material Post Spacing (distance between centres of posts)

800 1000 1200 1400

Stainless Steel Fence II 810 1010 1210 1410
Clear Opening*
Stainless Steel Flex II

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonatee
right opening
Fence Height

Fence Height

720 920 1120 1320

left opening

Post Profile
Product

Flex II

2000 E-STG -L -R -50 -F -Z-F -Z-WG40 -Z-P -2000 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2200 E-STG -L -R -50 -F -Z-F -Z-WG40 -Z-P -2200 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2400 E-STG -L -R -50 -F -Z-F -Z-WG40 -Z-P -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 E-STG -L -R -60 -F -Z-F -Z-WG40 -Z-P -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-E-STG-L-50-Z-P-2000-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product-Opening direction-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing E-STG-L-50-Z-P-2000-800

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
108  brühl sliding doors

door handle sets

Aluminium sliding door
with hook latch
The door posts of these doors are made of a sturdy steel profile with welded four-hole base
plates. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. The special aluminium Item no. TG-V2

track, durable steel rollers and polyamide guides guarantee very smooth and precise open- B Door handle sets must be ordered separately. See page 150.
ing and closing.
mounting systems for safety switches
Product Group / Model: A-STS (Aluminium door combined with steel posts)  

C Illustration shows A-STS with door handle set TG-V2.

Installation height (fence height+approx. 160 mm)

Po
st machine side Item no. HP-S-V… Item no. HP-S-V…
sp
ac
ing B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
close-up views
1 2
Fence height

1 Special aluminium track with steel rollers  2 Polyamide guide

post spacing information

Panel height

Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400, as
the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.
Gro
un
dc Post spacing=800
lea
ran
ce 750
outside
Post profile QR50

Post profile QR60

left opening right opening 1000 mm 1000 mm For doors with a post spacing of at 750
least 1000 mm an additional post Post spacing=810
Machine side Machine side
(a) is included. When planning the
fence line: please be sure to order
a separate mesh panel (b) in the
Outside Outside fence height.

aluminium sliding door with hook latch

Opening Post Spacing
Safety Fence System / Infill Material
Direction (distance between centres of posts)
800 1000 1200 1400
Aluminium Fence I 810 1010 1210 1410
Clear Opening*
Visual Protection Bronze

Visual Protection Green

Sheet Metal (1.5 mm)

Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonatee
Square Holes
right opening
Fence Height

Fence Height

630 830 1030 1230

Round Holes
left opening

Post Profile
Product

2000 A-STS -L -R -50 -Z-BL -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2000 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2200 A-STS -L -R -50 -Z-BL -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2200 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2400 A-STS -L -R -50 -Z-BL -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 A-STS -L -R -60 -Z-BL -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-A-STS-L-50-Z-P-2000-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product-Opening direction-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing A-STS-L-50-Z-P-2000-800

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl sliding doors 109

handles
Aluminium sliding door for handle
The door posts of these doors are made of a sturdy steel profile with welded four-hole base
plates. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. The special aluminium
track, durable steel rollers and polyamide guides guarantee very smooth and precise open-
ing and closing. Item no. GR-S-V1 Item no. GRK-S-V1

Product Group / Model: A-STG (Aluminium door combined with steel posts)  
B Handles must be ordered separately. See page 150.
C Illustration shows A-STG mit Griff GR-S-V1.
mounting systems for safety switches

Po
Installation height (fence height+approx. 160 mm)

st
sp
ac machine side Item no. HP-S-V… Item no. HP-S-V…
ing
B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
close-up views

doors
Fence height

1 2 3

1 Door with handle  2 Special aluminium track with steel rollers

3 Polyamide guide
Panel height

post spacing information

Gro Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400, as
un the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.
dc
lea
ran
ce Post spacing=800
outside
750

Post profile QR50

Post profile QR60

left opening right opening 1000 mm 1000 mm For doors with a post spacing of at
Machine side Machine side least 1000 mm an additional post 750
(a) is included. When planning the Post spacing=810
fence line: please be sure to order
a separate mesh panel (b) in the
Outside Outside fence height.

aluminium sliding door for handle

Opening Post Spacing
Safety Fence System / Infill Material
Direction (distance between centres of posts)
800 1000 1200 1400
Aluminium Fence I 810 1010 1210 1410
Clear Opening*
Visual Protection Bronze

Visual Protection Green

Sheet Metal (1.5 mm)

Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonatee
Square Holes
right opening
Fence Height

Fence Height

720 920 1120 1320

Round Holes
left opening

Post Profile
Product

2000 A-STG -L -R -50 -Z-BL -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2000 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2200 A-STG -L -R -50 -Z-BL -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2200 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2400 A-STG -L -R -50 -Z-BL -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 A-STG -L -R -60 -Z-BL -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-A-STG-L-50-Z-P-2000-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product-Opening direction-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing A-STG-L-50-Z-P-2000-800

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
110  brühl sliding doors

door handle sets

Sliding door with hook B Mounting systems for safety switches must be
ordered separately. See pages 150.

latch and transom

The door posts of these doors are made of a sturdy steel profile with welded four-hole base
plates. The two posts are connected by a transom bar and transom mesh panel. Both door Item no. TG-V2

posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. The special aluminium track, durable steel
mounting systems for safety switches
rollers and polyamide guides guarantee very smooth and precise opening and closing.
Product Group / Model: STSO   C Illustration shows STSO with door handle set TG-V2.

Po
st
sp
ac Item no. HP-S-V… Item no. HP-S-V… Item no. SN-S-V…
ing
machine side
Upper mesh panel

B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
close-up views
1 2 3
Fence height

1 Door with handle  2 Mounting system for a safety switch  3 Polyamide guide
Panel height

post spacing information

Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400,
as the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Add an additional 30 mm to the post spacing
when the fence height is greater than 3035. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Post spacing=800
750

outside Gr Post profile QR50

ou
nd
cle
ara
nc
e Post profile QR60

750
left opening right opening 1000 mm 1000 mm Post spacing=810
For doors with a post spacing of at
least 1000 mm an additional post
Machine side Machine side Post profile QR80
(a) is included. When planning the
fence line: please be sure to order
a separate mesh panel (b) in the 750
fence height. Post spacing=830
Outside Outside

sliding door with hook latch and transom

Opening direction Post Spacing (distance between centres of posts)
800 1000 1200 1400
810 1010 1210 1410
right opening
Fence Height

Fence Height

830 1030 1230 1430

left opening

Post Profile
Product

Clear Opening*
Flex II

630 830 1030 1230

2400 STSO -L -R -50 -F -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 STSO -L -R -60 -F -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
2835 STSO -L -R -60 -F -2835 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
3035 STSO -L -R -60 -F -3035 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
3235 STSO -L -R -80 -F -3235 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
3435 STSO -L -R -80 -F -3435 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
3635 STSO -L -R -80 -F -3635 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
3835 STSO -L -R -80 -F -3835 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
4035 STSO -L -R -80 -F -4035 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
4235 STSO -L -R -80 -F -4235 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
4435 STSO -L -R -80 -F -4435 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
4635 STSO -L -R -80 -F -4635 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
4835 STSO -L -R -80 -F -4835 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-STSO-L-60-F-3035-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing). 

example for item number system

Product-Opening direction-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing STSO-L-60-F-3035-1210

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl sliding doors 111

handles
Sliding door for handle, B Handles must be
ordered separately.

with transom See page 150.

The door posts of these doors are made of a sturdy steel profile with welded four-hole base
plates. The two posts are connected by a transom bar and transom mesh panel. Both door Item no. GR-S-V1 Item no. GRK-S-V1

posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. The special aluminium track, durable steel
mounting systems for safety switches
rollers and polyamide guides guarantee very smooth and precise opening and closing.
Product Group / Model: STGO   C Illustration shows STGO mit Griff GR-S-V1.

Po
st
sp
ac
ing Item no. HP-S-V… Item no. HP-S-V… Item no. SN-S-V…
Upper mesh panel

machine side B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
close-up views

doors
1 2 3
Fence height

1 Door with handle  2 Mounting system for a safety switch  3 Polyamide guide
Panel height

post spacing information

Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400,
as the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Add an additional 30 mm to the post spacing
when the fence height is greater than 3035. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Post spacing=800
750

outside Gr Post profile QR50

ou
nd
cle
ara
nc
e Post profile QR60

750
left opening right opening 1000 mm 1000 mm Post spacing=810
For doors with a post spacing of at
least 1000 mm an additional post
Machine side Machine side Post profile QR80
(a) is included. When planning the
fence line: please be sure to order
a separate mesh panel (b) in the 750
fence height. Post spacing=830
Outside Outside

sliding door for handle, with transom

Opening direction Post Spacing (distance between centres of posts)
800 1000 1200 1400
810 1010 1210 1410
right opening
Fence Height

Fence Height

830 1030 1230 1430

left opening

Post Profile
Product

Clear Opening*
Flex II

720 920 1120 1320

2400 STGO -L -R -50 -F -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 STGO -L -R -60 -F -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
2835 STGO -L -R -60 -F -2835 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
3035 STGO -L -R -60 -F -3035 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
3235 STGO -L -R -80 -F -3235 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
3435 STGO -L -R -80 -F -3435 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
3635 STGO -L -R -80 -F -3635 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
3835 STGO -L -R -80 -F -3835 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
4035 STGO -L -R -80 -F -4035 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
4235 STGO -L -R -80 -F -4235 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
4435 STGO -L -R -80 -F -4435 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
4635 STGO -L -R -80 -F -4635 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
4835 STGO -L -R -80 -F -4835 -830 -1030 -1230 -1430
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.  
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-STGO-L-60-F-3035-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product-Opening direction-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing STGO-L-60-F-3035-1210

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
112  brühl sliding doors

door handle sets

Sliding door with hook latch B Mounting systems for safety switches must be
ordered separately. See pages 150.

and adjustable height

The door posts of these doors are made of a sturdy steel profile with adjustable height. Both
door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. The special aluminium track, durable Item no. TG-V2

steel rollers and polyamide guides guarantee very smooth and precise opening and closing.
mounting systems for safety switches
Product Group / Model: STSHV1   C Illustration shows STSHV1 with door handle set TG-V2.

Po Item no. HP-S-V… Item no. HP-S-V… Item no. SN-S-V…

st
sp
ac machine side B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
ing
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
close-up views
Panel height

1 2 3
Installation height (fence height + approx. 160 mm)

4 1 Door with handle

2 Special aluminium track with steel rollers
Fence height

3 Mounting system for a safety switch

4 Polyamide guide

Gro
un
dc
lea
ran
ce post spacing information
Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400, as
outside
the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Post spacing=800
750

Post profile QR50

left opening right opening 1000 mm 1000 mm For doors with a post spacing of at
Machine side Machine side least 1000 mm an additional post
(a) is included. When planning the
Post profile QR60
fence line: please be sure to order
a separate mesh panel (b) in the 750
fence height. Post spacing=810
Outside Outside

sliding door with hook latch and adjustable height

Opening Post Spacing (distance between
Safety Fence System / Infill Material
Direction centres of posts)
800 1000 1200 1400
Fence II 810 1010 1210 1410
Clear Opening*
Visual Protection Bronze

Visual Protection Green

Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Woven Mesh 25

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonate
Square Holes
right opening
Fence Height

Fence Height

630 830 1030 1230

Round Holes
Sheet Metal
left opening

Post Profile

(1.5 mm)
Product

Wall II
Flex II

Flex II

2000 STSHV1 -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2000 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2200 STSHV1 -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2200 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2400 STSHV1 -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 STSHV1 -L -R -60 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-STSHV1-L-50-Z-P-2000-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product-Opening direction-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing STSHV1-L-50-Z-P-2000-800

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl sliding doors 113

handles
Sliding door for handle, B Handles must be
ordered separately.

with adjustable height See page 150.

The door posts of these doors are made of a sturdy steel profile with adjustable height. Both
door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. The special aluminium track, durable Item no. GR-S-V1 Item no. GRK-S-V1

steel rollers and polyamide guides guarantee very smooth and precise opening and closing.
mounting systems for safety switches
Product Group / Model: STGHV1   C Illustration shows STGHV1 with handle GR-S-V1.

Po
st Item no. HP-S-V… Item no. HP-S-V… Item no. SN-S-V…
sp
ac machine side
ing B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 158.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
close-up views

doors
Panel height

1 2 3
Installation height (fence height + approx. 160 mm)

4 1 Door with handle

2 Special aluminium track with steel rollers
Fence height

3 Mounting system for a safety switch

4 Polyamide guide

Gro
un
dc
lea
ran
ce post spacing information
Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400, as
outside
the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Post spacing=800
750

Post profile QR50

left opening right opening 1000 mm 1000 mm For doors with a post spacing of at
least 1000 mm an additional post
Machine side Machine side Post profile QR60
(a) is included. When planning the
fence line: please be sure to order
a separate mesh panel (b) in the 750
Outside Outside fence height. Post spacing=810

sliding door for handle, with adjustable height

Opening Post Spacing (distance between
Safety Fence System / Infill Material
Direction centres of posts)
800 1000 1200 1400
Fence II 810 1010 1210 1410
Clear Opening*
Visual Protection Bronze

Visual Protection Green

Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Woven Mesh 25

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonate
Square Holes
right opening
Fence Height

Fence Height

720 920 1120 1320

Round Holes
Sheet Metal
left opening

Post Profile

(1.5 mm)
Product

Wall II
Flex II

Flex II

2000 STGHV1 -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2000 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2200 STGHV1 -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2200 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2400 STGHV1 -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2400 -800 -1000 -1200 -1400
2600 STGHV1 -L -R -60 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2600 -810 -1010 -1210 -1410
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-STGHV1-L-50-Z-P-2000-1150, where 1150 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product-Opening direction-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing STGHV1-L-50-Z-P-2000-800

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
114  brühl sliding doors

door handle sets

Double-leaf sliding door B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered
separately. See pages 150.

with hook latch

The door posts of these doors are made of a sturdy steel profile with welded four-hole base
plates. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. The special aluminium Item no. TG-V2

track, durable steel rollers and polyamide guides guarantee very smooth and precise open-
mounting systems for safety switches
ing and closing to the right and left side with back-run.
Product Group / Model: DSTS   C Illustration shows DSTS with door handle set TG-V2.

Item no. HP-S-V…(2 x) Item no. HP-S-V…(2 x) Item no. SN-S-V…(2 x)

machine side B Two sets of mounting systems are required! Mounting systems for
Po safety switches must be ordered separately. See pages 158.
st
sp
ac
ing
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
close-up views
Panel height

1 2 3

Installation height (fence height + approx. 160 mm)

4 1 Door with handle

2 Special aluminium track with steel rollers
Fence height

Gro 3 Mounting system for a safety switch

un 4 Polyamide guide
dc
lea
ran
ce

post spacing information

outside Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400, as
the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Post spacing=1600
Active leaf left 1550
1000 mm 2000 mm 1000 mm
Machine side
Post profile QR50
Outside

Active leaf right Post profile QR60

Machine side For doors with a post spacing of at least 2000 mm two additional
1550
posts (a) are included. When planning the fence line: please be sure
Outside to order two separate mesh panels (b) in the fence height. Post spacing=1610

double-leaf sliding door with hook latch

Opening Post Spacing
Safety Fence System / Infill Material
Direction (distance between centres of posts)
1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800
Fence II 1610 1810 2010 2210 2410 2610 2810
Clear Opening*
Visual Protection Bronze

Visual Protection Green

Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Woven Mesh 25

Woven Mesh 40
Active leaf right

Polycarbonate
Active leaf left

Square Holes
Fence Height

Fence Height

1420 1620 1820 2020 2220 2420 2620

Round Holes
Sheet Metal
Post Profile

(1.5 mm)
Product

Wall II
Flex II

Flex II

2000 DSTS -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2000 -1600 -1800 -2000 -2200 -2400 -2600 -2800
2200 DSTS -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2200 -1600 -1800 -2000 -2200 -2400 -2600 -2800
2400 DSTS -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2400 -1600 -1800 -2000 -2200 -2400 -2600 -2800
2600 DSTS -L -R -60 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2600 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2810
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-DSTS-L-50-Z-P-2000-1750, where 1750 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product-Opening direction-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing DSTS-L-50-Z-P-2000-1600

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl sliding doors 115

handles
Double-leaf sliding door for handle B Two handles are required! Handles must be ordered
separately. See page 150.
The door posts of these doors are made of a sturdy steel profile with welded four-hole base
plates. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. The special aluminium
track, durable steel rollers and polyamide guides guarantee very smooth and precise open-
ing and closing to the right and left side with back-run. Item no. GR-S-V1 (2 x)

Product Group / Model: DSTG   C Illustration shows DSTG with handle GR-S-V1. mounting systems for safety switches

Item no. HP-S-V…(2 x) Item no. HP-S-V…(2 x) Item no. SN-S-V…(2 x)

Po machine side
st
sp
B Two sets of mounting systems are required! Mounting systems for safety switches
ac must be ordered separately. See pages 158.
ing
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
close-up views
Panel height

doors
1 2 3
Installation height (fence height + approx. 160 mm)

4 1 Door with handle

2 Special aluminium track with steel rollers
Fence height

Gro
un 3 Mounting system for a safety switch
dc
lea 4 Polyamide guide
ran
ce

post spacing information

outside Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400, as
the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.

Post spacing=1600
Active leaf left
Machine side 1000 mm 2000 mm 1000 mm 1550
Post profile QR50
Outside

Active leaf right Post profile QR60

Machine side For doors with a post spacing of at least 2000 mm two additional
posts (a) are included. When planning the fence line: please be sure 1550
Outside to order two separate mesh panels (b) in the fence height. Post spacing=1610

double-leaf sliding door for handle

Opening Post Spacing
Safety Fence System / Infill Material
Direction (distance between centres of posts)
1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800
Fence II 1610 1810 2010 2210 2410 2610 2810
Clear Opening*
Visual Protection Bronze

Visual Protection Green

Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Woven Mesh 25

Woven Mesh 40
Active leaf right

Polycarbonate
Active leaf left

Square Holes
Fence Height

Fence Height

1520 1720 1920 2120 2320 2520 2620

Round Holes
Sheet Metal
Post Profile

(1.5 mm)
Product

Wall II
Flex II

Flex II

2000 DSTG -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2000 -1600 -1800 -2000 -2200 -2400 -2600 -2800
2200 DSTG -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2200 -1600 -1800 -2000 -2200 -2400 -2600 -2800
2400 DSTG -L -R -50 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2400 -1600 -1800 -2000 -2200 -2400 -2600 -2800
2600 DSTG -L -R -60 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2600 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2810
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-DSTG-L-50-Z-P-2000-1750, where 1750 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product-Opening direction-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing DSTG-L-50-Z-P-2000-1600

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
116  brühl sliding doors

door handle sets

Sliding door with hook latch, B Two door handle sets are required!
Door handle sets must be ordered

opening from both sides separately. See page 150.

The door posts of these doors are made of a sturdy steel profile with welded four-hole base
plates. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. The two steel guide Item no. TG-V2 (2 x)

channels, durable steel rollers and the polyamide guide guarantee very smooth and precise
opening and closing. The front leaf opens to the left side; the back leaf opens to the right side.
mounting systems for safety switches
Product Group / Model: STSW   C Illustration shows STSW with door handle set TG-V2.

machine side Item no. HP-S-V… (2 x) Item no. HP-S-V… (2 x) Item no. SN-S-V…(2 x)

Po
B Two sets of mounting systems are required! Mounting systems for safety switches
st must be ordered separately. See pages 158.
sp
ac
ing
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
Panel height

close-up views
1 2

1 Precise guiding into end position  2 Polyamide guide

Gr
ou
nd
Fence height

cle
C

ara
le
ar

nc
w

e
id
th

Gr
ou
nd
outside cle
ara
C
le

nc
ar

e
w
id
th

Front leaf left opening

Machine side

Outside

sliding door with hook latch, opening from both sides

Opening Post Spacing
Safety Fence System / Infill Material
Direction (distance between centres of posts)

Fence II 1610 1810 2010 2210 2410 2610 2810

Clear Opening*
Visual Protection Bronze

Visual Protection Green

Front leaf left opening

Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Woven Mesh 25

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonate
Square Holes
Fence Height

Fence Height

630 730 830 930 1030 1130 1230

Round Holes
Sheet Metal
Post Profile

(1.5 mm)
Product

Wall II
Flex II

Flex II

2000 STSW -L -60 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2000 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2810
2200 STSW -L -60 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2200 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2810
2400 STSW -L -60 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2400 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2810
2600 STSW -L -60 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2600 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2810
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-STSW-L-60-Z-P-2000-1750 , where 1750 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product-Opening direction-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing STSW-L-60-Z-P-2000-1610

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl sliding doors 117

handles
Sliding door for handle, B Two handles are required! Handles must be
ordered separately. See page 150.

opening from both sides

The door posts of these doors are made of a sturdy steel profile with welded four-hole base
plates. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. The two steel guide Item no. GR-S-V1 (2 x)

channels, durable steel rollers and the polyamide guide guarantee very smooth and precise
opening and closing. The front leaf opens to the left side; the back leaf opens to the right side.
mounting systems for safety switches
Product Group / Model: STGW   C Illustration shows STGW with handle GR-S-V1.

machine side Item no. HP-S-V… (2 x) Item no. HP-S-V… (2 x) Item no. SN-S-V…(2 x)

B Two sets of mounting systems are required! Mounting systems for safety switches
must be ordered separately. See pages 158.
Po
st A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
sp
ac

doors
ing
close-up views
Panel height

1 2

1 Door with handle  2 Polyamide guide

Gr
ou
nd
Fence height

cle
C

ara
le
ar

nc
w

e
id
th

outside Gr
ou
nd
cle
ara
C
le

nc
ar

e
w
id
th

Front leaf left opening

Machine side

Outside

sliding door for handle, opening from both sides

Opening Post Spacing
Safety Fence System / Infill Material
Direction (distance between centres of posts)

Fence II 1610 1810 2010 2210 2410 2610 2810

Clear Opening*
Visual Protection Bronze

Visual Protection Green

Front leaf left opening

Perforated Plate,

Perforated Plate,

Welded Mesh 40

Woven Mesh 25

Woven Mesh 40

Polycarbonate
Square Holes
Fence Height

Fence Height

650 750 850 950 1050 1150 1250

Round Holes
Sheet Metal
Post Profile

(1.5 mm)
Product

Wall II
Flex II

Flex II

2000 STGW -L -60 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2000 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2810
2200 STGW -L -60 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2200 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2810
2400 STGW -L -60 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2400 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2810
2600 STGW -L -60 -F -W -Z-BL -Z-F -Z-LBR -Z-LBQ -Z-SG40 -Z-WG25 -Z-WG40 -Z-P -Z-SSB -Z-SSG -2600 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2810
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-STGW-L-60-Z-P-2000-1750, where 1750 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product-Opening direction-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing STGW-L-60-Z-P-2000-1610

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
118  brühl sliding doors

door handle sets

Double-leaf sliding door with B Mounting systems for safety switches must be
ordered separately. See pages 150.

hook latch and transom

The door posts of these doors are made of a sturdy steel profile with welded four-hole base
plates. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. The two door posts are Item no. TG-V2

connected by a transom bar and transom mesh panel. Both door posts are prepared for use
mounting systems for safety switches
as corner or line posts. The special aluminium track, durable steel rollers and polyamide
guides guarantee very smooth and precise opening and closing. The leaves can be opened
to the left and right.
Product Group / Model: DSTSO   C Illustration shows DSTSO with door handle set TG-V2.
Item no. HP-S-V…(2 x) Item no. HP-S-V…(2 x) Item no. SN-S-V…(2 x)

Po machine side B Two sets of mounting systems are required! Mounting systems for safety
Upper mesh panel

st switches must be ordered separately. See pages 158.

sp
ac A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
ing

close-up views

1 2 3
Panel height

1 Door with handle  2 Mounting system for a safety switch  3 Polyamide guide
Fence height

post spacing information

Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400,
Gr as the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Add an additional 30 mm to the post spacing
ou when the fence height is greater than 3035. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.
nd
cle
ara Post spacing=1600
nc 1550
e
outside Post profile QR50

Post profile QR60

Active leaf left
Machine side 1000 mm 2000 mm 1000 mm
For doors with a post spacing 1550
of at least 2000 mm two ad- Post spacing=1610
Outside ditional posts (a) are included.
When planning the fence line:
Active leaf right please be sure to order two Post profile QR80
Machine side separate mesh panels (b) in
the fence height. 1550
Post spacing=1630
Outside

double-leaf sliding door with hook latch and transom

Opening Post Spacing (distance between centres of posts)
Direction
1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800
Active leaf left

1610 1810 2010 2210 2410 2610 2810

Fence Height

Fence Height
Post Profile

1630 1830 2030 2230 2430 2630 2830

Active leaf
Product

Clear Opening*
Flex II
right

1420 1620 1820 2020 2220 2420 2620

2400 DSTSO -L -R -50 -F -2400 -1600 -1800 -2000 -2200 -2400 -2600 -2800
2600 DSTSO -L -R -60 -F -2600 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2810
2835 DSTSO -L -R -60 -F -2835 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2810
3035 DSTSO -L -R -60 -F -3035 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2810
3235 DSTSO -L -R -80 -F -3235 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
3435 DSTSO -L -R -80 -F -3435 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
3635 DSTSO -L -R -80 -F -3635 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
3835 DSTSO -L -R -80 -F -3835 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
4035 DSTSO -L -R -80 -F -4035 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
4235 DSTSO -L -R -80 -F -4235 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
4435 DSTSO -L -R -80 -F -4435 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
4635 DSTSO -L -R -80 -F -4635 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
4835 DSTSO -L -R -80 -F -4835 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-DSTSO-L-60-F-3035-1750, where 1750 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product-Opening direction-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing DSTSO-L-60-F-3035-1610

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl sliding doors 119

handles
Double-leaf sliding door for B Two handles are required! Handles must be
ordered separately. See page 150.

handle, with transom

The door posts of these doors are made of a sturdy steel profile with welded four-hole base
plates. Both door posts are prepared for use as corner or line posts. The two door posts are Item no. GR-S-V1 (2 x)

connected by a transom bar and transom mesh panel. Both door posts are prepared for use
mounting systems for safety switches
as corner or line posts. The special aluminium track, durable steel rollers and polyamide
guides guarantee very smooth and precise opening and closing. The leaves can be opened
to the left and right.
Product Group / Model: DSTGO   C Illustration shows DSTGO with handle GR-S-V1.
Item no. HP-S-V…(2 x) Item no. HP-S-V…(2 x) Item no. SN-S-V…(2 x)
machine side B Two sets of mounting systems are required! Mounting systems for safety switches
Po
Upper mesh panel

st must be ordered separately. See pages 158.

sp
ac A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
ing
close-up views

doors
1 2 3
Panel height

1 Door with handle  2 Mounting system for a safety switch  3 Polyamide guide
Fence height

post spacing information

Add an additional 10 mm to the post spacing when the fence height is greater than 2400,
Gr as the post profile changes from 50 to 60 mm. Add an additional 30 mm to the post spacing
ou
nd when the fence height is greater than 3035. Therefore, the clear opening remains constant.
cle
ara Post spacing=1600
nc
e 1550
outside Post profile QR50

Post profile QR60

Active leaf left
Machine side 1000 mm 2000 mm 1000 mm
For doors with a post spacing 1550
of at least 2000 mm two ad- Post spacing=1610
Outside ditional posts (a) are included.
When planning the fence line:
Active leaf right please be sure to order two Post profile QR80
Machine side separate mesh panels (b) in
the fence height. 1550
Post spacing=1630
Outside

double-leaf sliding door for handle, with transom

Opening Post Spacing (distance between centres of posts)
Direction
1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800
Active leaf left

1610 1810 2010 2210 2410 2610 2810

Fence Height

Fence Height
Post Profile

1630 1830 2030 2230 2430 2630 2830

Active leaf
Product

Clear Opening*
Flex II
right

1520 1720 1920 2120 2320 2520 2720

2400 DSTGO -L -R -50 -F -2400 -1600 -1800 -2000 -2200 -2400 -2600 -2800
2600 DSTGO -L -R -60 -F -2600 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2810
2835 DSTGO -L -R -60 -F -2835 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2810
3035 DSTGO -L -R -60 -F -3035 -1610 -1810 -2010 -2210 -2410 -2610 -2810
3235 DSTGO -L -R -80 -F -3235 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
3435 DSTGO -L -R -80 -F -3435 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
3635 DSTGO -L -R -80 -F -3635 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
3835 DSTGO -L -R -80 -F -3835 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
4035 DSTGO -L -R -80 -F -4035 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
4235 DSTGO -L -R -80 -F -4235 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
4435 DSTGO -L -R -80 -F -4435 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
4635 DSTGO -L -R -80 -F -4635 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
4835 DSTGO -L -R -80 -F -4835 -1630 -1830 -2030 -2230 -2430 -2630 -2830
* Clear opening may vary depending on the mounting system for safety switches.
C If you wish to order sizes that are not included in the chart above, please put SO- before the item number and specify the special size at the correct position in the item number (e.g. SO-DSTGO-L-60-F-3035-1750, where 1750 stands for special post spacing).

example for item number system

Product-Opening direction-Post profile-Safety fence system / Infill material-Fence height-Post spacing DSTGO-L-60-F-3035-1610

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
120  brühl folding doors

Folding hinged doors

The folding hinged door models FAFTR and DFAFTR are available as latching doors. These models have no guide elements above
the travel path. They are often used for applications where there is severely limited space for door travel and opening.

Model FAFTR / DFAFTR Product advantages and features of all models at-a-glance:

→ No guide elements in the door travel path/clear height.

→ Minimal space requirements when open.
→ Model FAFTR is available with left and right handing.
→ Drop rod protects door from tampering or being forced open.
→ Robust and durable hinges are well suited to door size.
→ Model DFAFTRG comes with bi-parting doors; the opened leaves fold
together at the inside edges of the doorway, which reduces the clear
opening.
→ The components of the folding hinged doors are grit blasted and
powder coated, guaranteeing maximum impact resistance.
→ Folding hinged doors are also available in stainless steel.
→ Folding hinged doors are available in various colours and with a
hot-dip galvanised finish. B See page 238.

Folding sliding doors

The folding sliding door models FASTG and DFASTG are available with handles or latches. The leaves of these doors slide in a robust
steel guide assembly, which ensures smooth and precise door travel.

Model FASTG / DFASTG Product advantages and features of all models at-a-glance:

→ Minimal space requirements when open.

→ Robust and durable guide rails and carriages.
→ Model DFASTG comes with bi-parting doors that open to the outside,
which reduces the clear opening when they are folded together.
→ Robust and durable hinges are well suited to door size.
→ Optional: espagnolette locking mechanism.
→ The components are grit blasted and powder coated, guaranteeing
maximum impact resistance.
→ Folding doors are also available in stainless steel.
→ Folding doors are available in various colours and with a hot-dip
galvanised finish. B See page 238.

Folding hinged door with bar latch system Folding sliding door, bi-parting, with espagnolette locking mechanism

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl folding doors 121

technical specifications for folding hinged doors and folding sliding doors
C Custom designed units available upon request.

Product Group / Model FAFTR DFAFTR FASTG DFASTG

Dimensions

Max. post spacing in mm 4000 8000 5000 5000

Max. door/fence height in mm 2600 2600 2600 2600

Infill Material

Flex ● ● ● ●
Woven mesh 40 ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ●

doors
Sheet metal 1.5 mm

Polycarbonatee 5 mm ● ● ● ●
Woven mesh 25 ● ● ● ●
Welded mesh 40 ● ● ● ●
Perforated plate, round hole RV 5-8 ● ● ● ●
Perforated plate, square hole Qg 8-12 ● ● ● ●
Visual protection, bronze ● ● ● ●
Visual protection, green ● ● ● ●

Mounting Systems for Safety Switches

BRÜHL-UER ® ● ● ­— —
Finishes

Powder-coated finish/colour ● ● ● ●
Hot-dip galvanised finish ● ● ● ●

●  Combination is possible.  ­­—  Combination is not possible.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
122  brühl folding doors

mounting systems for safety switches

Folding hinged door for latch
Folding hinged doors for latches do not have guide elements above the door travel path.
They only need minimal space when they are open. These products are available as latching
doors and come with a drop rod that protects the door from tampering or being forced open.
Art.-Nr. UER-FL-V… Art.-Nr. UER-FR-V…
Product Group / Model: FAFTR   C Illustration shows FAFTR with bar latch UER-FL-V… B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 178.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
close-up views
1 2 3

machine side

4 1 Bar latch for safety switch

2 Sturdy welded double hinges
3 Drop rod for securing closed doors
4 Door leaf stabilisation

Po
st
sp
Panel height

ac
ing
product information
B Infill material see chart on page 121.
C Available with 2 and 3 leaves.
C Available with post spacing from 1.6 to 4 m.
C Drop rod is included.

Gr
ou
nd
Fence height

cle
ara
nc
e

outside

left opening right opening

Machine side Machine side

Outside Outside

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl folding doors 123

mounting systems for safety switches

Folding hinged door for latch,
bi-parting
Bi-parting folding hinged doors for latches do not have guide elements above the door travel
path. They only need minimal space when they are open. These products are available as latch- Art.-Nr. UER-FL-V… Art.-Nr. UER-FR-V…

ing doors and come with a drop rod that protects the door from tampering or being forced open. B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See page 178.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
Product Group / Model: DFAFTR   C Illustration shows DFAFTR with bar latch UER-FL-V…
close-up views
1 2 3

machine side
Panel height

Po
st
sp
ac
ing 4 1 Bar latch for safety switch
2 Sturdy welded double hinges

doors
3 Drop rod for securing closed doors
4 Door leaf stabilisation

product information
B Infill material see chart on page 121.
Gr C Available with 4 or 6 leaves.
ou C Available with post spacing from 3 to 8 m.
nd
cle
ara C Drop rod is included.
nc
Fence height

outside

Active leaf left Active leaf right

Machine side Machine side

Outside Outside

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
124  brühl folding doors

handles
Folding sliding door for handle
The folding sliding door for handle only needs minimal space when open. Robust and dura-
ble guide rails and carriages guarantee very smooth and precise opening and closing.
Product Group / Model: FASTG   C Illustration shows FASTG with handles. Item no. GR-S-V1

B Handles must be ordered separately. See page 150.

close-up views
1 2 3

machine side
1–2 Continuous hinge  3 Example for safety switch mounting arrangement

product information
Po
st B Infill material see chart on page 121.
sp
ac C Available with 2 or 4 leaves.
ing
Panel height

C Available with post spacing from 2.8 to 5 m.

Gr
Fence height

ou
nd
cle
ara
nc
e

outside

left opening right opening

Machine side Machine side

Outside Outside

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl folding doors 125

handles
Folding sliding door for handle,
bi-parting
A bi-parting folding sliding door for handle only needs minimal space when open. Robust and
durable guide rails and carriages guarantee very smooth and precise opening and closing. Item no. GR-S-V1

Product Group / Model: DFASTG  

B Handles must be ordered separately. See page 150.
C Illustration shows DFASTG with handles.
close-up views
1 2 3

machine side

4 1–2 Continuous hinge 

3 Example for safety switch mounting arrangement
4 Adjustable pivot pin assembly
Po

doors
st
sp
ac
ing
Panel height

product information
B Infill material see chart on page 121.
C Available with 4 or 8 leaves.
C Available with post spacing from 2.8 to 5 m.
Fence height

Gr
ou
nd
cle
ara
nc
e

outside

Machine side

Outside

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
126  brühl sliding doors, telescopic

Sliding doors, telescopic

Telescopic sliding doors are perfect for applications with limited number and width of the leaves. Telescopic sliding doors are also
space and where maximum door width is required. The clear available in stainless steel.
width of the opening depends on the door type as well as on the

Model STGT / STST Product advantages and features of all models at-a-glance:

→ Robust, durable guide rails and carriages.

→ The leaves of STGT/STST door units have a travel path that extends
outside of the door opening (“back-run”).
→ The models STGWT and STSWT open from both sides and have no
back-run. Both leaves can be slid to the right and left inside the door
frame, meaning the doorway is always blocked by at least the width
of one leaf, which reduces the clear opening.
→ The models DSTGT and DSTST come with bi-parting doors that open
Model STSWT / STGWT to both sides, and their door travel path extends beyond the door
opening.
→ All standard doors are prepared for fence connection at line or
corner posts.
→ Telescopic sliding doors can be used in combination with mounting
systems for safety switches. B See section Mounting Systems for
Safety Switches on page 158.
→ Multiple telescopic sliding door units can be installed side-by-side for
safeguarding or blocking large areas, e.g. in warehouses.
→ Telescopic sliding doors are available in various colours and with a
hot-dip galvanised finish. B See page 238.
Model DSTST / DSTGT → The components are grit blasted and powder coated, guaranteeing
maximum impact resistance.

Telescopic sliding door with Flex infill for safeguarding a conveyor system Telescopic sliding door with Polycarbonatee infill for process viewing

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl sliding doors, telescopic 127

technical specifications for sliding doors, telescopic

C Custom designed units available upon request.

Product Group / Model STST STGT STSWT STGWT DSTST DSTGT

Dimensions

Max. post spacing in mm 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000

Max. door/fence height in mm 2600 2600 2600 2600 2600 2600

Infill Material

Flex ● ● ● ● ● ●
Woven mesh 40 ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●

doors
Sheet metal 1.5 mm

Polycarbonatee 5 mm ● ● ● ● ● ●
Woven mesh 25 ● ● ● ● ● ●
Welded mesh 40 ● ● ● ● ● ●
Perforated plate, round hole RV 5-8 ● ● ● ● ● ●
Perforated plate, square hole Qg 8-12 ● ● ● ● ● ●
Visual protection, bronze ● ● ● ● ● ●
Visual protection, green ● ● ● ● ● ●

BRÜHL Door Accessories

Door handle sets ● ­— ● ­— ● ­—

Mounting Systems for Safety Switches

BRÜHL-HP-S ® ● ● ● ● ● ●
BRÜHL-GR-S ® ­— ● ­— ● ­— ●
BRÜHL-SN-S ● ● ● ● ● ●

Finishes

Powder-coated finish/colour ● ● ● ● ● ●
Hot-dip galvanised finish ● ● ● ● ● ●

●  Combination is possible.  ­­—  Combination is not possible.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
128  brühl sliding doors, telescopic

door handle sets

Sliding door with hook latch,
telescopic
Telescopic sliding door with telescopic leaves in parallel guide channels,
right or left opening, with back-run. Item no. TG-V2

Product Group / Model: STST  

B Door handle sets must be ordered separately. See page 150.
C Illustration shows STST with door handle set TG-V2.
mounting systems for safety switches

machine side Item no. HP-S-V… Item no. HP-S-V…

B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See pages 166.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
Po
st close-up views
sp
ac
ing
1 2 3
Panel height

4 5

1 Door with handle/lock  2 Floor mounting  3 Polyamide guide 

4 Precise guiding into end position  5 Sturdy portal connection

product information
B Infill material see chart on page 127.
C Available with 2 or 4 leaves.
Fence height

Gr C Available with post spacing from 1.6 to 4 m.

C

ou
le

nd
ar

cle
w
id

ara
th

nc
e

outside

left opening right opening

Machine side Machine side

Outside Outside

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl sliding doors, telescopic 129

handles
Sliding door for handle, telescopic
Telescopic sliding door with telescopic leaves in parallel guide channels, right and left
opening, with back-run.
Product Group / Model: STGT   C Illustration shows STGT with handle GR-S-V1. Item no. GR-S-V1 Item no. GRK-S-V1

B Handles must be ordered separately. See page 150.

mounting systems for safety switches

machine side Item no. HP-S-V… Item no. HP-S-V…

B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See pages 166.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
Po
close-up views

doors
st
sp
ac
ing
1 2 3
Panel height

4 5

1 Door with handle  2 Floor mounting  3 Polyamide guide

4 Precise guiding into end position  5 Sturdy portal connection

product information
B Infill material see chart on page 127.
C Available with 2 to 4 leaves.
C Available with post spacing from 1.6 to 4 m.
Fence height

Gr
ou
C
le

nd
ar

cle
w

ara
id
th

nc
e

outside

left opening right opening

Machine side Machine side

Outside Outside

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
130  brühl sliding doors, telescopic

door handle sets

Sliding door with hook latch, B Two door handle sets are required. Door handle sets
must be ordered separately. See page 150.

opening from both sides and

telescopic Item no. TG-V2 (2 x)

Telescopic sliding door with three or four telescopic leaves in parallel guide channels, right
and left opening, with no back-run.
mounting systems for safety switches
Product Group / Model: STSWT   C Illustration shows STSWT with door handle set TG-V2.

machine side Item no. HP-S-V… (2 x) Item no. HP-S-V… (2 x)

B Two sets of mounting systems are required! Mounting systems for safety switches
must be ordered separately. See pages 166.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
close-up views
Po
st 1 2
sp
Panel height

ac
ing

1 Door with handle  2 Precise guiding into end positio

product information
B Infill material see chart on page 127.
C Available with 3 to 4 leaves.
C Available with post spacing from 1.6 to 4 m.
C
le
ar
w
id

Gr
th

ou
nd
cle
Fence height

ara
nc
e
C
le
ar
w
id
th

outside

Front leaf left opening Front leaf right opening

Machine side Machine side

Outside Outside

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl sliding doors, telescopic 131

handles
Sliding door for handle, opening
to both sides and telescopic
Telescopic sliding door with three or four telescopic leaves in parallel guide channels,
right and left opening, with no back-run. Item no. GR-S-V1 (2 x)

Product Group / Model: STGWT  

B Two handles are required. Handles must be ordered separately. See page 150.
C Illustration shows STGWT with handles GR-S-V1.
mounting systems for safety switches

machine side Item no. HP-S-V… (2 x) Item no. HP-S-V… (2 x)

B Two sets of mounting systems are required! Mounting systems for safety switches
must be ordered separately. See pages 166.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.

doors
close-up views
Po 1 2
st
sp
Panel height

ac
ing

1 Door with handle  2 Precise guiding into end position

product information
B Infill material see chart on page 127.
C Available with 3 to 4 leaves.
C Available with post spacing from 1.6 to 4 m.
C
le
ar
w
id

Gr
th

ou
nd
cle
Fence height

ara
nc
e
C
le
ar
w
id
th

outside

Front leaf left opening Front leaf right opening

Machine side Machine side

Outside Outside

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
132  brühl sliding doors, telescopic

door handle sets

Sliding door with hook latch,
telescopic and bi-parting
Telescopic sliding door with telescopic leaves in parallel guide channels with back-run.
Item no. TG-V2
Product Group / Model: DSTST   C Illustration shows DSTST with door handle set TG-V2. B Door handle sets must be ordered separately. See page 150.
mounting systems for safety switches

machine side Item no. HP-S-V… (2 x) Item no. HP-S-V… (2 x)

B Two sets of mounting systems are required! Mounting systems for safety switches
must be ordered separately. See pages 166.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
close-up views
Panel height

Po 1 2 3
st
sp
ac
ing

4 1 Door with handle

2 Mounting systems for safety switches
3 Precise guiding into end position
Gr 4 Polyamide guide
ou
nd
cle
ara
nc
e

product information
Cle
ar
Op B Infill material see chart on page 127.
en
Fence height

ing
Gr
C Available with 4,6 and 8 leaves.
ou C Available with post spacing from 1.6 to 4 m.
nd
cle
ara
nc
e

outside

Active leaf left Active leaf right

Machine side
Maschinenseite
Machine side
Maschinenseite Maschinenseite

außen außen außen

Outside Outside

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl sliding doors, telescopic 133

handles
Sliding door for handle,
telescopic and bi-parting
Telescopic sliding door with telescopic leaves in parallel guide channels with back-run.
Item no. GR-S-V1 (2 x)
Product Group / Model: DSTGT   C Illustration shows DSTGT with handles GR-S-V1. B Two handles are required. Handles must be ordered separately. See page 150.
mounting systems for safety switches

machine side Item no. HP-S-V… (2 x) Item no. HP-S-V… (2 x)
Panel height

Po B Two sets of mounting systems are required! Mounting systems for safety switches
st
sp must be ordered separately. See pages 166.
ac
ing A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.

doors
close-up views
1 2 3

Gr
ou
nd
cle
ara
nc 1 Door with handle
e 4
2 Mounting systems for safety switches
3 Precise guiding into end position
Cle 4 Polyamide guide
ar
op
en
Fence height

ing
Gr
ou
nd
outside
cle
ara product information
nc
e
B Infill material see chart on page 127.
C Available with 4,6 and 8 leaves.
C Available with post spacing from 1.6 to 4 m.

Active leaf left Active leaf right

Machine side
Maschinenseite
Machine side
Maschinenseite Maschinenseite

außen außen außen

Outside Outside

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  B The standard positioning of all base plates is middle centred. For specific positioning see page 246.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
134  brühl cantilever sliding doors

Cantilever sliding doors

Customers can also choose from our range of cantilever sliding that cannot be obstructed by guide elements (e.g. in crane opera-
doors as modular door units for safety fence systems. These doors tion areas or where materials are transported with forklifts).
are available in widths of up to 4 m. Typical uses include doorways

Model FSTS / FSTG → Sturdy and exceptionally robust design – no comparison to modular

systems.
→ No guide elements on the ground or above the doorway.
→ Robust, durable carriage assemblies.
→ Cantilever support carriage with quick and easy height adjustment
via adjustable screws.
→ Optional: precise ball-bearing construction.
→ Door models FSTST and FSTGT are telescopic to minimise space
requirements.
→ Cantilever sliding doors can be combined with our mounting systems
for safety switches
→ Suitable for safeguarding openings of up to 8 m as bi-parting pair.
Model FSTST / FSTGT → Special double-leaf model can be used for bridging large openings.
B See page 227.
→ The components are grit blasted and powder coated, guaranteeing
maximum impact resistance.
→ Cantilever sliding doors are available in various colours and with
a hot-dip galvanised finish. B See page 238.

Exterior view of a cantilever sliding door Interior view of a cantilever sliding door

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl cantilever sliding doors 135

technical specifications for cantilever sliding doors

C Custom designed units available upon request.

Product Group / Model FSTS FSTG FSTST FSTGT

Dimensions

Max. post spacing in mm 4000 4000 4000 4000

Max. door/fence height in mm 2600 2600 2600 2600

Model

Telescopic — ­— ● ●

Infill Material

doors
Flex II ● ● ● ●
Woven mesh 40 ● ● ● ●
Sheet metal 1.5 mm ● ● ● ●
Polycarbonatee 5 mm ● ● ● ●
Woven mesh 25 ● ● ● ●
Welded mesh 40 ● ● ● ●
Perforated plate, round hole RV 5-8 ● ● ● ●
Perforated plate, square hole Qg 8-12 ● ● ● ●
Visual protection, bronze ● ● ● ●
Visual protection, green ● ● ● ●

Mounting Systems for Safety Switches

BRÜHL-HP-S ® ● ● ● ●
BRÜHL-GR-S ® — ● — ●

Finishes

Powder-coated finish/colour ● ● ● ●
Hot-dip galvanised finish ● ● ● ●

●  Combination is possible.  ­­—  Combination is not possible.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
136  brühl cantilever sliding doors

door handle sets

Cantilever sliding door
with hook latch
Cantilever sliding door with no bothersome guide elements in the doorway.
Item no. TG-V2
Product Group / Model: FSTS   C Illustration shows FSTS with door handle set TG-V2. B Door handle sets must be ordered separately. See page 150.
mounting systems for safety switches

machine side Item no. HP-S-V… Item no. HP-S-V…

B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See pages 166.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
Po close-up views
st
sp
ac
ing 1 2 3
Fence height

1 Door with handle  2 Mounting system for a safety switch

3 Polyamide guide

product information
Special steel channel with bearing rollers.

Gr
ou
nd
cle
ara
nc
Panel height

e
B Infill material see chart on page 135.
C Available with post spacing from 1 to 4 m.

outside

left opening right opening

Machine side Machine side

Outside Outside

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl cantilever sliding doors 137

handles
Cantilever sliding door for handle
Cantilever sliding door with no bothersome guide elements in the doorway.
Product Group / Model: FSTG   C Illustration shows FSTG with handle GR-S-V1.
Item no. GR-S-V1

B Handles must be ordered separately. See page 150.

mounting systems for safety switches

machine side Item no. HP-S-V… Item no. HP-S-V…

B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See pages 166.
A Be sure to specify type of safety switch and actuator.
close-up views

doors
Po
st
sp
ac 1 2 3
ing
Fence height

4 1 Door with handle

2 Mounting system for a safety switch
3 Polyamide guide
4 Model with integrated door stop mechanism

product information
Special steel channel with bearing rollers.
Gr
ou
nd
cle
ara
nc
e
Panel height

B Infill material see chart on page 135.

C Available with post spacing from 1 to 4 m.

outside

left opening right opening

Machine side Machine side

Outside Outside

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
138  brühl cantilever sliding doors

door handle sets

Cantilever sliding door with hook
latch, telescopic
Cantilever sliding door with hook latch, telescopic, with no bothersome guide elements
in the doorway. Item no. TG-V2

Product Group / Model: FSTST  

B Door handle sets must be ordered separately. See page 150.
C Illustration shows FSTST with door handle set TG-V2.
mounting systems for safety switches

machine side Item no. HP-S-V… Item no. HP-S-V…

B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See pages 166.
Po close-up views
st
sp
ac 1 2 3
ing
Fence height

1 Door with handle/lock  2 Mounting systems for safety switches 

3 Polyamide guide

product information
Special steel channel with bearing rollers.

Gr
ou
Panel height

nd B Infill material see chart on page 135.

cle C Available with post spacing from 1 to 4 m.
ara
nc
e

outside

left opening right opening

Machine side Machine side

Outside Outside

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl cantilever sliding doors 139

handles
Cantilever sliding door for handle,
telescopic
Cantilever sliding door for handle, telescopic, with no bothersome guide elements
in the doorway. Item no. GR-S-V1

Product Group / Model: FSTGT  

B Handles must be ordered separately. See page 150.
C Illustration shows FSTGT with handles GR-S-V1.
mounting systems for safety switches

machine side Item no. HP-S-V… Item no. HP-S-V…

B Mounting systems for safety switches must be ordered separately. See pages 166.
close-up views

doors
Po
st 1 2 3
sp
ac
ing
Fence height

4 1 Door with handle

2 Mounting system for a safety switch
3 Polyamide guide
4 Model with integrated door stop mechanism

product information
Special steel channel with bearing rollers.

Gr
ou
Panel height

nd
cle
ara
nc
e
B Infill material see chart on page 135.
C Available with post spacing from 1 to 4 m.

outside

left opening right opening

Machine side Machine side

Outside Outside

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
140  brühl lift panels

frame infill materials

Lift panel 1 2 3

This lift panel is opened and closed manually. It has a sturdy steel construction with en-
closed counterbalance. The lift panel is equipped with adjustable channels and mounting
arrangements for position switches. Multiple, independent load-bearing components serve
as an anti-drop safeguard. 4 5 6

Product Group / Model: HF P

7 8 9

machine side
Ins
tal 10 11 12
lat
ion VSG SSG
wi
dt
h
1 Flex 2 Woven mesh 40  3 Sheet metal  4 Polycarbonatee
5 Woven mesh 25  6 Welded mesh 40  7 Perforated plate, round holes 
8 Perforated plate, square holes  9 Visual protection bronze 
10 Visual protection green  11 Laminated safety glass
Installation height

12 Laminated safety glass with sound insulation

In
st
al

product information
la
tio
n
d
ep
th

C Available with clear width from 0.6 to 2.9 m.

C Available with installation height from 1.5 to 3.5 m.
Lift panel height

C
le
ar
w
id
th

outside

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl lift panels 141

guide channel
Lift panel, single track Optional: Available with additional guide channel

This lift panel is opened and closed manually. It has a sturdy steel construction with
enclosed counterbalance. The lift panel is equipped with adjustable channels and mount-
ing arrangements for position switches. Multiple, independent load-bearing components
as an anti-drop safeguard.

Product Group / Model: HFE

th on
i
ep t
d lla
a
st
In

Ins
tal
lat
ion product information
wi
dt C Available with clear width from 0.6 to 2.9 m.
h machine side
C Available with installation height from 1.5 to 3.5 m.

doors
Installation height

Lift panel height

outside
Fence height

Gr
ou
na
dc
lea
ran
ce
C
le
ar
w
id
th

A row of manually operated machine guard lift panels

B Floor-mounting hardware must be ordered separately. See page 148.  C The standard ground clearance is 175 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
142  brühl accessories

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl accessories 143

accessories
Brühl Accessories

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
144  brühl accessories for safety fence systems

Accessories for safety fence system Flex II

Flex I mounting clip with captive hex screw

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Utilit
prot y mode Mounting clip and fasteners galvanised steel 8 FL1-V2-8
ectio l
n

Flex II mounting clip with captive hex screw

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Pa
prot tent
ectio 6 FL2-V1-6
n

8 FL2-V1-8
Plastic mounting clip, galvanised steel angle profile and fasteners
10 FL2-V1-10

50 FL2-V1-50

Flex II mounting clip with captive torx screw

Pa product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

prot tent
ectio
n
Plastic mounting clip, galvanised steel angle profile and fasteners 10 FL2-V2-10

Flex II mounting clip with captive hex screw and spacer plate

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Pa
prot tent Plastic mounting clip and spacer plate, galvanised steel
ectio
n 5 FL2DP-V1-5
angle profile and fasteners

Flex angle bracket with fasteners

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Flex angle bracket and fasteners galvanised steel 5 FL1W-V1-5

A Captivity of the fasteners is not ensured.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl accessories for safety fence systems 145

Accessories for safety fence system Stainless Steel Flex II

Stainless Steel Flex I mounting clip with captive hex screw
packing unit
product description item no.
(pcs.)
Utilit
prot y mode Mounting clip and fasteners stainless steel 8 E-FL1-V2-8
ectio l
n

Stainless Steel Flex II mounting clip with captive hex screw

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Pa
prot tent
ectio 6 E-FL2-V1-6
n

8 E-FL2-V1-8
Plastic mounting clip, stainless steel angle profile and fasteners
10 E-FL2-V1-10

50 E-FL2-V1-50

accessories
Stainless Steel Flex II mounting clip with captive torx screw

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Pa
prot tent
ectio
n Plastic mounting clip, stainless steel angle profile and fasteners 10 E-FL2-V2-10

Stainless Steel Flex II mounting clip with captive hex screw and spacer plate

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Pa
prot tent Plastic mounting clip and spacer plate, stainless steel
ectio
n 5 E-FL2DP-V1-5
angle profile and fasteners

Stainless Steel Flex angle bracket with fasteners

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Flex angle bracket and fasteners stainless steel 5 E-FL1W-V1-5

ACaptivity of the fasteners is not ensured.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
146  brühl accessories for safety fence systems

Accessories for safety fence system Fence II

Fence II top mounting clip, flat version with captive hex screw
packing unit
product description item no.
(pcs.)

Steel flat mounting clip and galvanised steel fasteners 16 ZL2O-V1-16

Fence II top mounting clip, angled version with captive hex screw
packing unit
product description item no.
(pcs.)

Steel angled mounting clip and galvanised steel fasteners 16 ZL2O-V2-16

Fence II bottom mounting clip with special hex screw

packing unit
product description item no.
(pcs.)

Steel mounting clip and galvanised steel fasteners 16 ZL2U-V1-16

Accessories for safety fence system Stainless Steel Fence II

Stainless Steel Fence II top mounting clip, flat version with captive hex screw
packing unit
product description item no.
(pcs.)

Flat mounting clip and fasteners stainless steel 16 E-ZL2O-V1-16

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl accessories for safety fence systems 147

Stainless Steel Fence II top mounting clip, angled version with captive hex screw
packing unit
product description item no.
(pcs.)

Angled mounting clip and fasteners stainless steel 16 E-ZL2O-V2-16

Stainless Steel Fence II bottom mounting clip with special hex screw
packing unit
product description item no.
(pcs.)

Mounting clip and fasteners stainless steel 16 E-ZL2U-V1-16

accessories
Accessories for safety fence system Aluminium Fence I
Aluminium Fence I mounting clip, flat version with captive hex screw
packing unit
product description item no.
(pcs.)

Flat mounting clip and fasteners galvanised steel 16 A-ZL1-V1-16

Aluminium Fence I mounting clip, angled version with captive hex screw
packing unit
product description item no.
(pcs.)

Angled mounting clip and fasteners galvanised steel 16 A-ZL1-V2-16

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
148  brühl floor mounting hardware

Floor mounting hardware

Fix anchor mounting hardware
packing
product description threads length (mm) item no.
unit (pcs.)

M10 120 10 BMF-10 x 120-10

Fix anchor, galvanised steel M12 145 10 BMF-12 x 145-10

M16 130 10 BMF-16 x 130-10

Fix anchor, stainless steel M10 120 10 E-BMF-10 x 120-10

Chemical anchor mounting hardware

packing
product description threads length (mm) item no.
unit (pcs.)

M10 130 10 BMV-10 x 130-10

Chemical anchor, galvanised steel M12 160 10 BMV-12 x 160-10

M16 190 10 BMV-16 x 190-10

M10 130 10 E-BMV-10 x 130-10

Chemical anchor, stainless steel M12 160 10 E-BMV-12 x 160-10

M16 190 10 E-BMV-16 x 190-10

Hook bolt mounting hardware

packing
product description threads length (mm) item no.
unit (pcs.)

Hook bolt, galvanised steel M10 90 10 BMH-10 x 90-10

Hook bolt for mounting to grating and

special attachment points.

Wafer-head screw mounting hardware

packing
product description threads length (mm) item no.
unit (pcs.)
Wood screw with wafer head,
8 50 1 BMT-8 x 50
galvanised steel

Wood screw with wafer head for

mounting to wood flooring.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl accessories for posts 149

Accessories for posts

Threaded plates

Application 1
Threaded plate for mounting posts to grating by clampin product description threaded plate size (mm) packing unit (pcs.) item no.

60 x 130 mm 1 GP-V1-0613

130 x 130 mm 1 GP-V1-1313

70 x 150 mm 1 GP-V1-0715
Threaded plate and mounting hardware,
galvanised steel
150 x 150 mm 1 GP-V1-1515

100 x 200 mm 1 GP-V1-1020
Application 2
Threaded plate for mounting posts to steel surfaces by welding
200 x 200 mm 1 GP-V1-2020

accessories
Post supports

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Post supports for increasing the stability of the post 2 PS-V1-2

A The appropriate floor mounting hardware for each post must be ordered separately. See page 148.
A Designed for use with post profile 50/50 and 60/60.

Equipotential bonding

If the wire mesh becomes electrically charged, current is safely

discharged into the earth through the equipotential bonding system.
Equipotential bonding is important, for example, for danger zones
that contain explosive materials that could be detonated by an
electric spark.

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Equipotential bonding for preventing guards from

10 PA-V1-10
becoming charged with static electricity

A Please order two equipotential bonding units per mesh panel.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
150  brühl accessories for doors

Accessories for doors

Handle for sliding door

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Plastic handle with mounting plate for sliding doors 1 GR-S-V1

C Handle can also be used for hinged doors as an additional handle.

Handle with ball catch for hinged door

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Plastic handle with mounting plate and ball catch for hinged doors 1 GRK-F-V1

Handle with ball catch for sliding door

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Plastic handle with mounting plate and ball catch for sliding doors 1 GRK-S-V1

Door handle set with handle inside and knob outside

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Door handle set for hinged doors with fixed knob outside and handle
1 TG-V1
inside. Can only be opened from the outside with a key

B Profile cylinder must be ordered separately! See page 152. 

A Only for use with sheet metal and Polycarbonatee infill.
C Designed for use with Euro profile cylinder ø 17 mm – length: 31.5/31.5 mm

Door handle set with handle inside and outside

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Door handle set for hinged and sliding doors with handle
1 TG-V2
inside and outside

B Profile cylinder must be ordered separately! See page 152.

C Designed for use with Euro profile cylinder ø 17 mm – length: 31.5/31.5 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl accessories for doors 151

Door handle set with handle inside, knob outside and reach-through protection

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Door handle set for hinged doors with fixed knob outside, a handle
inside and reach-through protection. Can only be opened from the 1 TG-V5
outside with a key.

B Profile cylinder must be ordered separately! See page 152. 

C Designed for use with Euro profile cylinder ø 17 mm – length: 31.5/31.5 mm

Hold-open mechanism for hinged doors

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Mechanism for preventing the unintentional closure

1 ZS-F-V1
of hinged doors

accessories
Fixed castor

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Supporting roller for hinged doors, mounting situation fixed castor. 1 STR-F-V1-BR

Swivel castor

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Supporting roller for hinged doors, mounting situation swivel castor. 1 STR-F-V1-LR

Swivel castor with brake

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Supporting roller for hinged doors, mounting situation

1 STR-F-V1-LRB
swivel castor with brake.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
152  brühl accessories for doors

Profile cylinder, keyed alike

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Euro profile cylinder, keyed alike, ø 17 mm,

1 PZ-V1
length: 31.5/31.5 mm

Profile cylinder, keyed to differ

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Euro profile cylinder, keyed to differ, ø 17 mm,

1 PZ-V2
length: 31.5/31.5 mm

Cable carriers
Mounting hardware for cable ducts, Type 1
55
product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Outside Machine side Mounting hardware for the attachment of smaller cable ducts to
10 KKH-V1-10
posts; bracket and fasteners galvanised steel
Post

Mounting hardware for cable ducts, Type 2

150
product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Outside Machine side Mounting hardware for the attachment of larger cable ducts to
10 KKH-V2-10
posts; bracket and fasteners galvanised steel
Post

Mounting hardware for cable ducts, Type 3

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Mounting hardware for the attachment of cable ducts to Flex II

10 KKH-V3-10
mesh panels; mounting plate and fasteners galvanised steel

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl accessories 153

Safeguarding conveyor discharge points

Wire mesh panel guards

th
ep
D

W
id
th

accessories
Conveyor discharge point with wire mesh panel guard

product description depth (mm) width (mm) item no.

1200 900 SVGM-1200 x 900

Wire mesh panel guard incl. fasteners for the safeguarding of conveyor discharge points
1200 1200 SVGM-1200 x 1200

Mounting bracket for wire mesh panel guards

product description packing unit (pcs.) item no.

Panel guard mounting bracket incl. fasteners and clamping plate 6 BMSV-6

Mounting bracket with clamping plate

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
154  brühl accessories

Windows with clamping strip for Safety Fence System Wall II

Clamping strip Type 1 – Window assembly with SBR clamping strip

infill material

Laminated Safety Glass

(thickness 2 x 3 mm)
product

(thickness 5 mm)
Polycarbonatee

Window Height

Window Width
Machine side

Outside

SKP-V1 -VSG6 -P5 … …

example for item number system

Product-Infill Material-Window Height-Window Width SKP-V1-P5-500-500

C Visible window area is reduced by approx. 10 mm on all sides.  C Rounded window corners.

Clamping strip Type 2 – Window assembly with EPDM clamping strip

infill material

Laminated Safety Glass

(thickness 2 x 3 mm)
product

(thickness 5 mm)
Polycarbonatee

Window Height

Window Width
Machine side

Outside

SKP-V2 -VSG6 -P5 … …

example for item number system

Product-Infill Material-Window Height-Window Width SKP-V2-VSG6-500-500

C Visible window area is reduced by approx. 10 mm on all sides.  C Rounded window corners.

Outside Machine side

Clamping strip Type 3 – Window assembly with EPDM seal

infill material
Bronze (thickness 3 mm)

Green (thickness 3 mm)

Laminated Safety Glass
(thickness 2 x 3 mm)

product
Visual Protection,

Visual Protection,

(thickness 5 mm)
Polycarbonatee

Window Height

Window Width
Machine side

Outside

SKP-V3 -VSG6 -SSB -SSG -P5 … …

example for item number system

Product-Infill Material-Window Height-Window Width SKP-V3-P5-500-500

C Visible window area is reduced by approx. 10 mm on all sides.  C Rounded window corners.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl accessories 155

Windows with clamping strip for Safety Fence System Fence II

Clamping strip Type 4 – Window assembly with clamping brackets

infill material

Green (thickness 3 mm)

product

Visual Protection,

Visual Protection,
(thickness 3 mm)

(thickness 5 mm)
Machine side

Polycarbonatee

Window Height

Window Width
Outside

Bronze
SKP-V4 -SSB -SSG -P5 … …

example for item number system

Product-Infill Material-Window Height-Window Width SKP-V4-SSB-500-500

C Visible window area is reduced by approx. 13 mm on all sides.

Outside Machine side

accessories
Windows with clamping strip for machine
guard doors and gates
Clamping strip Type 5 – Window assembly with EPDM clamping strip and clamping brackets

infill material
Laminated Safety Glass

Laminated Safety Glass

Laminated Safety Glass

(thickness 2 x 3 mm)

(thickness 2 x 3 mm)

(thickness 2 x 4 mm)
with Soundproofing

product
(thickness 5 mm)

(thickness 8 mm)
Polycarbonatee

Polycarbonatee

Window Height

Window Width
Machine side

Outside

SKP-V5 -VSGS8 -VSG6 -VSG8 -P5 -P8 … …

example for item number system

Product-Infill Material-Window Height-Window Width SKP-V5-P5-500-500

C Visible window area is reduced by approx. 13mm on all sides.

Outside Machine side

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 156  brühl identification of danger zones

Identification of danger zones

Sign mounting kit for 2 adhesive safety signs
safety signs
Mounting diagram

Diameter/Height of
200

Adhesive Sign
Adhesive Sign Name
00
0/2

Warning
Product
10

Eye protection must be worn BSG M001 -100 -200

300/500
Safety helmet BSG M002 -100 -200

Ear protectors must be worn BSG M003 -100 -200

200 200
/ Protective footwear must be worn BSG M005 -100 -200
100
Safety harness must be worn BSG M009 -100 -200

Disconnect before carrying out

BSG M014 -100 -200
maintenance or repair

No pedestrians BSG P003 -100 -200

250 150/250
No access for unauthorised
BSG P006 -100 -200
persons

Do not climb unless authorised BSG P022 -100 -200

product description item no.
Do not grab in the fill BSG P024 -100 -200
Kit for mounting two prohibition and hazard warning signs with
SD2-100
Ø 100 mm to the safety guard; RAL 7035 Do not grip inside BSG P026 -100 -200

General Warning BSG W000 -100 -200

Kit for mounting two prohibition and hazard warning signs with
SD2-200
Ø 200 mm to the safety guard; RAL 7035
Danger overhead crane,
BSG W006 -100 -200
overhead load

B Adhesive prohibition and hazard warning signs must be ordered separately. See page 157. Fork lift trucks operating BSG W007 -100 -200

Danger electricity, electric shock BSG W008 -100 -200

Sign mounting kit for 3 adhesive safety signs Optical radiation BSG W009 -100 -200

Non-ionising radiation BSG W012 -100 -200

product description item no.
Strong magnetic field BSG W013 -100 -200
Kit for mounting three prohibition and hazard warning signs with
SD3-100
Ø 100 mm to the safety guard; RAL 7035
Danger obstacles, watch your step BSG W014 -100 -200

Kit for mounting three prohibition and hazard warning signs with Danger: drop BSG W015 -100 -200
SD3-200
Ø 200 mm to the safety guard; RAL 7035
Low temperature BSG W017 -100 -200

B Adhesive prohibition and hazard warning signs must be ordered separately. See page 157.
Harmful or irritant materials BSG W018 -100 -200

Danger: cutter BSG W022 -100 -200

Danger of entrapment BSG W023 -100 -200

Danger machinery starts

BSG W025 -100 -200
automatically

Hot surface BSG W026 -100 -200

Sign Sign text
Keep hands clear BSG W027 -100 -200

Entanglement – rotating parts BSG W030 -100 -200

text
Can be mounted horizontally or
vertically with text field. example for item number system
Product-Warning-Sign diameter BSG-W013-200

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl identification of danger zones 157

Adhesive signs for sign-mounting kits

M001 M002 M003 M005 M009

Eye protection must be worn Safety helmet Ear protectors must be worn Protective footwear must be worn Safety harness must be worn

M014 P003 P006 P022 P024

Disconnect before carrying out No pedestrians No access for unauthorised Do not climb unless authorised Do not grab in the fill
maintenance or repair persons

accessories
P026 W000 W006 W007 W008
Do not grip inside General Warning Danger overhead crane, Fork lift trucks operating Danger electricity, electric shock
overhead load

W009 W012 W013 W014 W015

Optical radiation Non-ionising radiation Strong magnetic field Danger obstacles, watch your step Danger: drop

W017 W018 W022 W023 W025

Low temperature Harmful or irritant materials Danger for cutter Danger of entrapment Danger machinery starts
automatically

W026 W027 W030

Hot surface Keep hands clear Entanglement – rotating parts

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
158  brühl mounting systems for safety switches

Mounting systems for safety switches

In addition to guard doors and gates, Brühl offers an extensive ucts as well as products from other well-known manufacturers.
range of mounting systems for safety switches to meet every These products have proven their durability and ease of handling
need. The product range includes Brühl’s own high-quality prod- over the years in thousands of applications.

Advantages at-a-glance:

→ Thanks to the wide variety of mounting systems for safety → Easy-to-understand installation instructions are included with
switches, various locking and opening systems can be used in every product.
combination with any kind of door. → The cooperation with well-known manufacturers means
→ The required safety switch and/or mounting system is maximum reliability and quality for all products.
available for every application. → Brühl safety guards with the corresponding mounting systems
→ The numerous mounting units can be easily adjusted. have been specially designed to prevent user tampering to the
→ Many accessory parts have been designed as modular units greatest possible extent.
that are easily interchangeable with other modular units
(e.g. handles or latches).

The perfect mounting system for every safety switch

Handle system Brühl-GR ® Handle system Brühl-GRK ® Mounting plate system Brühl-HP-F ® Mounting plate system Brühl-HP-S ®

B Page 160. B Page 162. B Page 164. B Page 166.

Locking system Brühl-RI ® Lock mounting arrangement Brühl-RI ® Trip cam assembly Brühl-SN Bar latch system Brühl-UER ®

B Page 168. B Page 170. B Page 172. B Page 174.

A Please include the complete designation of the safety switch and actuator when placing an order or making an enquiry.
C If you were unable to find the required safety switch mounting system in our product range, please don’t hesitate to contact us.

Explanation of the product types

For the proper use and combination of the individual accessory products, our door types are defined as follows:

Product type: Product type:

Lock – Example FTS Handle/Latch – Example FTR
Products in the “Lock” group always Products in the “Handle/Latch” group
have a box profile for the insertion of have a standard hole pattern for the
a mortise lock (for hinged doors) or a mounting of a handle or latch system
hook latch assembly (for sliding doors). onto the frame of the door leaf.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl mounting systems for safety switches 159

overview of possible combinations for door mounting systems and door product groups

Mounting Systems

GRK-FEO-V...

HP-FEO-V…

UER-FR-V…
UER-FL-V…
Door – Product Groups Type Product Group

GRK-S-V…
GRK-F-V…

HP-S-V…

SN-S-V…
GR-S-V…

HP-F-V…

SN-F-V…
GR-F-V…

ZS-F-V…
RI-F-V…
with mortise lock FTS — — — — — ●— — — ● — — — ●
Hinged Doors
for handle or latch FTR ● — ● — — — — — ● ● — ● ● ●
with mortise lock FTSO — — — — — ● — — — — — — — ●
Hinged Doors with Transom
for handle or latch FTRO ● — ● — — — — — ● — — ● ● ●
with mortise lock PFTS — — — — — ● — — — — — — — ●
Portal Hinged Doors
for handle or latch PFTR ● — ● — — — — — ● — — ● ● ●
with mortise lock FTSEO — — — — — — ● — — — — — — —
Hinged Doors, Inward Opening
for handle or latch FTREO — — — — ● — — — — — — ● ● —
with mortise lock FTSHV1 — — — — — ● — — — ● — — — ●
Hinged Doors with Adjustable Height
for handle or latch FTRHV1 ● — ● — — — — — ● ● — ● ● ●
with mortise lock DFTS — — — — — ● — — — ● — — — ●
Double-leaf Hinged Doors
for handle or latch DFTR ● — ● — — — — — ● ● — ● ● ●
with mortise lock DFTSO — — — — — ● — — — — — — — ●

accessories
Double-leaf Hinged Doors
with Transom
for handle or latch DFTRO ● — ● — — — — — ● — — ● ● ●
with hook latch STS — — — — — — — ● — — — — — ●
Sliding Doors
for handle STG — ● — ● — — — ● — — — — — ●
with hook latch STSO — — — — — — — ● — — — — — ●
Sliding Doors with Transom
for handle STGO — ● — ● — — — ● — — — — — ●
Sliding Doors with
with hook latch STSHV1 — — — — — — — ● — — — — — ●
Adjustable Height
for handle STGHV1 — ● — ● — — — ● — — — — — ●
with hook latch DSTS — — — — — — — ● — — — — — ●
Double-leaf Sliding Doors
for handle DSTG — ● — — — — — ● — — — — — ●
Sliding Doors,
with hook latch STSW — — — — — — — ● — — — — — —
Opening from Both Sides
for handle STGW — ● — ● — — — ● — — — — — —
Double-leaf Sliding Doors
with hook latch DSTSO — — — — — — — ● — — ● — — —
with Transom
for handle DSTGO — ● — — — — — ● — — ● — — —
Double Action Swing Doors PT — — — — — — — — — ● — — — —
Folding Hinged Doors for latch FAFTR — — — — — — — — — — — ● ● —
Folding Hinged Doors, bi-parting for latch DFAFTR — — — — — — — — — — — ● ● —
Folding Sliding Doors for handle FASTG — — — — — — — ● — — — — — —
Folding Sliding Doors, bi-parting for handle DFASTG — — — — — — — ● — — — — — —
with hook latch STST — — — — — — — ● — — — — — —
Sliding Doors, Telescopic
for handle STGT — ● — ● — — — ● — — — — — —
Sliding Doors, Opening from
with hook latch STSWT — — — — — — — ● — — — — — —
Both Sides and Telescopic
for handle STGWT — ● — ● — — — ● — — — — — —
Sliding Doors, Telescopic
with hook latch DSTST — — — — — — — ● — — — — — —
and bi-parting
for handle DSTGT — ● — ● — — — ● — — — — — —
with hook latch FSTS — — — — — — — ● — — — — — —
Cantilever Sliding Doors
for handle FSTG — ● — — — — — ● — — — — — —
with hook latch FSTST — — — — — — — ● — — — — — —
Cantilever Sliding Doors, Telescopic
for handle FSTGT — ● — — — — — ● — — — — — —
●  Combination is possible  ­­—  Combination is not possible.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
160  brühl mounting systems for safety switches

Handle systems Brühl-GR®  

Handle system BRÜHL-GR ® Hinged door FTR

Mechanical stop
Hole and thread size
as required for switch- Galvanised surface
mounting fixtures

Tamper-resistant fittings
PA handle

Parts with rounded,

laser-cut edges
Standard: DIN EN 1088

Select safety switch with the appropriate mounting system

Schmersal AZ16 Schmersal AZM161 Schmersal MZM100 Schmersal AZM200 Euchner MGB

Accessory set B001 Accessory set B002 Accessory set B006 Accessory set B003 Accessory set B004

GR-F-V1-AZ16-B001 GR-F-V1-AZM161-B002 GR-F-V1-MZM100-B006 GR-F-V2-AZM200-B003 GR-F-V2-MGB-B004

Customised mounting systems for safety switches

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl mounting systems for safety switches 161

overview of brühl-gr ® mounting systems for hinged doors

Manufacturer Switch Type Item No.

SK GR-F-V1-SK-B001
Bernstein
SKC GR-F-V1-SKC-B001

Euchner MGB GR-F-V2-MGB-B004

Magne GR-F-V1-MAGNE-B071
Jokab Safety
Knox GR-F-V3-KNOX-B069

Pilz PSENslock GR-F-V1-PSENSL-B043

Rockwell Automation Trojan GR-F-V1-440K-T-B001

AZ200-SZ200 GR-FL-V1-AZ200-SZ200-B036

AZM200-SZ200 GR-FL-V1-AZM200-SZ200-B036

AZ200-SZ200 GR-FR-V1-AZ200-SZ200-B035

AZM200-SZ200 GR-FR-V1-AZM200-SZ200-B035

AZ15 GR-F-V1-AZ15-B001

Schmersal AZ16 GR-F-V1-AZ16-B001

Safe solutions for your industry
AZM161 GR-F-V1-AZM161-B002

AZM170 GR-F-V1-AZM170-B055

MZM100 GR-F-V1-MZM100-B006

accessories
AZ200 GR-F-V2-AZ200-B003

AZM200 GR-F-V2-AZM200-B003

Sick i16 GR-F-V1-I16-B001

Siemens 3SE5 GR-F-V1-3SE5-B040

overview of brühl-gr ® mounting systems for sliding doors

Manufacturer Switch Type Item No.

Euchner MGB GR-S-V2-MGB-B059

AZ200 GR-S-V2-AZ200-B060
Schmersal
Safe solutions for your industry AZM200 GR-S-V2-AZM200-B060

example for item number system Abbreviations for mounting situations:

Mounting system group-Mounting situation-Variant-Switch type-Order number GR-F-V1-AZ16-B001 FL = Hinged door DIN left (left-handed doors)
FR = Hinged door DIN right (right-handed doors)
C Bolts for mounting the safety switch are not included. F = Hinged door
C It is advisable to choose handle with ball catch if the latching force of the safety switch is less than 30 N. S = Sliding door

Didn’t find your safety switch here?

We are continually developing new mounting

systems for our customers! For a current list of
available mounting systems, please see the
safety switch database on our website at
www.schutzeinrichtungen.com

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
162  brühl mounting systems for safety switches

Handle systems with ball catch Brühl-GRK®

Handle system Brühl-GRK ® Hinged door FTR

Mechanical stop

Hole and thread size

as required for switch-
mounting fixtures
Galvanised surface

Tamper-resistant fittings
PA handle

Parts with rounded,

laser-cut edges

Standard: DIN EN 1088

Select safety switch with the appropriate mounting system

Schmersal AZ16 Schmersal AZM161 Siemens 3SE5 Jokab Safety Magne Schmersal BNS-B20

Accessory set B001 Accessory set B002 Accessory set B040 Accessory set B071 Accessory set B007

GRK-F-V2-AZ16-B001 GRK-F-V2-AZM161-B002 GRK-F-V2-3SE5-B040 GRK-F-V2-MAGNE-B071 GRK-F-V3-BNS-B20-B007

Customised mounting systems for safety switches

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl mounting systems for safety switches 163

overview of brühl-grk ® mounting systems for hinged doors

Manufacturer Switch Type Item No.

SK GRK-F-V2-SK -B001
Bernstein
SKC GRK-F-V2-SKC-B001

Honeywell GKN GRK-F-V2-GKN -B001

Jokab Safety Magne GRK-F-V2-MAGNE-B071

PSENme2 GRK-F-V2-PSENme2-B001

Pilz PSENme3 GRK-F-V2-PSENme3-B001

PSENslock GRK-F-V2-PSENsl-B043

Rockwell Automation Trojan GRK-F-V2-440K-T-B001

AZ15 GRK-F-V2-AZ15-B001

AZ16 GRK-F-V2-AZ16-B001

AZM161 GRK-F-V2-AZM161-B002
Schmersal
Safe solutions for your industry AZM170 GRK-F-V2-AZM170-B055

MZM100 GRK-F-V2-MZM100-B006

BNS-B20 GRK-F-V3-BNS-B20-B007

i16 GRK-F-V2-I16-B001
Sick
i17 GRK-F-V2-I17-B001

accessories
Siemens 3SE5 GRK-F-V2-3SE5-B040

overview of brühl-grk ® mounting systems for inward-opening hinged doors

Manufacturer Switch Type Item No.

Schmersal MZM100 GRK-FEO-V1-MZM100-B005

Safe solutions for your industry

example for item number system Abbreviations for mounting situations:

Mounting system group-Mounting situation-Variant-Switch type-Order number GRK-F-V2-AZ16-B001 F = Hinged door
FEO = Hinged door, inward opening
C Bolts for mounting the safety switch are not included.

Didn’t find your safety switch here?

We are continually developing new mounting

systems for our customers! For a current list of
available mounting systems, please see the
safety switch database on our website at
www.schutzeinrichtungen.com

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
164  brühl mounting systems for safety switches

Mounting plate systems for hinged

doors Brühl-HP-F®  

Mounting plate system Brühl-HP-F ® Hinged door FTS

Tamper-resistant
fittings
Galvanised surface

Actuator plate
Hole and thread size as
required for switch-
mounting fixtures

Parts with
rounded, laser-
cut edges

Standard: DIN EN 1088

Select safety switch with the appropriate mounting system

Siemens 3SE5 Schmersal AZ16 Schmersal AZM161 Euchner CET Euchner NZ Pilz PSENslock

Accessory set B010 Accessory set B052 Accessory set B038 Accessory set B049 Accessory set B011 Accessory set B041

HP-F-V1-3SE5-B010 HP-F-V1-AZ16-B052 HP-F-V1-AZM161-B038 HP-F-V1-CET-B049 HP-F-V1-NZ-B011 HP-F-V2-PSENsl-B041

Customised mounting systems for safety switches

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl mounting systems for safety switches 165

overview of brühl-hp-f ® mounting systems for hinged doors

Manufacturer Switch Type Item No.
SK HP-F-V1-SK-B052
Bernstein SKC HP-F-V1-SKC-B052
SLK HP-F-V1-SLK-B012
Comitronic-BTI AMX HP-F-V1-AMX-B067
Elan Schaltelemente SDG HP-F-V1-SDG-B010
Safe solutions for your industry
STA HP-F-V1-STA-B013
STP HP-F-V1-STP-B013
TP HP-F-V1-TP-B013
TZ HP-F-V1-TZ-B030
Euchner
SGP HP-F-V1-SGP-B013
NZ HP-F-V1-NZ-B011
GP HP-F-V1-GP-B013
CET HP-F-V1-CET-B049
GKN HP-F-V1-GKN-B052
Honeywell
GKS HP-F-V1-GKS-B013
L200 HP-F-V1-L200-B013
Leuze Electronic
S20 HP-F-V1-S20-B058
D4NL HP-F-V1-D4NL-B046
Omron Electronics
D4NS HP-F-V1-D4NS-B058
PSENslock HP-F-V2-PSENSL-B041
PSENme1 HP-F-V1-PSENME1-B012
Pilz
PSENme2 HP-F-V1-PSENME2-B052
PSENme3 HP-F-V1-PSENME3-B052

accessories
Trojan HP-F-V1-440K-T-B052
Rockwell Automation
TLS HP-F-V1-TLS-B068
AZ15 HP-F-V1-AZ15-B052
AZ16 HP-F-V1-AZ16-B052
AZM161 HP-F-V1-AZM161-B038
Schmersal
Safe solutions for your industry AZM170 HP-F-V1-AZM170-B038
BNS16 HP-F-V1-BNS16-B052
BZ16 HP-F-V1-BZ16-B052
XCS-A HP-F-V1-XCS-A-B011
XCS-B HP-F-V1-XCS-B-B011
Schneider Electric XCS-C HP-F-V1-XCS-C-B011
XCS-E HP-F-V1-XCS-E-B030
XCS-TE HP-F-V1-XCS-TE-B030
i10 HP-F-V1-I10-B013
i12 HP-F-V1-I12-B058
Sick
i16 HP-F-V1-I16-B052
i17 HP-F-V1-I17-B052
3SE5 HP-F-V1-3SE5-B010
Siemens
3SE5 HP-F-V1-3SE5-B051

overview of brühl-hp-f ® mounting systems for inward-opening hinged doors

Manufacturer Switch Type Item No.
SK HP-FEO-V1-SK-B008
Bernstein
SKC HP-FEO-V1-SKC-B008
Honeywell GKN HP-FEO-V1-GKN-B008
PSENme2 HP-FEO-V1-PSENME2-B008
Pilz
PSENme3 HP-FEO-V1-PSENME3-B008
Rockwell Automation Trojan HP-FEO-V1-440K-T-B008
AZ15 HP-FEO-V1-AZ15-B008
Schmersal AZ16 HP-FEO-V1-AZ16-B008
Safe solutions for your industry
AZM161 HP-FEO-V1-AZM161-B009
i16 HP-FEO-V1-I16-B008
Sick
i17 HP-FEO-V1-I17-B008

example for item number system Abbreviations for mounting situations:

Mounting system group-Mounting situation-Variant-Switch type-Order number HP-F-V1-AZM161-B038 FEO = Hinged door, inward opening
F = Hinged door

C Bolts for mounting the safety switch are not included.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
166  brühl mounting systems for safety switches

Mounting plate systems for sliding doors

BRÜHL-HP-S®  

Mounting plate system Brühl-HP-S ® Sliding door STG / STS

Tamper-resistant
fittings

Galvanised surface

Hole and thread size as

required for switch-
Actuator plate mounting fixtures

Parts with rounded,

laser-cut edges

Standard: DIN EN 1088

Select safety switch with the appropriate mounting system

Siemens 3SE5 Siemens 3SE5 Euchner NZ Euchner TZ Pilz PSENslock Euchner CET

Accessory set B010 Accessory set B051 Accessory set B037 Accessory set B031 Accessory set B041 Accessory set B050

HP-S-V3-3SE5-B010 HP-S-V3-3SE5-B051 HP-S-V3-NZ-B037 HP-S-V3-TZ-B031 HP-S-V4-PSENSL-B041 HP-S-V5-CET-B050

Customised mounting systems for safety switches

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl mounting systems for safety switches 167

overview of brühl-hp-s ® mounting systems for sliding doors

Manufacturer Switch Type Item No.

SK HP-S-V3-SK-B053

Bernstein SKC HP-S-V3-SKC-B053

SLK HP-S-V3-SLK-B012

Comitronic-BTI AMX HP-S-V6-AMX-B070

NZ HP-S-V3-NZ-B037

STA HP-S-V3-STA-B014

STP HP-S-V3-STP-B014
Euchner
TP HP-S-V3-TP-B014

TZ HP-S-V3-TZ-B031

CET HP-S-V5-CET-B050

GKN HP-S-V3-GKN-B053
Honeywell
GKS HP-S-V3-GKS-B014

S20 HP-S-V3-S20-B058
Leuze Electronic
L200 HP-S-V3-L200-B014

D4NS HP-S-V3-D4NS-B058
Omron Electronics
D4NL HP-S-V6-D4NL-B072

accessories
PSENslock HP-S-V4-PSENSL-B041

PSENme1 HP-S-V3-PSENME1-B012
Pilz
PSENme2 HP-S-V3-PSENME2-B053

PSENme3 HP-S-V3-PSENME3-B053

Trojan HP-S-V3-440K-T-B053
Rockwell Automation
TLS HP-S-V6-TLS-B072

AZ15 HP-S-V3-AZ15-B053

AZ16 HP-S-V3-AZ16-B053

AZM161 HP-S-V3-AZM161-B039
Schmersal
Safe solutions for your industry AZM170 HP-S-V3-AZM170-B039

BNS16 HP-S-V3-BNS16-B053

BZ16 HP-S-V3-BZ16-B053

XCS-A HP-S-V3-XCS-A-B037

XCS-B HP-S-V3-XCS-B-B037

Schneider Electric XCS-C HP-S-V3-XCS-C-B037

XCS-E HP-S-V3-XCS-E-B031

XCS-TE HP-S-V3-XCS-TE-B031

i10 HP-S-V3-I10-B014

i12 HP-S-V3-I12-B058
Sick
i16 HP-S-V3-I16-B053

i17 HP-S-V3-I17-B053

3SE5 HP-S-V3-3SE5-B010
Siemens
3SE5 HP-S-V3-3SE5-B051

example for item number system Abbreviations for mounting situations:

Mounting system group-Mounting situation-Variant-Switch type-Order number HP-S-V3-3SE5-B010 S = Sliding door

C Bolts for mounting the safety switch are not included.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
168  brühl mounting systems for safety switches

Locking systems Brühl-RI®  

Locking system Brühl-RI ® Hinged door FTR

Tamper-resistant fittings

Latch strike Galvanised surface

Latch return spring

Mechanical stop Latch assembly

Robust rod as barrel bolt

Standard: DIN EN 1088

Select safety switch with the appropriate mounting system

Pilz PSENme1 Schmersal AZM161 Schmersal AZ16 Euchner NZ Euchner TP

Accessory set B016 Accessory set B022 Accessory set B021 Accessory set B054 Accessory set B017

RI-F-V1-PSENME1-B016 RI-F-V5-AZM161-B022 RI-F-V5-AZ16-B021 RI-F-V1-NZ-B054 RI-F-V1-TP-B017

Customised mounting systems for safety switches

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl mounting systems for safety switches 169

overview of brühl-ri ® mounting systems for hinged doors

Manufacturer Switch Type Item No.

SK RI-F-V5-SK-B021

SKC RI-F-V5-SKC-B021
Bernstein
SLK RI-F-V1-SLK-B016

TZK RI-F-V5-TZK-B057

NZ RI-F-V1-NZ-B054

STA RI-F-V1-STA-B017

Euchner STP RI-F-V1-STP-B017

TP RI-F-V1-TP-B017

TZ RI-F-V1-TZ-B018

GKS RI-F-V1-GKS-B017
Honeywell
GKN RI-F-V5-GKN-B021

Leuze Electronic L200 RI-F-V1-L200-B017

PSENme1 RI-F-V1-PSENME1-B016

Pilz PSENme2 RI-F-V5-PSENME2-B021

PSENME3 RI-F-V5-PSENME3-B021

Cadet RI-F-V1-440K-C-B054

accessories
Rockwell Automation Cadet RI-F-V5-440K-C-B021

Trojan RI-F-V5-440K-T-B021

AZ15 RI-F-V5-AZ15-B021

AZ16 RI-F-V5-AZ16-B021

AZM161 RI-F-V5-AZM161-B022
Schmersal
Safe solutions for your industry AZM190 RI-F-V5-AZM190-B057

BNS16 RI-F-V5-BNS16-B021

BZ16 RI-F-V5-BZ16-B021

Schneider Electric XCS-E RI-F-V1-XCS-E-B018

i10 RI-F-V1-I10-B017

Sick i16 RI-F-V5-I16-B021

i17 RI-F-V5-I17-B021

Siemens 3SE5 RI-F-V1-3SE5-B015

example for item number system Abbreviations for mounting situations:

Mounting system group-Mounting situation-Variant-Switch type-Order number RI-F-V1-3SE5-B015 F = Hinged door

C Bolts for mounting the safety switch are not included.

Brühl locking system with Euchner TZ safety switch

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
170  brühl mounting systems for safety switches

Locking system mounting fixtures BRÜHL-RI®  

Locking system mounting fixtures Brühl-RI ® Hinged door FTR

Mechanical stop

Hole and thread size as

Tamper-resistant
required for switch-
fittings
mounting fixtures

Parts with
rounded, laser-
cut edges Galvanised surface

Standard: DIN EN 1088

Select safety switch with the appropriate mounting system

Euchner TX Pilz PSENme1 Fortress AMS1STOP Dold STS Fortress DM2 Pilz PSENsgate

Accessory set B020 Accessory set B032 Accessory set B019 Accessory set B063 Accessory set B033 Accessory set B064

RI-F-V3-TX-B020 RI-F-V3-PSENME1-B032 RI-F-V2-AMS1STOP-B019 RI-F-V4-STS3-B063 RI-F-V4-DM2-B033 RI-F-V6-PSENSG-B064

Customised mounting systems for safety switches

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl mounting systems for safety switches 171

overview of brühl-ri ® mounting systems fixtures for hinged doors

Manufacturer Switch Type Item No.

DOLD STS RI-F-V4-STS3-B063

GP RI-F-V3-GP-B020

NZ RI-F-V3-NZ-B020

SGP RI-F-V3-SGP-B020

STA RI-F-V3-STA-B020
Euchner
STP RI-F-V3-STP-B020

TP RI-F-V3-TP-B020

TX RI-F-V3-TX-B020

TZ RI-F-V3-TZ-B020

AMA1STOP RI-F-V2-AMA1STOP-B019

AMS1STOP RI-F-V2-AMS1STOP-B019
Fortress Interlocks
DM1 RI-F-V4-DM1-B033

DM2 RI-F-V4-DM2-B033

PSENcode RI-F-V3-PSENCS-B032

Pilz PSENme1 RI-F-V3-PSENME1-B032

PSENsgate RI-F-V6-PSENSG-B064

accessories
XCS-A RI-F-V2-XCS-A-B066

XCS-B RI-F-V2-XCS-B-B066
Schneider Electric
XCS-C RI-F-V2-XCS-C-B066

XCS-E RI-F-V2-XCS-E-B066

example for item number system Abbreviations for mounting situations:

Mounting system group-Mounting situation-Variant-Switch type-Order number RI-F-V3-NZ-B020 F = Hinged door

C Bolts for mounting the safety switch are not included.

Brühl mounting system with Fortress DM2 Brühl mounting system with Fortress AMS1Stop

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
172  brühl mounting systems for safety switches

Trip cam assemblies for hinged doors

BRÜHL-SN-F

Trip cam assembly BRÜHL-SN-F Hinged door with mounting fixtures for SN-F
Trip cam
Hole and thread size
as required for switch-
mounting fixtures

Parts with
rounded,
laser-cut
edges

Switch plate

Galvanised surface

Standard: DIN EN 1088

Select safety switch with the appropriate mounting system

Siemens 3SE5 (2 x) Schmersal 335 (2 x) Sick i110P (2 x) Euchner NZ (2 x)

Accessory set B034 Accessory set B034 Accessory set B034 Accessory set B034

SN-F-V1-3SE5-B034 SN-F-V1-335-B034 SN-F-V1--I110P-B034 SN-F-V1-NZ-B034

Customised mounting systems for safety switches

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl mounting systems for safety switches 173

overview of brühl-sn-f mounting systems for hinged doors

Manufacturer Switch Type Item No.

Bernstein ENK SN-F-V1-ENK-B034

Euchner NZ SN-F-V1-NZ-B034

Rockwell Automation 440P SN-F-V1-440P-B034

332 SN-F-V1-332-B034

Schmersal 335 SN-F-V1-335-B034

Safe solutions for your industry
336 SN-F-V1-336-B034

Sick i110P SN-F-V1-I110P-B034

Siemens 3SE5 SN-F-V1-3SE5-B034

example for item number system Abbreviations for mounting situations:

Mounting system group-Mounting situation-Variant-Switch type-Order number SN-F-V1-3SE5-B034 F = Hinged door

C Bolts for mounting the safety switch are not included.

accessories
Didn’t find your safety switch here?

We are continually developing new mounting

systems for our customers! For a current list of
available mounting systems, please see the
safety switch database on our website at
www.schutzeinrichtungen.com

Door with SN-F mounting system Roller plunger switch

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
174  brühl mounting systems for safety switches

Trip cam assemblies for sliding doors

BRÜHL-SN-S

Trip cam assembly Brühl-SN-S Sliding door STG / STS

Hole and thread size as
Parts with required for switch-
rounded, laser- mounting fixtures
cut edges
Mounting plate

Trip cam track

Tamper-resistant
fittings

Powder-coated
finish in the same
colour as the door

Standard: DIN EN 1088

Select safety switch with the appropriate mounting system

Siemens 3SE5 (2 x) Schmersal 335 (2 x) Sick i110R (2 x) Euchner NZ (2 x)

Accessory set B023 Accessory set B023 Accessory set B023 Accessory set B023

SN-S-V1-3SE5-B023 SN-S-V1-335-B023 SN-S-V1-I110R-B023 SN-S-V1-NZ-B023

Customised mounting systems for safety switches

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl mounting systems for safety switches 175

overview of brühl-sn-s mounting systems for sliding doors

Manufacturer Switch Type Item No.

Bernstein ENK SN-S-V1-ENK-B023

Euchner NZ SN-S-V1-NZ-B023

Rockwell Automation 440P SN-S-V1-440P-B023

332 SN-S-V1-332-B023

Schmersal 335 SN-S-V1-335-B023

Safe solutions for your industry
336 SN-S-V1-336-B023

Sick i110R SN-S-V1-I110R-B023

Siemens 3SE5 SN-S-V1-3SE5-B023

example for item number system Abbreviations for mounting situations:

Mounting system group-Mounting situation-Variant-Switch type-Order number SN-S-V1-3SE5-B023 S = Sliding door

C Bolts for mounting the safety switch are not included.

accessories
Didn’t find your safety switch here?

We are continually developing new mounting

systems for our customers! For a current list of
available mounting systems, please see the
safety switch database on our website at
www.schutzeinrichtungen.com

Door with SN-S mounting system Roller lever switch

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
176  brühl mounting systems for safety switches

Safety switch mounting fixtures Brühl-SV

Adaptations must be made to door leaves and posts Hinged door FTR

Doors are adapted with the appropriate holes and

components for the mounting of safety switches

Schmersal AZM161-STS30-05 Schmersal AZM161-STS30-06 Schmersal AZM415-STS30-05 Schmersal AZM415-STS30-06 Schmersal TV8S-521

Door adaptations for Door adaptations for Door adaptations for Door adaptations for Door adaptations for
Schmersal AZM161-STS30-05 Schmersal AZM161-STS30-06 Schmersal AZM415-STS30-05 Schmersal AZM415-STS30-06 Schmersal TV8S-521

SV-F-V1-AMZ161-STS30-05 SV-F-V1-AZM161-STS30-06 SV-F-V1-AZM415-STS30-05 SV-F-V1-AZM415-STS30-06 SV-F-V3-TV8S-521

Customised mounting systems for safety switches

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl mounting systems for safety switches 177

overview of brühl-sv mounting systems for hinged doors

Manufacturer Switch Type Item No.

Bernstein MAK SV-F-V5-MAK-B077

CES SV-F-V5-CES-B077
Euchner
CMS SV-F-V5-CMS-B077
Jokab safety Eden SV-F-V5-EDEN-B077
Leuze Electronic MC3 SV-F-V5-MC3-B077
Omron Electronics F3S-TGR SV-F-V5-F3S-TGR-B077
PSENcode SV-F-V5-PSENCS-B077
Pilz
PSENmag SV-F-V5-PSENMA-B077
440N-S SV-F-V5-440N-S-B077
Rockwell Automation
440N-Z SV-F-V5-440N-Z-B077
SV-F-V1-AZM161-STS30-01
SV-F-V1-AZM161-STS30-02
SV-F-V1-AZM161-STS30-03
SV-F-V1-AZM161-STS30-04
AZM161-STS30
SV-F-V1-AZM161-STS30-05
SV-F-V1-AZM161-STS30-06
SV-F-V1-AZM161-STS30-07
SV-F-V1-AZM161-STS30-08

accessories
SV-F-V1-AZM415-STS30-01
Schmersal SV-F-V1-AZM415-STS30-02
Safe solutions for your industry
SV-F-V1-AZM415-STS30-03
SV-F-V1-AZM415-STS30-04
AZM415-STS30
SV-F-V1-AZM415-STS30-05
SV-F-V1-AZM415-STS30-06
SV-F-V1-AZM415-STS30-07
SV-F-V1-AZM415-STS30-08
BNS250 SV-F-V5-BNS250-B077
BNS260 SV-F-V5-BNS260-B077
TV8S-521 SV-F-V3-TV8S-521

overview of brühl-sv für mounting systems for inward-opening hinged doors

Manufacturer Switch Type Item No.

Bernstein MAK SV-FEO-V5-MAK-B077

CES SV-FEO-V5-CES-B077
Euchner
CMS SV-FEO-V5-CMS-B077
Jokab Safety Eden SV-FEO-V5-EDEN-B077
Leuze Electronic MC3 SV-FEO-V5-MC3-B077
Omron Electronics F3S-TGR SV-FEO-V5-F3S-TGR-B077
PSENcode SV-FEO-V5-PSENCS-B077
Pilz
PSENmag SV-FEO-V5-PSENMA-B077
440N-S SV-FEO-V5-440N-S-B077
Rockwell Automation
440N-Z SV-FEO-V5-440N-Z-B077
BNS250 SV-FEO-V5-BNS250-B077
Schmersal
Safe solutions for your industry BNS260 SV-FEO-V5-BNS260-B077

Abbreviations for mounting situations:

example for item number system
FEO = Hinged door, inward opening
Mounting system group-Mounting situation-Variant-Switch type-Order number SV-F-V5-BNS250-B077
F = Hinged door
C Bolts for mounting the safety switch are not included.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
178  brühl mounting systems for safety switches

Bar latch systems Brühl-UER®  

Bar latch system Brühl-UER ® Double-leaf hinged door DFTR

Latch with ball knob

and centring pin

Galvanised surface

Hole and thread

size as required for
switch-mounting
fixtures

Parts with rounded,

laser-cut edges

Standard: DIN EN 1088

Select safety switch with the appropriate mounting system

A Please note mounting situation left/right

Schmersal MZM100 Schmersal MZM100 Pilz PSENslock Pilz PSENslock Euchner TZ Euchner TZ

Accessory set B073 Accessory set B073 Accessory set B073 Accessory set B073 Accessory set B025 Accessory set B028

UER-FL-V2-MZM100-B073 UER-FR-V2-MZM100-B073 UER-FL-V2-PSENSL-B073 UER-FR-V2-PSENSL-B073 UER-FL-V1-TZ-B025 UER-FR-V1-TZ-B028

Customised mounting systems for safety switches

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl mounting systems for safety switches 179

overview of brühl-uer ® mounting systems for hinged doors

Manufacturer Switch Type Item No.

TZ UER-FL-V1-TZ-B025
Euchner
TZ UER-FR-V1-TZ-B028

PSENslock UER-FL-V2-PSENSL-B073
Pilz
PSENslock UER-FR-V2-PSENSL-B073

MZM100 UER-FL-V2-MZM100-B073
Schmersal
Safe solutions for your industry MZM100 UER-FR-V2-MZM100-B073

example for item number system Abbreviations for mounting situations:

Mounting system group-Mounting situation-Variant-Switch type-Order number UER-FL-V1-TZ-B025 FL = Hinged door DIN left (left-handed doors)
FR = Hinged door DIN right (right-handed doors)

C Bolts for mounting the safety switch are not included.

accessories
Didn’t find your safety switch here?

We are continually developing new mounting

systems for our customers! For a current list of
available mounting systems, please see the
safety switch database on our website at
www.schutzeinrichtungen.com

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
180  brühl machine guard doors and gates

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl machine guard doors and gates 181

machine guard lift gates

BRÜHL Machine guard doors
and gates
In accordance with the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EG, DIN EN ISO 12100,
DIN EN 12453 and DIN EN 12604

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
182  machine guard lift gates
Machine guard lift gates and lift panels
Owing to the large variety of applications, Hans Georg Brühl
GmbH has developed a wide range of machine guard lift gates.
Depending on the specific construction type, widths of up to 15 m
and heights of up to 7 m can be produced. Safety is always the top
priority. Standard safety features for the machine guard lift gates
Product advantages and features of all models at-a-glance:
→ Sturdy, self-supporting construction
→ Accurate movement due to adjustable speed with
f­ requency-controlled drives.
→ High precision movement into the start and end positions
in combination with the Brühl Door Controller II.
B See page 202.
→ Extensive safety features: Safety edge, electro-mechanical
system for monitoring load-bearing components and mul-
tiple, independent load-bearing components as anti-drop
­safeguard.
→ Available with optional pneumatic and hydraulic drives.
Machine guard lift gate in use with a press
www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
include an electro-mechanical system for monitoring load-bear-
ing components, a safety edge mounted to the closing edge and
multiple, independent load-bearing components as an anti-drop
safeguard (in accordance with DIN EN 12604, Annex B). These
products also come with complete documentation.
→ Various windows can be integrated into the panels with
special clamping strips.
→ Model MSHT is available as a multiple-leaf door (optional).
→ Moving/door travel also available for offset posts in
non-standard positions.
→ Machine guard lift gates can be integrated into all safety
fence systems – we provide everything you need.
→ Safety switches available from any manufacturer.
→ Mechanical and non-contact safety switches are available.
→ Secure and enclosed counterbalance mechanism inside
frame; tamper-proof.
Brühl Service
→ Test log book including maintenance schedules
→ Spare parts lists
→ Declaration of Conformity and Incorporation
Series of machine guard lift gates in use with a conveyor system
 machine guard lift gates 183

technical specifications for machine guard lift gates

C Custom designed units available upon request.

Product Group / Model BRÜHL-MSHT® BRÜHL-MSHTE®

Installation
•

Portal (self-supporting) Post ● ●

In Machine Openings ● ●

Dimensions

Max. Clear Width 15000 mm 8000 mm

Max. Installation Height 7000 mm 7000 mm

Operation

Electric ● ●
Motor Mounting Position left side / right side / centre left side / right side

Infill Materials

Flex II ● ●
Woven Mesh 40 ● ●
Sheet Metal 1.5 mm ● ●
Polycarbonatee 5 mm ● ●
Woven Mesh 25 ● ●
Welded Mesh 40 ● ●
Perforated Plate, Round Holes, RV 5–8 ● ●
● ●

machine guard lift gates

Perforated Plate, Square Holes, Qg 8–12

Visual Protection Bronze ● ●

Visual Protection Green ● ●
Laminated Safety Glass 2x3 mm ● ●
Laminated Safety Glass with Sound Insulation 2x4 mm ● ●

Controller/Control

Controller II ● ●

Safety Devices

Safety Edge that Triggers Reverse Function ● ●

●  Combination is possible.  ­­—  Combination is not possible.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
184  machine guard lift gates

infill materials
Machine guard lift gate 1 2 3

The machine guard lift gate is opened and closed by means of a motor. It has a sturdy
steel construction with enclosed counterbalance. The lift gate is equipped with adjustable
channels and mounting arrangements for position switches. Safety features include an
electro-mechanical system for monitoring load-bearing components, a safety edge mounted 4 5 6
to the closing edge and multiple, independent load-bearing components as an anti-drop
P
safeguard.
Product Group / Model: MSHT

machine side 7 8 9

Ins 10 11 12
tal
lat
ion VSG SSG
wi
dth
Installation height

1 Flex  2 Woven Mesh 40  3 Sheet Metal  4 Polycarbonatee  

5 Woven Mesh 25  6 Welded Mesh 40  7 Perforated Plate, Round Holes, RV 5–8 
8 Perforated Plate, Square Holes, Qg 8–12  9 Visual Protection Bronze 
10 Visual Protection Green  11 Laminated Safety Glass  
12 Laminated Safety Glass with Sound Insulation

product information
In
st
al
la
ti
o
n

C Available with clear width of 0.6 to 15 m.

d
ep
th

C Available with installation height of 2 to 7 m.

Gr
ou
nd
Panel height

cle
C

ara
le

Fence height
ar

nc
w

e
id
th

outside

Machine guard lift gate in use with a conveyor system Machine guard lift gate in use with a material output station

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 machine guard lift gates 185

product variant safety devices

1 2
Machine guard lift gate, double-leaf

3
machine side

machine guard lift gates

1 Multiple load-bearing components  
2 Securely enclosed counterbalance inside frame 
3 Monitoring system for load-bearing components 
4 Safety edge for triggering reverse function

outside

Optical safety edges

Double-leaf motor-operated machine guard lift gate as solution for limited installation heights

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
186  machine guard lift gates

infill materials
Machine guard lift gate, single track 1 2 3

The machine guard lift gate is opened and closed by means of a motor. It has a sturdy steel
construction with enclosed counterbalance. The lift gate is equipped with adjustable chan-
nels and mounting arrangements for position switches. Safety features include an electro-
mechanical system for monitoring load-bearing components, a safety edge mounted to the 4 5 6
closing edge and multiple, independent load-bearing components as an anti-drop safeguard.
P
Product Group / Model: MSHTE

machine side 7 8 9
d tio al-
la st
ep n
In

th

Ins
tal
lat
ion
wi
dt
h 10 11 12

VSG SSG
Installation height

1 Flex  2 Woven Mesh 40  3 Sheet Metal  4 Polycarbonatee  

5 Woven Mesh 25   6 Welded Mesh 40  7 Perforated Plate, Round Holes, RV 5–8 
8 Perforated Plate, Square Holes, Qg 8–12  9 Visual Protection Bronze 
10 Visual Protection Green  11 Laminated Safety Glass  
12 Laminated Safety Glass with Sound Insulation

product information
C Available with clear width of 0.6 to 8 m.
C Available with installation height of 2 to 7 m.
Panel height

Gr
Fence height

ou
nd
cle
ara
nc
C
le

e
ar

outside
w
id
th

Conveyor system with single-track machine guard lift gates

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 machine guard lift gates 187

product variant guide assembly

Available with additional guide channel (optional)
Machine guard lift gate, single track with angular leaf line

machine side
window assembly
Special RP profile with an EPDM clamping strip absorbs vibrations

B See window clamping frame page 155.

drive variants
Also available with pneumatic drive unit

machine guard lift gates

outside

Single-track machine guard lift gate at a material output station

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
188  brühl machine guard rolling doors
Machine guard rolling doors
Machine guard rolling doors are guards that open vertically.
These power-operated doors are opened and closed by a motor
drive, which winds and unwinds the plastic curtain or rolling door
slats around a barrel. Machine guard rolling doors are available
with various curtain materials, e.g. with fabric or semi-transpar-
ent visual protection membrane as well as with profiled steel or
aluminium slats. The design of the individual curtain sections and
the dimensions can always be customized to your application. In
Product advantages and features of all models at-a-glance:
→ Sturdy, self-supporting portal construction
→ Accurate movement due to adjustable speed within the indi-
vidual sections
→ High precision movement into the start and end positions in
combination with the Brühl Door Controller II. B See page 202.
→ Non-contact safety switches in accordance with DIN EN 954-1
up to Cat. 4/DIN EN 61508 SIL 3.
→ Rolling door drive with electronic position monitoring can be
programmed through the control system (no microswitch).
→ Cable guides are integrated in the machine guard rolling door
construction.
Brake gear motor with cable guides inside portal construction
www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
comparison with machine guard lift gates, the machine guard roll-
ing doors have more compact dimensions and a smaller installa-
tion height. They are operated by a rolling door drive with built-in
safety brake and electronic position monitoring. Safety devices
such as safety edges for triggering reverse function and light bar-
riers/grids that prevent hands from being trapped in the door help
to make these rolling doors extremely safe.
→ Curtain colours can be selected and combined based on your
requirements. B See page 139.
→ Division into 2 to 4 curtain sections available
→ Horizontal aluminium bars for stabilising curtains
→ Sound-insulation and visual-protection curtains available.
B See page 139.
→ Aluminium slats available with optional PVC inspection window.
→ As module units, machine guard rolling doors can be integrated
in all safety fence system by Brühl – we supply you with every-
thing you need.
Brühl Service
→ Test log book including maintenance schedules
→ Spare parts lists
→ Declaration of Conformity and Incorporation
Rugged self-supporting portal construction as viewed from the machine-side
 brühl machine guard rolling doors 189

technical specifications for machine guard rolling doors

Product Group / Model MSRT ® I MSRT ® II MSRT ® III

Dimensions

Max. Clear Width 3500 mm 3500 mm 5500 mm

Max. Clear Height 3500 mm 3500 mm 5000 mm

Gearhead Motor

Safety Device IP 54 IP 54 IP 54

Average opening and closing speed

PVC curtain 0.33 m/s ­— 0.33 m/s

Slat curtain — 0.18 m/s 0.18 m/s

Curtain materials

Fabric Curtain, approx. 1 mm ● — ●

Fabric Curtain, approx. 2 mm ● — ●
PVC Curtain, UV Resistant, approx. 1.5 mm* ● — ●
PVC Curtain, UV Resistant, approx. 2 mm* — — ●
Welding Protection Curtain in Accordance with DIN EN 1598, approx. 0.5 mm* ● — ●
Aluminium Slats without Viewing Windows — ● ●
Steel Slats without Viewing Windows — ● ●
Aluminium Slats with Viewing Windows 150x50 and PVC glass — ● ●
Controller/Control

machine guard lift gates

Controlled by frequency converter ● ● ●
Supply voltage 230 V 230 V / 400 V 230 V / 400 V

Safety Devices

Safety Edge that Triggers Reverse Function ● ● ●

Non-contact Switch in Accordance with DIN EN 954 to Cat. 4/DIN EN 61508 SIL 3 1 or 2 ** 1 2
Safety Brake with Drive ● ● ●
Light Grid as Entrapment Protection for Clear Height < 2500 mm ○ ○ ○
Emergency Release, manually-operated (hand crank) ● ● ●
Curtain Colours ***

Blue RAL 5010 ● — ●

Grey RAL 7038 ● — ●
Yellow RAL 1023 ● — ●
Red RAL 3000 ● — ●
Orange RAL 2004 ● — ●
Sound Insulation Curtain Colours

White RAL 9010 ● — ●

Grey RAL 7035 ● — ●
Blue RAL 5010 ● — ●

* Window section framed to the left and right by an approx. 225 mm section of opaque base material. ●  Combination is possible.   ○  Combination is possible as option.  —  Combination is not possible.
** For clear width > 1500 mm, use 2 safety switches.
*** Colours may vary depending on the manufacturer.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
190  brühl machine guard rolling doors

product view
Machine guard rolling door I 1

The Brühl machine guard rolling door MSRT® I consists of a sturdy, self-supporting portal
construction with a precision steel pipe as winding shaft and uses an electric drive with a
protection rating of IP 54. This door comes with a PVC curtain, which can also be combined
with transparent elements for improved view of the process. As a safety feature, there is a
safety edge on the closing edge that triggers the reverse function.
Product Group / Model: MSRT1  

C The illustration shows a machine guard rolling door with a plastic curtain and transparent elements.

machine side

l-
ta
Ins on
i
lat th
p
de
Installation height

2 3

Se
cti
on
1

Se
cti
on
2

1 Machine guard rolling door MSRT1 with two sections and transparent element
Se 2 Arrangement for position monitoring
cti
on 3 Rolling door drive with mounting fixtures for motor
3
product information
C
le
a
r
w
id
th

Se
C Available with clear width of 0.8 to 3 m.
cti C Available with clear height of 2.5 to 3.5 m.
on
4
outside
C Motor can be rotated at 90°-angle steps.
C Motor can be mounted on the left or right side.

Machine guard rolling doors within a conveyor system

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl machine guard rolling doors 191

slats
Machine guard rolling door II Aluminium slats without windows for visual protection

The Brühl machine guard rolling door MSRT® II consists of a sturdy, self-supporting portal
construction with a precision steel pipe as winding shaft and uses an electric drive with a
protection rating of IP 54. As a safety feature, there is a safety edge on the closing edge that
triggers the reverse function.
Product Group / Model: MSRT2   C The illustration shows a machine guard rolling door with aluminium slats.

machine side
Aluminium slats with windows for visual protection
Ins
tal
lat
ion
wi l-
dt ta
h Ins on
t i
la th
p
de
Installation height

Steel slats without windows for visual protection

machine guard lift gates

product information
C
le
a
r
w

C Available with clear width of 0.8 to 3.5 m.

id
th

outside
C Available with clear height of 2.5 to 3.5 m.
C Motor can be rotated at 90°-angle steps.
C Motor can be mounted on the left or right side.

Machine guard rolling door with Aluminium slats

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
192  brühl machine guard rolling doors

aluminium slats
Machine guard rolling door III Aluminium slats without windows for visual protection

The Brühl machine guard rolling door MSRT® III consists of a sturdy, self-supporting portal
construction with a precision steel pipe as winding shaft and uses an electric drive with
a protection rating of IP 54. This door can be ordered with slats or with various curtain
materials. As a safety feature, there is a safety edge on the closing edge that triggers the
reverse function.
Product Group / Model: MSRT3

machine side

Aluminium slats with windows for visual protection

l-
ta
Ins on
i
lat th
p
de
Steel slats without windows for visual protection
Installation height

Se
cti
on
1 product information
C Available with clear width of 3.5 to 5.5 m.
Se C Available with clear height of 3.5 to 5 m.
cti
on C Available with curtain or slats.
2

Se
cti
on
3
C
le
a
r
w
id
th

Se
cti
on
4

outside

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl machine guard rolling doors 193

curtain materials for machine guard rolling doors I-III

Curtain colours Semi-transparent PVC curtains Sound insulation curtain colours

colour ral name colour name colour ral name

RAL 5010 Gentian blue Transparent RAL 9010 Pure white

RAL 7038 Agate grey Red RAL 7035 Light grey

RAL 1023 Traffic yellow Green RAL 5010 Gentian blue

Welding protection membrane 

RAL 3000 Fire red C Available upon request.
colour name

RAL 2004 Pure orange Welding protection membrane

safety devices for machine guard rolling doors i–iii

1 2 3

machine guard lift gates

4 5 1 Photoelectric barrier as entrapment protection < 2500 mm
2 Safety edge that triggers reverse function
3 Safety brake in drive unit
4 Emergency release, manually operated
5 Non-contact switch

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
194  machine guard sliding doors
Machine guard sliding doors
Machine guard sliding doors with motor drive units can be used in
places where there is a high frequency of staff/employees (load-
Product advantages and features of all models at-a-glance:
→ Sturdy, self-supporting portal construction
→ Built-in/built-on constructions for machine openings available
based on the structural requirements of our customers
→ Available with pneumatic drive (optional).
→ Every leaf can be power-operated
→ Mounting plates and channels for safety switches
are adjustable.
→ Horizontal movement of the leaves, one-sided (Model MSST)
and bi-parting (Model MSDST) for optimal adaption to the
respective application.
→ Number of leaves: available with 1 to 4 leaves.
→ Accurate movement due to adjustable speed with frequency
conversion control.
Machine guard sliding door with top-mounted drive for safeguarding an unload station in a conveying system
www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
ing/unloading, permanent access), where there is a high degree
of automation and where visual and noise protection is required.
→ High precision movement into the start and end positions
in combination with the Brühl Door Controller II.
B See page 202.
→ Safety edge as safety device for closing edge.
→ Combinable with infill material with sound insulation.
→ Various panes with clamping strips can be integrated into the
leaves with special clamping profiles.
→ These door units come with test log book and spare parts lists,
as well as the Declaration of Conformity and Declaration of
Incorporation.
→ Machine guard sliding doors can be integrated as modules
into all Brühl safety fence systems – we supply you with
everything you need.
 machine guard sliding doors 195

technical specifications for machine guard sliding doors

Item no. MSST MSDST MSSTF

Dimensions

Max. Clear Width 4000 mm 4000 mm 3000 mm

Max. Clear Height 4000 mm 4000 mm 2600 mm

Infill Materials

Flex II ● ● ●
Woven Mesh 40 ● ● ●
Sheet Metal 1.5 ● ● ●
Polycarbonatee 5 mm ● ● ●
Woven Mesh 25 ● ● ●
Welded Mesh 40 ● ● ●
Perforated Plate, Round Holes, RV 5-8 ● ● ●
Perforated Plate, Square Holes, Qg 8–12 ● ● ●
Visual Protection Bronze ● ● ●
Visual Protection Green ● ● ●
Laminated Safety Glass 2x3 mm ● ● ●
Laminated Safety Glass with Sound Insulation 2x4 mm ● ● ●

Safety Devices

Safety Edge that Triggers Reverse Function ● ● ○

● ● ●

machine guard lift gates

Controller/Control TCT-2

Mounting Arrangements for Limit Switch Plates ● ● ●

●  Combination is possible.   ○  Combination is possible as option.

Brühl Service
→ Test log book including maintenance schedules
→ Spare parts lists
→ Declaration of Conformity and Incorporation

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
196  machine guard sliding doors

drive unit
Machine guard sliding door Electric drive unit

Machine guard sliding door with top-mounted drive opening to the right or left side. The slid-
ing door is available with motor or pneumatic drive. Each leaf is driven separately. The doors
are equipped with adjustable mounting plates and channels for position switches. Safety
features include a safety edge on the closing edge.
Product Group / Model: MSST

Optional pneumatic drive unit available upon request

machine side

Ins
tal
lat
ion -
wi tal product variant
dt Insion
h t
la pth
Installation height

de Double-leaf sliding door, opening to one side

Clear height

Gr
ou
nd
outside cle
ara
C

nc
le
a

e
r
w
id
th

product information
Machine side
C Available with clear width of 0.8 to 4 m.
C Available with clear height of 2 to 4 m.
C Machine guard sliding doors available with 1 or 2 leaves.
Outside B For infill materials, see page 195.

Machine guard sliding door used for the output station of a conveyor system

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 machine guard sliding doors 197

safety features
Machine guard double sliding door 1 2

Machine guard double sliding door with top-mounted drive opening to the right or left side.
The sliding door is available with motor or pneumatic drive. Each leaf is driven separately. The
doors are equipped with adjustable mounting plates and channels for position switches. Safety
features include two safety edges on the closing edge.
Product Group / Model: MSDST

machine side 1 Safety edges that trigger reverse function  2 Optical safety edge

Ins product variant

tal
lat 4-leaf sliding door, bi-parting
ion
-
wi
dt tal
h Insion
Installation height

t
la pth
de

Clear height

Gr
ou
nd
cle
C

ara
le

nc
a
r

e
w

outside
id
th

machine guard lift gates

product information
Machine side
C Available with clear width of 0.8 to 4 m.
C Available with clear height of 2 to 4 m.
C Machine guard sliding doors available with 2 or 4 leaves.
Outside B For infill materials, see page 195.

Machine guard sliding door used for a chip protection cabin

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
198  machine guard sliding doors

guide assembly
Cantilever machine guard Cantilever assembly with ball rail and carriage
for heavy-duty doors and gates with drive unit.

sliding door
Alternatively our cantilever sliding doors can be equipped with a power drive. Cantilever slid-
ing doors with drive units are often used for highly automated processes within a plant. The
cantilever doors are opened and closed reliably by a gear motor with drive chain, in combi-
nation with a precise ball channel and special carriage. Safety features include a safety edge
on the closing edge that triggers the reverse function.
Product Group / Model: MSSTF

product information
C Available with clear width of 0.8 to 3 m.
outside C Available with clear height of 1.4 to 2.6 m.
B For infill materials, see page 195.

machine side

Cantilever machine guard sliding door with Polycarbonatee as infill material

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 machine guard sliding doors 199

High quality brake gear motor

machine guard lift gates

Height adjustment

Sturdy, bolted guide assembly Cantilever machine guard sliding door as part of automated system

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
200  brühl control systems

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl control systems 201

machine guard lift gates

BRÜHL Control systems

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
202  brühl control systems

Control systems
BRÜHL Gate Controller II
Frequency converter control system for: lift gates, sliding doors, rolling doors and customised door systems

Product Group / Model: TCT-2

Control cabinet size: 400 x 500 x 200 mm

The Brühl Gate Controller II is a microprocessor-based control

system designed in accordance with the high standards of EN data sheet tct ®  ii
61508. The main control features are the universal configuration,
the modularity and the program structure, which allow for custom- Item no. TCT-2
ised functionality. The controller offers extensive functions, which
Power Supply  (via earthed mains, unearthed mains only possible with additional transformer)
are easy to program through the segment display in connection
with a rotary switch. The user interface is always the same, which Supply voltage 1 x 230 V ±10 %
guarantees the simplest commissioning and programming. The Supply frequency 50/60 Hz ±10 %
frequency converter offers the following functions: Fuses 16 A
Additional earthing connection 4 mm² Cu
Soft start, soft stop, separately adjustable start speed, sep- Output to Motor
arately adjustable stop speed, adjustable creep speed for
Rated output 0.75 kW
installation and operation.
Max. phase current 5A
Output voltage 3 x 0 … 230 V
The standard control systems are equipped with two additional
Rotating field frequency 10 … 200 Hz
output relays, which can be freely configured with a wide range of
Max. length of motor cable 30 m*
available functions. This makes it easy, for example, to integrate
Ramp time for slow start 0.5 s / 1 s / 2 s
position control. Both conventional and inductive limit switches
can be connected to the control system. *  for digital limit switch, max. cable length 5 m

Control Circuits
→ Good running behaviour thanks to adjustable speeds.
→ Precise movement into start and end positions. Control voltage 24 V (DC)
→ Drive unit with electronic position sensor can be programmed Control current 10 mA
via the control system (no microswitch). Wiring of the input terminals Only use floating contacts
→ Optional: mounting arrangements for Harting connectors. Power Supply for External Devices
→ Optional: additional circuit board with four supplementary
Supply voltage 24 V (DC)
signal relays.
Max. current consumption 150 mA
B  See gate control components on page 204.
Relays
Output mode Floating changeover contacts
Max. switching current 1 A resistive load

Environmental Conditions
Humidity range max. 95 % (non-condensing)
Temperature range -10 ... +50 °C
Mounting Mount vertically on vibration-free site
Electrical life cycle 500,000 switching cycles
In compliance with the standards DIN EN 12453 and DIN EN 61508

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl control systems 203

Control system accessories

Additional circuit board
packing unit
product description item no.
(pcs.)

Additional circuit board optional for TCT ® II with four supplementary output
relays, built into the control cabinet of the basic control unit for the simple in- 1 ZSP
tegration of further functions such as traffic light control, position control etc.

B See door control components on page 204.

Terminal strip
packing unit
product description item no.
(pcs.)

Terminal strip for the use of own door control system,

1 KLL
with all motors and switch cables labelled.

Control cabinet size: 200 x 400 x 120 mm

Harting bulkhead mounting housing

packing unit
product description item no.
(pcs.)

Harting bulkhead mounting housing Han 6 for motor cables and brake, and
Han10/Han 24 (depending on switch) for all switch cables or: terminal strip 1 HAG
(Item no. KLL).

machine guard lift gates

configuration overview for doors/gates
Type of door/gate, MSRT ®
MSHT ® MSHTE ® MSST MSDST MSSTF
possible control systems: Type I Type II Type III
TCT ® II Upon request ● ● ● ● ●
Possible position queries:
Mech. roller lever (break contact) — ● ● ● ● ●
Inductive approximation (break contact) — ● ● ● ● ●
DLS (digital limit switch in the drive unit) ● ● ● ● ● ●
CLS (cam limit switch in the drive unit) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Possible safety edges and entrapment protection:
Optical safety edge* ● ● ● ● ● ●
Trap protection photoelectric barrier ○ — — — — —
* Without TCT-2 an additional evaluation device is required.

Other possible combinations:

For the prevention of “cable clutter” and for large Either: Harting bulkhead mounting housing Han 6 for motor cables and brake and Han 10 / Han 24 (depending on switch)
distances between door and TCT-2 for all switch cables or: terminal strip (KLL) **

For the use of own door control system Labelled terminal strip (KLL) for all motor and switch cables

For connection to the control system of the entire

Additional safety limit switch for output signal “securely closed”
installation (e.g. via PLC)
For the simple integration of further functions such as traffic
Additional circuit board (ZSP) with 4 supplementary relays with floating changeover contact
light control, position control etc.

** only without DLS   ●  Combination is possible.   ○  Combination is possible as option.  —  Combination is not possible.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
204  brühl control systems

Door control components

tct ® II

Control signal External activation via potential-free Wicket door or swing

NO contacts door in the door leaf
Pulse signal 0.5–1 second

Programmable
24 V DC signal relays, e.g.
for position or
max. 150 mA error messages

4 x  relays
2 x  relays Additional circuit
board ZSP
Supply voltage 230 V / 10 A

Main switch (separating all poles)

Motor with digital limit switch (DLS)

24 V DC

max. 250 mA

Position switch

Motor with CLS position sensor

Safety mat

SEW motor with brake

Safety edge, closing travel Safety edge, opening travel

Low speed switch

Monitoring of load-bearing components Optoelectronic safety device / entrap- For integration in the machine-control system
ment protection for rolling doors with an
intake height of less than 2.5 m

Non-contact safety switch Position switch

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl control systems 205

Control connection position for machine guard lift gate

Door type / Drive / Sensors Brühl Components Customer Components

DLS – Digital limit switch

Position of control devices und terminal strips

with an approx. 1 m radius of the door

Door controller (TCT) Customer control system

Cable length to TCT Variable cable length

DLS on the door, max. 5 m External activation, NO switch,
contacts, pulse signal 0.5-1 s

End customer responsible for

connection of safety switches

CLS – Cam limit switch

Door controller (TCT) Customer control system

Variable cable length

External activation, NO switch,
contacts, pulse signal 0.5-1 s

machine guard lift gates

Variable cable length

CLS
max. 25 m Variable cable length (max. 25 m) Variable cable length

Klemmleiste (KLL) Door controller (TCT) Customer control system

End customer responsible for

External activation, NO switch,
connection of safety switches. contacts, pulse signal 0.5-1 s

Control connection position for conventional position switches

Lift gate with multiple position switches, motor, monitoring of load-bearing
components, safety switches Terminal strip (KLL) Door control system
of customer

Variable cable length

Harting connector
Door control system
of customer

Variable cable length

Variable cable length

End customer responsible for
connection of safety switches.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
206  brühl control systems

Control connection position for machine guard rolling door

Door type / Drive / Sensors Brühl Components Customer Components

DLS – Digital limit switch

Door with DLS on motor, 1 or 2 safety switches and entrapment protection.
Position of control devices und terminal strips
with an approx. 1 m radius of the door

Door controller (TCT) Customer control system

Variable cable length

External activation, NO switch,
contacts, pulse signal 0.5-1 s

DLS Motor cable length

to TCT on the door,
max. 5 m

Door controller (TCT) Customer control system

End customer responsible for
connection of safety switches.

Variable cable length

External activation, NO switch,
contacts, pulse signal 0.5-1 s

CLS – Cam limit switch

Door with CLS on motor, 1 or 2 safety switches and entrapment protection Variable cable length (max. 25 m) Variable cable length

Terminal strip (KLL) Door controller (TCT) Customer control system

External activation, NO switch,

contacts, pulse signal 0.5-1 s

Terminal strip (KLL) Door control system

of customer

CLS Variable cable length

max. 25 m
Variable cable length

Harting connector
End customer responsible for Door control system
connection of safety switches. of customer

Variable cable length

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl control systems 207

Control connection position for machine guard sliding door

Door type / Drive / Sensors Brühl Components Customer Components

DLS – Digital limit switch

Position of control devices und terminal strips

with an approx. 1 m radius of the door

Door controller (TCT) Customer control system

DLS

Motor cable length Variable cable length

to TCT on the door, External activation, NO switch,
max. 5 m contacts, pulse signal 0.5-1 s

End customer responsible for

connection of safety switches.

CLS – Cam limit switch

Door controller (TCT) Customer control system

Variable cable length

External activation, NO switch,
contacts, pulse signal 0.5-1 s
CLS

machine guard lift gates

Variable cable length (max. 25 m) Variable cable length
Variable cable length
max. 25 m Terminal strip (KLL) Door controller (TCT) Customer control system

End customer responsible for External activation, NO switch,

connection of safety switches. contacts, pulse signal 0.5-1 s

Control connection position for conventional position switches

Lift gate with multiple position switches, motor, monitoring of load-bearing
components, safety switches Terminal strip (KLL) Door control system
of customer

Variable cable length

Variable cable length

Harting connector
Door control system
of customer

Variable cable length

End customer responsible for
connection of safety switches.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
208  brühl platform elements

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl platform elements 209

platform elements
BRÜHL Platform elements
Access platforms, bridges and handrails in accordance with safety
standard DIN EN ISO 14122 Parts 1– 4

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
210  brühl platform elements

Access platforms, bridges and handrails

Along with standard safety fence systems, the company Hans Georg Brühl GmbH also manufactures access platforms, bridges and
handrails. This enables us to offer the complete spectrum of safety products for machinery and facilities as a one-stop shop.

Product advantages and features of all models at-a-glance:

→ Platforms are custom designed for each application.
→ Platform support legs are also available with integrated
height-adjustable floor anchors.
→ You can choose from a wide variety of platform floor panels
and coatings, based on your individual production conditions.
→ Handrails can be top-mounted to the floor panels and/or
side-mounted to the outside of the frame.
→ Kick plates, rest platforms and bridges can be custom-­
designed to your specifications in accordance with
DIN EN 14122.
→ Access platforms can be installed in combination with hinged
and sliding doors.
→ Platforms, bridges and handrails are available in all RAL
colours or with a hot-dip galvanised finish. B See page 238.

Access platform with fixed ladder for a specialised machine

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl platform elements 211

Permanent Means of Access to Machinery

Various Means of Access Steps (T) and Inclined Ladders (TL)

Fixed vertical ladder Should be used Step size rule for stairs:  g + 2h = 630 ± 30

Fixed inclined ladder

90°

platform elements
75° c w
H 60°
G p
F 45° e
Stairs g
E 38°
D 30°
C 20° H
h
B
10° Ramp
r
A t
0°
As per DIN EN ISO 14122-1: 2001 As per DIN EN ISO 14122-1: 2001

A Ramp, A should be used For Stairs (T) For Inclined Ladders (TL)
B Ramp with slip-resistant surfacing Tread depth t ≥ 80 mm ≥ 80 mm
C Stairs Rise h ≤ 250 mm ≤ 250 mm
D Stairs, D should be used Nosing r ≥ 10 mm ≥ 10 mm
E Stairs Tread width w 600 to 1200 mm 450 to 800 mm
F Inclined ladder Headroom e ≥ 2300 mm ≥ 2300 mm
G Inclined ladder (only when space is limited) Stair clearance c ≥ 850 mm ≥ 850 mm
H Fixed ladder, H should be used Total rise H ≤ 3000 mm ≤ 3000 mm

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
212  brühl platform elements

Product Overview: Access Platforms

Floor panels
Railing

Frame element

Stair railing

Support legs

Stairs

Maintenance platform for a conveyor system with connected safety fence

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl platform elements 213

Frame elements

Platform support legs

Floor anchors with

height adjustment

platform elements
Support legs without
height adjustment

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
214  brühl platform elements

Platform floor panels and coatings

Anti-skid grating Press-welded grating

t

Load-bearing bar: 30/2 (load-bearing Load-bearing bar: 30/2

bars and cross bars are notched) Mesh size: 30/30
Mesh size: 30/30 Slip resistance: R11 to R13
Slip resistance: R11 to R13 also as anti-skid protection

Chequer plate aluminium Chequer plate steel

Thickness: 5 mm Thickness: 5 mm
Slip resistance: R11 to R13 Slip resistance: R11 to R13

Phenolic plywood Laminated wood

Thickness: 12 mm Thickness: 12 mm

Sheet metal Sheet metal with slip-resistant paint

Sheet metal floor covering as base for Slip-resistant paint optional for providing
other floor coverings/coatings additional slip resistance “on” sheet
metal flooring

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl platform elements 215

Handrails

Handrail for mounting to the surface of concrete floors or platforms, Handrail for mounting to the surface of concrete floors or platforms, with
without kick plate; constructed from steel tube (ø = 48.3 mm and 26.9 mm) kick plate; constructed from steel tube (ø = 48.3 mm and 26.9 mm)
Product group: GL-V1 Product group: GL-V2

Handrail for side mounting, without kick plate; Handrail for side mounting, with kick plate;
constructed from steel tube (ø = 48.3 mm and 26.9 mm) constructed from steel tube (ø = 48.3 mm and 26.9 mm)
Product group: GL-V3 Product group: GL-V4

Reinforced handrail for mounting to the surface of concrete floors or

platforms, with kick plate; constructed from steel tube (ø = 114 mm)
Product group: GL-V5

platform elements

Application and safety requirements for handrails used with inclined ladders
75 min.–120 max. 1  Handrail → If the fall-height is greater than 500 mm
1
2   Knee rail a handrail must be installed.
3   Kick plate → A handrail is required if the distance between
500 max.

4
4  Stanchions the platform and the machine or wall is greater
1100 min.

2 than 200 mm or if the protection provided

5   Walking surface
by the machine is not equivalent to that of a
100 min.

500 max.

10 max.

handrail. A kick plate is required if the distance

3 between the platform and the support frame-
5 work is greater than 30 mm.

As per DIN EN ISO 14122-3: 2001

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
216  stairs / inclined ladders

Stairs / Inclined Ladders

The strings are constructed from folded plate. The steps are available with grating or chequer plate.
All measurements are variable and dependent on the application.

Product group: T / TL / TGL

Stair railing (TGL) Stairs (T)

Stairs

Permanent Means of Access to Machinery – Stairs and Inclined Ladders

Use of handrails with stairs and inclined ladders Use of handrails with stairs
→ Stairs must have at least one handrail. Stairs with a useable
stair width greater than or equal to 1200 mm must have two
1100 min.

100 min.

0 m ax.

handrails.
0m

.
ax
50

50

→ If the totalArise is more than 500 mm and there is an open

50

5-
ø2

space of more than 200 mm beside the string, a handrail must

be mounted on this side of the stairs for protection.
2300 min.
3000 max.

900-1000

Position of a handrail on an inclined ladder

Handrail clearance

Examples of distances between the pitch line and

the axis of the handrail for an inclined ladder
x
m 00
1
in

0 (degrees) x (mm)

60° 250
1000

65° 200
0

70° 150

As per DIN EN ISO 14122-3: 2001 75° 100

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 fixed ladders 217

Fixed Ladders
Fixed Ladders Fixed ladder with safety cage Fixed ladder with safety cage
Ladder treads have a slip-resistant profile. Fixed ladder with safety cage. Ladder treads and fall protection
have a slip-resistant profile. Fixed ladder equipped with an additional safety
cage and fall protection. Ladder treads have a
slip-resistant profile.

Product group: SL-V1 Product group: SL-V2 Product group: SL-V3

Permanent Means of Access to Machinery – Fixed Ladders

1 1   Handrail connection
1100 min.
1100 min.

2  Barrier
3   Obstruction (irregularly occurring)
4  Maximum open space
(less than or equal to 0.4 m2)
5   Transition bridge
H max. = 10000 / h max. = 6000
max. = 10000 / h max. = 6000

700 min.
700 min.

platform elements
150 min.
150 min. 2

3 200 min.
200 min. → The climbing height h must be no greater
than 6000 mm. For single-section ladders
(no rest platform) the allowable distance
5 h between the surface of entry and the
surface of exit is increased to 10000 mm.
1500 max.
H max.

h max. = 6000
225 min. h max. = 6000

4 Rungs must have a non-slip surface

300 max.
300 max.

1500

3
3000 max.
3000 max.
2200 min.
2200 min.

300 max.
300 max.
225 min.

D max. = 800
D max. = 800
D min. = 650
D min. = 650
3000 max.
3000 max.
2200 min.
2200 min.

600 600
700 max.
700 max.
500 min.
500 min.

min. min.

400 min.
400 min.
As per DIN EN ISO 14122-4: 2001 600 max.
600 max.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
218  bridges

Bridges
C Bridges are constructed in accordance with the individual application.

Bridge without handrail

Bridge with handrail

Bridge with safety fence

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 bridges 219

platform elements

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
220  special structures

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 special structures 221

Special Structures special structures

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
222  special structures

Robot cells
Robot cells from Brühl are constructed on the basis of an alumini-
um profile framework that can be used with a combination of vari-
ous infill materials, as required by the individual application. We
connect these aluminium framework elements with steel bases
and frames inside the structure, enabling you to use generate ef-
ficient solutions that can be custom adapted with hinged and slid-
ing doors, as well as machine guard rolling doors.

Product advantages and features of all models at-a-glance:

→ Robust aluminium profile system with infill materials
→ The size and type of profiles are chosen with respect to the
requirements of the application.
→ In order to provide a view of the production process the frames
can be combined with woven mesh, Polycarbonatee or lami-
nated safety glass.
→ Other optional components, such as maintenance openings,
exhaust systems, withdrawal stations and machine guard
rolling doors, can be incorporated, depending on individual
requirements.
→ The infill materials are available in all colours or with a hot-dip
galvanised finish.
→ A double-walled sheet metal infill is available for laser appli-
cations.

Product overview: Enclosures

Suction hood

Double sliding door

Sliding door

Hinged
door

Insertion opening

Window

Inclined panel Steel base

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 special structures 223

Interior view of a robot cell

Exterior view of a robot cell

special structures

Exterior view of a robot cell

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
224  special structures
Partial access panel
Partial access panels are available as self-supporting construc-
tions with posts or as fence panels for integration in our safety
fence systems. They are used for areas where maintenance and
Product advantages and features of all models at-a-glance:
→ Available with or without gas springs.
→ Partial access panels can be combined with our mounting
systems for safety switches. B See page 158.
→ Available with locking mechanism (optional).
→ Available (upon request) with counterweight, depending on
the design and weight of the opening panel.
Partial access panel with latch, opening direction downwards
Partial access panel with Flex infill material
www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
adjustment work can be performed on machines and installations
without having to dismantle the complete fence system.
→ Partial access panels are available in various colours or with
a hot-dip galvanised finish. B See page 238.
→ The components of the partial access panels are grit blasted
and powder coated to ensure maximum impact resistance.
→ Partial access panels are also available in stainless steel
Partial access panel with latch, opening direction upwards
Locking mechanism for partial access panel
 special structures 225

Custom solutions
Wall mounting system – angle bracket Wall mounting system – weld-on plate
C Special posts for mounting to machinery and walls (upon request). C Special posts for mounting to machinery and walls (upon request).

Wall mounting system – angle bracket Edging for cutouts

C Special posts for mounting to machinery and walls (upon request). C Clamping strip for fence panel cutouts as edge protection.

Offset posts
A Please include mounting sketch with dimensions in your request!  C Also available with lateral offset.
Post offset to the inside Post offset to the outside

t t
Machine side

Machine side
Outside

Outside
h

h
b

Sheet metal panel guard

Conveyor exit with sheet
metal panel guard
special structures

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
226  special structures

Cantilever sliding door with swivel unit

Cantilever sliding door with swivel unit for use in corner applications where there is no space for guide elements in the return travel path (back-run).
Unit can be swivelled up to 90°.

1 Door closed

3 Door open in end position

2 Door open in middle position

Cantilever sliding door with swivel unit

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 special structures 227

Cantilever sliding door, double-leaf

Double-leaf cantilever sliding door for use in production areas where minimal back-run space is available.

C Illustration shows cantilever sliding door, double-leaf with handle GR-S-V1.

outside

Po
st
sp
ac
ing

Guide assembly for double-leaf Fence height

cantilever sliding doors

Gr
ou
nd
machine side cle
ara
nc
e

Machine side

Outside

special structures

Cantilever sliding door with cable guide assembly

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
228  special structures

Sectional sliding door, single sided

Machine side

Outside

Safety fence with sectional sliding door

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 special structures 229

Sectional sliding door, bi-parting

Machine side

Outside

special structures

Safety fence with sectional sliding door

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
230  special mesh panels

Special mesh panels for safety fence system Flex II

Flex II – Mesh Panels with Diagonal Edges
Diagonal left Diagonal right
  Item number system: SF2-h-b-SL-a-c    Item number system: SF2-h-b-SR-a-c 

b b
a a

c
c

h
h

10 10 10 10

Flex II – Mesh Panels for Fence Corners

External corners Internal corners
  Item number system: SF2AE-h-a-c    Item number system: SF2IE-h-a-c 

a a
10

a
h
h

10
c

c
10

a 10

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 special mesh panels 231

Flex II – Mesh panels with rectangular cutouts

Cutout top left (x=0) Cutout top Cutout top right
  Item number system: SF2-h-b-AR-0-y-a-c    Item number system: SF2-h-b-AR-x-y-a-c    Item number system: SF2-h-b-AR-x-y-a-c 

b b b
a x a x a
x=0

c
c
c

h
h

h
y

y
10 10 10 10 10 10

Cutout left (x=0) Cutout Cutout right

  Item number system: SF2-h-b-AR-0-y-a-c    Item number system: SF2-h-b-AR-x-y-a-c    Item number system: SF2-h-b-AR-x-y-a-c 

b b b
x

a
a x
h
h

c
c

c
y

y
x=0
10 10 10 10 10 10

Cutout bottom left (x=0 and y=0) Cutout bottom (y=0) Cutout bottom right (y=0)
  Item number system: SF2-h-b-AR-0-0-a-c    Item number system: SF2-h-b-AR-x-0-a-c    Item number system: SF2-h-b-AR-x-0-a-c 
h
h
h

y=0

y=0
y=0

c
c
c

x=0
a x a x a
b b b
10 10 10 10 10 10
special structures

Values for dimensions and position:

SF2-h-b-
Notation for mesh panels from
the safety fence system Flex II
B See page 30.
AR - x-y-a-c x = distance between the left outer edge of the mesh panel and the left inner edge of the cutout
y = distance between the lower edge of the mesh panel and the lower edge of the cutout
Rectangular cutout Values for dimensions a = width of the cutout
and position of the c = height of the cutout
cutout
A The remaining section(s) of mesh panel to the left and right of the cutout may not be wider than 130 mm.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
232  special mesh panels

Special mesh panels for safety fence system Fence II

Fence II – Mesh panels with diagonal edges
Diagonal left Diagonal right
  Item number system: SZ2-WG40-h-b-SL-a-c    Item number system: SZ2-WG40-h-b-SR-a-c 
b b
a a

c
c

h
h

10 10 10 10

Fence II – Mesh Panels for Fence Corners

External corners Internal corners
  Item number system: SZ2AE-WG40-h-a-c    Item number system: SZ2IE-WG40-h-a-c 

a a

a
10

10
h

h
c

c
10

10

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 special mesh panels 233

Fence II – Mesh panels with rectangular cutouts

Cutout top left (x=0) Cutout top Cutout top right
  Item number system: SZ2-WG40-h-b-AR-0-y-a-c    Item number system: SZ2-WG40-h-b-AR-x-y-a-c    Item number system: SZ2-WG40-h-b-AR-x-y-a-c 

b b b
a x a x a

x=0

c
c

h
h
h

y
y

y
10 10 10 10 10 10

Cutout left (x=0) Cutout Cutout right

  Item number system: SZ2-WG40-h-b-AR-0-y-a-c    Item number system: SZ2-WG40-h-b-AR-x-y-a-c    Item number system: SZ2-WG40-h-b-AR-x-y-a-c 

b b b
x=0 x

c
c

h
x
h

a a
y

y
y

10 10 10 10 10 10

Cutout bottom left (x=0 and y=0) Cutout bottom (y=0) Cutout bottom right (y=0)
  Item number system: SZ2-WG40-h-b-AR-0-0-a-c    Item number system: SZ2-WG40-h-b-AR-x-0-a-c    Item number system: SZ2-WG40-h-b-AR-x-0-a-c 
h

h
h

x=0
c
y=0

c
c

y=0
y=0

x a x a
a x
b b
b 10 10 10 10
10 10
special structures

Values for dimensions and position:

SZ2-WG40-h-b-
Notation for mesh panels from the
safety fence system Fence II
B See page 40.
AR - x-y-a-c x = distance between the left outer edge of the mesh panel and the left inner edge of the cutout
y = distance between the lower edge of the mesh panel and the lower edge of the cutout
Rectangular cutout Values for dimensions a = width of the cutout
and position of the c = height of the cutout
cutout

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
234  crash barriers

Crash barriers
As part of our complete solutions for machinery and plant safety we offer our customers crash barriers and guard rails, e.g. for especially high-traffic trans-
port areas within a production facility. Crash barriers are mounted to the floor or wall, depending on the application, using high-quality fasteners.

C Mounting hardware must be ordered separately.

Crash barrier system bullnose end, Profile ‘B’, Crash barrier system bullnose end, Profile B, Crash barrier beam, Profile ‘B’; length
with round holes (underlapping) with slotted holes (overlapping) 4000 mm*; possible post spacing 2000 mm
and 1330 mm (beam width: 310 mm)
Product group: SSPK-V1 Product group: SSPK-V2 Product group: SSP-4000

* Total length 4300 mm minus 300 mm for system element overlapping

Crash barrier system corner element for external corners (Profile ‘B’) Crash barrier system corner element for internal corners (Profile ‘B’)

Product group: SSPE-V1 Product group: SSPE-V2

Crash barrier post Crash Barrier Posts Crash Barrier Posts

Type 1: with one beam Type 2: with two beams (one above the other)

product height** product height**

Product group: SPP
SPP-V1 -400 SPP-V2 -700
SPP-V1 -500 SPP-V2 -800
SPP-V1 -600 SPP-V2 -900
SPP-V1 -700 SPP-V2 -1000
SPP-V1 -800
** Height to the upper edge of the crash barrier
SPP-V1 -900
SPP-V1 -1000 C Special constructions upon request.

Accessory kits
packing unit
product product description
(pcs.)

BPSSP-V1 Mounting hardware for fastening 2 system elements together 2

BPSSP-V2 Mounting hardware for fastening a crash barrier beam to a crash barrier post 2

Mounting hardware for fastening a crash barrier beam incl. bullnose

BPSSP-V3 2
end to a crash barrier post

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 crash barrier 235

Planning Guide for Crash Barriers

4.00 lfdm*
External corner
400 AM 1333 AM 1334 AM 1333 410

410
AM 1333
Bullnose end Crash barrier post
Crash barrier, interior view

machine side

outside
4.00 lfdm*
AM 1334
Crash barrier post

AM 1333
Crash barrier, exterior view

Crash barrier beam

410

Internal corner
410 AM 1334 AM 1333 400

2.66 lfdm*

* with 300 mm factored in for overlapping of system elements

special structures

Wooden barrier beams for floors (upon request)

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
236  appendix

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 appendix 237

Appendix appendix

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
238  colour palette and finishes

ral colours / price category 2

Colour palette/finishes
In order to guarantee optimal colour matching or, where required, colour differentiation for
our customers’ machines and installations, we offer a large selection of standard colours.

Standard colours Price category 1

colour ral name colour ral name

RAL 1021 Rape yellow RAL 5017 Traffic blue

C You can select from all RAL colours.
RAL 2004 Pure orange RAL 7038 Agate grey B You can find a detailed overview of the available RAL colours at
www.schutzeinrichtungen.com

RAL 5010 Gentian blue RAL 7035 Light grey

ncs colours / price category 3

RAL 5012 Light blue RAL 9005 Jet black

Hot-dip galvanised surfaces in accordance

with DIN 50975

→ Textured and other special effect finishes are available upon request.
→ Our finishes are based on polyester-epoxy hybrid powder with a gloss level of 60 as per
DIN 67530 for indoor applications.
→ The components of the safety fence systems are grit blasted and then powder coated –
ensuring maximum durability and impact resistance.
→ Special finish treatment systems and primers are available upon request.
C You can select from all RAL colours.
A Please specify colour code when placing your order.
Steel wire and a powder-coated finish B You can find a detailed overview of the available RAL colours at
www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
Standard

Variant 1: two-tone colour schemes

Steel Grit-blasted surface Polyester-epoxy DIN EN ISO 12944-6
Surfaces grit-blasted to SA 2.5
and polyester-epoxy powder Same-colour posts and mesh
coated meet the requirements of
corrosion protection class C1.

Indoor applications

Steel wire, primer and a powder-coated finish

Variant 2: DIN 55633

Surfaces grit-blasted to SA 2.5
and epoxy corrosion-protection
Steel Grit-blasted surface Primer Polyester-epoxy powder coated and top-coated
with polyester powder meet
the requirements of corrosion
protection class C4–C5.
Two-tone colour combination for posts and mesh
Special applications

Steel wire, hot-dip galvanised

Variant 3: DIN 50975

Special applications
Steel Galvanising

C Fence posts and panels can also be ordered with different powder-coated finishes.
Please specify colour (or colour combination) when placing your order.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 colour palette and finishes 239

Overview of RAL colours / Price category 2

A Please note that the colours shown below should be used for guidance only and not as a true representation of the colours of the finished products.
Paints in the same RAL colour from different manufacturers can vary slightly.
appendix

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
240  safety of machinery

Safety distances
hazard zones and safety distances for the flex ii safety fence system
Fence height 1400 mm Fence height 1600 mm

2600 2600
2400 2400
Guard Guard

Height of guard or hazard zone (mm)

Height of guard or hazard zone (mm)

2200 2200
2000 2000
1800 1800
1600 1600
1400 1400
1200 1200
1000 1000
800 800
600 600
400
120*

400

120*
200 200
Ground clearance Ground clearance
0 0
Reference plane (floor, work platform) Reference plane (floor, work platform)
Distance from hazard zone Distance from hazard zone
0 500 1100 0 500 1100

Fence height 1800 mm Fence height 2000 mm

2600 2600
2400 2400
Guard Guard
Height of guard or hazard zone (mm)

Height of guard or hazard zone (mm)

2200 2200
2000 2000
1800 1800
1600 1600
1400 1400
1200 1200
1000 1000
800 800
600 600
400 400
120*

120*
200 200
Ground clearance Ground clearance
0 0
Reference plane (floor, work platform) Reference plane (floor, work platform)
Distance from hazard zone Distance from hazard zone
0 500 1100 0 500 1100

Fence height 2200 mm Fence height 2400 mm

2600 2600
2400 2400
Guard Guard
2200 2200
Height of guard or hazard zone (mm)

Height of guard or hazard zone (mm)

2000 2000
1800 1800
1600 1600
1400 1400
1200 1200
1000 1000
800 800
600 600
120*

400 400
120*

200 200
Ground clearance Ground clearance
0 0
Reference plane (floor, work platform) Reference plane (floor, work platform)
Distance from hazard zone Distance from hazard zone
0 500 1100 0 500 1100

Fence height 2600 mm

2600
2400
Guard
2200
Height of guard or hazard zone (mm)

2000
1800
1600
1400
1200
1000
800
600
400
120*

200
Ground clearance   Reaching over protective structures —
­ low risk
0
Reference plane (floor, work platform)   Reaching over protective structures­— high risk
Distance from hazard zone
0 500 1100
* Safety distance for a mesh size of 20 x 20 mm (cf. DIN EN ISO 13857: 2008-06).

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 safety of machinery 241

hazard zones and safety distances for the safety fence system zaun ii
Fence height 1400 mm Fence height 1600 mm

2600 2600
2400 2400
Guard Guard

Height of guard or hazard zone (mm)

Height of guard or hazard zone (mm)

2200 2200
2000 2000
1800 1800
1600 1600
1400 1400
1200 1200
1000 1000
800 800
600 600
400 400
200*

200*
200 200
Ground clearance Ground clearance
0 0
Reference plane (floor, work platform) Reference plane (floor, work platform)

Distance from hazard zone Distance from hazard zone

0 500 1100 0 500 1100

Fence height 1800 mm Fence height 2000 mm

2600 2600
2400 2400
Guard Guard
Height of guard or hazard zone (mm)

Height of guard or hazard zone (mm)

2200 2200
2000 2000
1800 1800
1600 1600
1400 1400
1200 1200
1000 1000
800 800
600 600

200*
200*

400 400
200 200
Ground clearance Ground clearance
0 0
Reference plane (floor, work platform) Reference plane (floor, work platform)
Distance from hazard zone Distance from hazard zone
0 500 1100 0 500 1100

Fence height 2200 mm Fence height 2400 mm

2600 2600
2400 2400
Guard Guard
2200 2200
Height of guard or hazard zone (mm)
Height of guard or hazard zone (mm)

2000 2000
1800 1800
1600 1600
1400 1400
1200 1200
1000 1000
800 800
600 600
200*

200*

400 400
200 200
Ground clearance Ground clearance
0 0
Reference plane (floor, work platform) Reference plane (floor, work platform)

Distance from hazard zone Distance from hazard zone

0 500 1100 0 500 1100

Fence height 2600 mm

2600
2400
Guard
2200
Height of guard or hazard zone (mm)

2000
1800
1600
1400
1200
1000
800
600
400
200*

200
Ground clearance   Reaching over protective structures —
­ low risk
0
Reference plane (floor, work platform)   Reaching over protective structures­— high risk
Distance from hazard zone
0 500 1100
* Safety distance for a mesh size of 40 x 40 mm (cf. DIN EN ISO 13857: 2008-06).
appendix

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
242  safety of machinery

Reaching over protective structures, for high or low risk

Hazard zone   Horizontal distance to hazard zone

  Height of hazard zone

 Height of protective structure

Reference plane
Protective structure As per DIN EN ISO 13857:2008

   Height of Protective Structure

Height of 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2700
Hazard Zone
    Horizontal Distance to Hazard Zone
— — — — — — — — — —
2700
— — — — — — — — — —
900 800 700 600 600 500 400 300 100 —
2600
— — — — — — — — — —
1100 1000 900 800 700 600 400 300 100 —
2400
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 — —
1300 1200 1000 900 800 600 400 300 — —
2200
600 600 500 500 400 350 250 — — —
1400 1300 1100 900 800 600 400 — — —
2000
1100 900 700 600 500 350 — — — —
1500 1400 1100 900 800 600 — — — —
1800
1100 1000 900 900 600 — — — — —
1500 1400 1100 900 800 500 — — — —
1600
1300 1000 900 900 500 — — — — —
1500 1400 1100 900 800 — — — — —
1400
1300 1000 900 800 100 — — — — —
1500 1400 1100 900 700 — — — — —
1200
1400 1000 900 500 —­ — — — — —
1500 1400 1000 800 — — — — — —
1000
1400 1000 900 300 — — — — — —
1500 1300 900 600 — — — — — —
800
1300 900 600 — — — — — — —
1400 1300 800 — — — — — — —
600
1200 500 — — — — — — — —
1400 1200 400 — — — — — — —
400
1200 300 — — — — — — — —
1200 900 — — — — — — — —
200
1100 200 — — — — — — — —
1100 500 — — — — — — — —
0
1100 200 — — — — — — — —

Low risk High risk As per DIN EN ISO 13857: 2008

A Protective structures less than 1000 mm in height are not included because they do not sufficiently restrict movement of the body.
A Protective structures lower than 1400 mm should not be used without additional safety measures in high risk zones.

 If a slot is ≤ 75 mm long the safety

Safety distances to prevent danger zones being reached by the lower limbs distance can be reduced to ≥ 50 mm.

 Value refers to “as far as the knee”.

Leg Leg
Tip of Toe Toe Foot (as far as the knee) (as far as the crotch)
 Value refers to “as far as the crotch”.
Safety Distance (Sr)

Sr Sr e
Sr
e e e

Sr

Opening e≤5 5 < e ≤ 15 15 < e ≤ 35 35 < e ≤ 60 60 < e ≤ 80 80< e ≤ 95 95 < e ≤ 180 180 < e ≤ 240 Slots with e > 180 mm and
square or circular openings with
Slot 0 ≥ 10 ≥ 80 ≥ 180 ≥ 650 ≥ 1100 ≥ 1100 Not allowed e > 240 mm permit full body
access.
Square or
0 0 ≥ 25 ≥ 80 ≥ 180 ≥ 650 ≥ 1100 ≥ 1100
Circular
As per DIN EN ISO 13857: 2008

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 safety of machinery 243

Safety distances to prevent danger zones being reached by the upper limbs

Safety distances for reaching through openings of regular shape

Finger up to  If the length of a slot is ≤ 65 mm the thumb

Finger Tip Hand Arm up to Shoulder
where Finger Joins Hand acts as a stop. The safety distance can then be
reduced to 200 mm.
Safety Distance (Sr)

 
The measurements specified correspond to
Sr Sr Sr Sr the width of square aperture, the diameter of a
e e e
e circular aperture or the length of the smallest
side of a slot.

→   For openings > 120 mm the safety distances for

reaching over must be used.

→   The heavier lines in the table show which part

of the body is restricted by the size of the
Opening e≤4 4<e≤6 6<e≤8 8 < e ≤ 10 10 < e ≤ 12 12 < e ≤ 20 20 < e ≤ 30 30 < e ≤ 40 40 < e ≤ 120
opening.
Slot ≥2 ≥ 10 ≥ 20 ≥ 80 ≥ 100 ≥ 120 ≥ 850 ≥ 850 ≥ 850

Square ≥2 ≥5 ≥ 15 ≥ 25 ≥ 80 ≥ 120 ≥ 120 ≥ 200 ≥ 850

Circular ≥2 ≥5 ≥5 ≥ 20 ≥ 80 ≥ 120 ≥ 120 ≥ 120 ≥ 850

As per DIN EN ISO 13857: 2008

→ All guards must be designed and positioned in such a way that no
change can occur in the safety distances. The specified values for safety
distance assume that no aids such as boxes, chairs or ladders are used
to reach the hazard zone.
→ In order to determine the required safety distances a risk assessment
must be carried out in accordance with DIN EN ISO 12100.
→ If the measured values for a, b or c are between two reference values,
those that produce the greatest safety must be chosen in all cases.

Safety distances for reaching upwards

Before one can determine the safety distances required to prevent persons from reaching a hazard zone it is necessary to decide whether the
values for high risk or low risk apply. This must be decided by means of a risk assessment (see ISO 12100-1). Low risks arise from hazards such
as friction or abrasion where long-term or irreversible damage to the body is not foreseeable.

Hazard zone
Low risk High risk
h ≥ 2500 mm h ≥ 2700 mm

or other safety measures

h [h] Distance from reference

plane to hazard zone

Reference plane

As per DIN EN ISO 13857: 2008

appendix

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
244  safety of machinery

Safety distances for reaching around with limitation of movement

1 2
A A A A
A A A A

120 120 120 120

120 120 120 120

720 720 ≥130 Sr 620 620

720 720 S
≥130 r 620 620
Sr S
≥130 Sr ≥130 Sr Sr Srr
≥230
≥230
≥230 ≥230

3 4
A A A A
A A A A

120 120 120 120

120 120 120 120

300 300
S300 S
300 Srr ≥≥ 550 Srr ≥≥ 550 Sr ≥ S
Srr ≥≥ 850
550 550 Sr ≥ 850
850 850

1 Arm and hand supported up to the knuckle joint A = Range of arm movement
2 Arm supported up to the wrist Sr = Radial safety distance
3 Arm supported up to the elbow
4 Movement limited only at the shoulder or armpit
* = Diameter of a circular aperture or width of a square aperture or slot

As per DIN EN ISO 13857: 2008

Minimum distances to prevent the crushing of parts of the body

Access and/or contact to hazardous, moving parts must be prevented. If danger spots and sources or danger cannot be avoided through machine design
measures, the machine must be equipped with guards. In order to protect persons and their body parts the specified safety distances must be observed.

Body Head Fist, Hand, Wrist Finger

≥ 500 mm ≥ 300 mm ≥ 100 mm ≥ 25 mm

Foot Toes Arm Leg

≥ 120 mm ≥ 50 mm ≥ 120 mm ≥ 180 mm

As per DIN EN 349

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 safety of machinery 245

Standards for machine safety

Type A
Standards
Basic safety standards

Type B1 Type B2
Standards Standards
General safety aspects Reference to special
protective devices

Type C
Standards
Specific safety requirements
for special machines

A
If a C standard exists, it takes
priority over a B or A type
standard.

Withdrawn Current (as of 2012) Type A Standards

DIN EN 292-1 / DIN EN ISO 12100-1

DIN EN ISO 12100
DIN EN 292-2 / DIN EN ISO 12100-2 Safety of machinery – General principles for design - Risk assessment and risk reduction

DIN EN 1050 / DIN EN ISO 14121-1 DIN EN ISO 12100

Withdrawn Current (as of 2012) Type B Standards

DIN EN 349 Safety of machinery – Minimum gaps to avoid crushing of parts of the human body

DIN EN 953 Safety of machinery – Guards – General requirements for the design and construction of fixed and movable guards

DIN EN 999 DIN EN 13855 Safety of machinery – The positioning of protective equipment in respect of approach speeds of parts of the human body

DIN EN 1037 Safety of machinery – Prevention of unexpected start-up

DIN EN 1088 Safety of machinery – Interlocking devices associated with guards – Principles for design and selection

DIN EN ISO 11161 Safety of machinery – Integrated manufacturing systems – Basic requirements

DIN EN ISO 13857 Safety of machinery – Safety distances to prevent hazard zones being reached by upper and lower limbs

DIN EN ISO 14122-1 Safety of machinery – Permanent means of access to machines – Part 1: Choice of fixed means of access between two levels

DIN EN ISO 14122-2 Safety of machinery – Permanent means of access to machines – Part 2: Working platforms and walkways

DIN EN ISO 14122-3 Safety of machinery – Permanent means of access to machines – Part 3: Stairs, stepladders and guard-rails

DIN EN ISO 14122-4 Safety of machinery – Permanent means of access to machines – Part 4 Fixed ladders

Withdrawn Current (as of 2012) Type C Standards

DIN EN 415-6 Safety of packaging machines – Part 6: Pallet wrapping machines

DIN EN 528 Rail dependent storage and retrieval equipment – Safety requirements

DIN EN 619 Continuous handling equipment and systems – Safety and EMC requirements for equipment for mechanical handling of unit loads

Withdrawn Current (as of 2012) Additional Standards

DIN EN 12453 Industrial, commercial and garage doors and gates – Safety in use of power-operated doors – Requirements

DIN EN 12604 Industrial, commercial and garage doors and gates – Mechanical aspects - Requirements
appendix

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
246  positioning of base plates

Technical information on the positioning of base plates

All door posts by Georg Brühl GmbH are welded to the centre of the base plate as standard. At an extra charge offsetting of the base plate is available for
both standard and door posts.

machine side / danger zone

Position 1 left back Position 2 middle back Position 3 right back

Standard

Position 4 left centred Position 5 middle centred Position 6 right centred

Position 7 left front Position 8 middle front Position 9 right front

visible side

A Be sure to specify the position no. and description when ordering an offset base plate.

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 general information on switches 247

General Information on switches

Actuating speed
Speed at which a safety switch can be mechanically actuated. The permitted actuating
speed is dependent on the shape and material of the actuating element and the
actuating angle. The higher the actuating speed, the shallower the actuating angle
that should be chosen.
Emergency release
An emergency release opens a locking device in the event of an emergency. With this
mechanism the guard locking can be released without tools from the access side. When
an emergency release mechanism is activated the switch locks into the unlocked positi-
on and can only be returned to the locked state by means of a repair-like operation.

Actuator/Actuating element Hinged actuator

For type 1 switches:
A mechanical element of a safety position switch that triggers the switching operation.
Various actuator designs are available, including roller plungers, chisel plungers and
roller lever plungers.
A hinged actuator is, unlike a straight actuator, spring mounted and can therefore be
easily inserted in an actuator head, even when the respective door has a small opening
radius. With larger radii, a straight actuator can be used.

For type 2 switches:

In type 2 switches the actuating element is separate from the safety switch. These
actuators have special designs (coding) for triggering the respective safety switch so
that the switch cannot be trigged by other devices (such as nails or pieces of wire).
Hinged actuator

Safety switch
A safety switch is part of a safety chain. It provides a safe signal in the input circuit. A
stop signal is generated when the safety guard is opened. In this way an unintended
machine start-up is prevented when the safety guard is open, meaning an interlocking
is achieved. As with position switches the switching element must have at least one
positive (direct) opening contact.

roller plunger chisel plunger roller lever

Actuation (electrical/mechanical)
Transition of a moveable contact from one switch position to another. This causes a
change in the switching state of a switching device. There are two types of actuation:
electrical (e.g. on/off) and mechanical (e.g. close/open).
Type 1 Type 2

Lockout tag
Prevents guard doors from closing unintentionally, e.g. during assembly work.

straight actuator hinged actuator

Emergency release mechanism

In the case of an emergency the emergency release mechanism must make it possible
to unlock the guard from within the danger zone without tools. The mechanism must
be operated manually and act positively upon the locking device. The actuation
must bring about a permanent disabling of the interlock (see also Auxiliary interlock
deactivation).

Auxiliary interlock deactivation

Facility for manual release of an interlock from the access side (outside the danger
zone) by means of tools or keys in the event of interlock failure. The auxiliary interlock
mechanism must be protected against misuse (seal, lacquer).
appendix

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
248  glossary

Glossary
Unit spacing (AM) Mesh panels
Distance from the centre of the first fence post to the centre of the second. A mesh panel is part of a barrier for an area, mostly involving a complex enclosure
of the relevant danger zone. A safety fence system is composed of mesh panels in
Handing
combination with posts.
The handing of a door refers to the side on which the door is hung, i.e. the hinged
side. Here, a distinction is made between DIN Left (left handed) and DIN Right (right Mesh panel height
handed). The mesh panel height is the height of a mesh panel.
Mesh panel height + ground clearance = fence height
Outward opening
Our standard hinged doors are designed in such a way that the door leaf opens out- Transom bar
wards (i.e. towards the operator side). The transom bar is a horizontal connecting element of the frame above a door. This
connection between the hinge and strike posts increases the rigidity of the doorway.
Ground clearance
Distance from the floor to the lower edge of the mesh panel.
Ground clearance + mesh panel height = fence height Transom bar

Inward opening
The leaves of inward opening doors open into the machine area behind the fence. This
can be necessary if, for example, there is not sufficient space on the outside. Inward
opening doors can only be used if permitted by the respective safety concept. This op-
tion is not available for escape doors, which must always open in the escape direction,
i. e. outward.

Frequency converter (FU)

The frequency converter is a device that converts the mains frequency of an alternating
current (rotary current frequency) from 50 Hz to an adjustable value. The speed of
the connected motor is directly dependent on the rotary current frequency and can
therefore be controlled using a frequency converter. This device makes it possible to Conventional safety switches
operate a door at infinitely variable speeds and to program functions such as “creep Electromagnetic safety switches equipped with either an integrated actuator (type 1)
speed” or “slow start”. or a separate actuator (type 2).

Danger zone Clear width (LB)

An area in or around a machine or installation in which a person is exposed to the risk The clear width is the actual passage width of a doorway.
of injury or other damage to health. The hazard either can be
Clear height (LH)
• permanent during proper use (motion of hazardous, moving parts, welding arcs etc.)
The clear height is the actual passage height of a doorway, from the floor to the lower
• or can occur unexpectedly (unintended, unexpected start-up etc.)
edge of the transom bar.
Hazard labelling
Tampering
Machinery must bear all markings which are necessary for its safe use, e.g.:
Tampering is the conscious disabling or bypassing of safety guards and their com-
• maximum speed of rotating parts
ponents. Safety switches and other safety devices must be designed to ensure that
• maximum working load
the protective function cannot be altered or bypassed manually or using simple tools.
• necessity of wearing protective equipment
Simple tools include the following:
• guard adjustment data
• nails
• frequency of inspections, etc.
• pieces of wire
• adhesive tape etc.
Information printed directly on the machine should be permanent and remain legible
throughout the expected life of the machine. Signs or written warnings only saying
The inability to bypass by simple means (BGI 575) includes the following:
“danger” may not be used.
• the dismantling of parts
Markings, signs and written warnings must be understood immediately and unambi-
• the turning of the safety switch away from its protective position
guously as relating to the corresponding sub-function of the machine. Readily under-
• the use of a second actuator
standable signs (pictograms) should be used in preference to written warnings.
• the bridging of the contacts etc.
Signs and pictograms should only be used if they are understood in the culture in which
the machinery is to be used.
The design of a safety device should allow for the simple and proper operation of
Written warnings must be drawn up in the language(s) of the country in which the
machines and installations. If safety measures do not meet this criterion, the likelihood
machine will be used for the first time and, on request, in the language(s) understood
of bypassing increases.
by the operators. According to machine safety standards such markings fall under
indicative safety engineering (user information with respect to residual risk). Machinery safety
The term “machinery safety” is used colloquially to describe protective measures taken
around machines and installations for preventing dangerous situations and their risks.
The issue of machinery safety can be viewed from two different perspectives. For the
manufacturers of the machinery, it means putting safe machines on the market on

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 glossary 249

the basis of the Machinery Directive and taking safety measures into consideration as
early as the design phase. The operator of a machine or installation is responsible for
ensuring a safe working environment with and around the machinery for the protection
of its employees.
Average speed
The average speed is the average value calculated from the various movement speeds.
Safety Integrity Level (SIL)
Safety Integrity Level is defined as the probability of a safety-related system satisfac-
torily performing the required safety functions under all the stated conditions within a
stated period of time. This analysis distinguishes between the Safety Integrity Level
required (SLr) and the SIL that was actually achieved.
Safety edge
A safety edge detects a person, their body part or an object when pressure is applied
to the actuating surface. It is a linear safety device with contact function. Its purpose is
to prevent hazardous situations for a person inside a danger zone, such as cutting and
crushing edges. A typical application is for door and gate systems, moving machine
components, platforms and vertically sliding equipment.

Safety devices
The purpose of a safety device is to protect people, manufacturing goods and the
environment from a danger. A differentiation is made between guards and protective
s to
ppi
ng devices.
spe/ star
ed ting
Protective measures
ma A protective measure is a means for reducing risk. A distinction is made here between
xim
Average speed

um protective measures used in the design and construction of the installation and protec-
spe
ed
tive measures used in the operation of the installation.
s to
ppi
ng Welded mesh/Spot welded mesh
spe/ star
ed ting
Flat drawn steel or stainless steel wires are used in the manufacturing of spot welded
mesh. These wires are joined perpendicularly at each point of intersection with electric
resistance spot welding. These welded points of intersection give the mesh its extraor-
dinarily high stability.

Performance level (PL) Phenolic plywood

Discrete level used to specify the ability of safety-related parts of control systems to
perform a safety function under foreseeable conditions (as defined by the standard EN
13849). In simpler terms, the Performance Level is a measurement of the reliability of
a safety function. This analysis distinguishes between the Performance Level required
(PLr) and the PL that was actually achieved. There are five Performance Levels, which
represent various levels of residual risk.
Polycarbonatee
Polycarbonatee is used for applications for which other plastics would be too soft,
breakable, sensitive to scratching, dimensionally unstable, or opaque. Polycarbonatee
is crystal clear and can be dyed, welded and glued. It is also dimensionally stable and
has high impact strength.
Phenolic plywood is a type of plywood board with a slip-resistant surface. It is often
used in vehicle construction and for durable flooring.
Monitoring of load-carrying mechanisms
Monitors for load-carrying mechanisms are electro-mechanical safety devices which
emit a signal if the carrying chain of a gate breaks in order to prevent the gate from
falling uncontrollably. Brühl gates with monitored load-carrying mechanisms always
use multiple carrying mechanisms and are designed in such a way that, if one carrying
mechanism fails, the monitoring system will trigger a signal, and the other load-
carrying mechanism will hold the gate in position. Furthermore, monitoring systems
for load-carrying mechanisms can detect a malfunction of the drive unit, immediately
stopping the movement of the gate.

Position switch Chequer plate

Position switches are used for monitoring the position of movable guards. When posi-
tion switches are used for safety-related components, they are referred to as position
switches with safety function or as safety-related position switches. In this case the
switching element must have at least one positive (direct) opening contact.
Latch
The tongue of the latch mechanically guides the actuator when it is inserted in the
safety switch. The part of the latch mounted to the door comprises a protruding latch
tongue in a guide, a handle and the actuator. The keeper assembly and the safety
switch are mounted to the side of the post. When the door is closed, the latch keeper
assembly absorbs the forces from the door, which would otherwise act on the switch
and actuator, potentially damaging these devices.
Slip resistance (class)
Slip resistance classes define the slip resistance or surface properties of, for example,
floor coverings.
Chequer plate is a loadable and slip-resistant profiled metal sheet. The metal sheets
get their “chequers” by rolling. However, the underside remains smooth. The raised
pattern is specially designed to ensure excellent slip-resistance and optimal drainage.
Laminated safety glass (VSG)
Laminated safety glass consists of at least two panes of glass are bonded together by
a plastic safety film. Therefore, if the glass breaks, there is no risk of injury because,
despite numerous cracks, the glass does not shatter.
Laminated safety glass with sound insulation
Laminated safety glass with sound insulation uses a 1mm-thick interlayer of cast
resin or a sound-protection film instead of safety film. In both cases very good sound
insulation values can be achieved.
Fence height
The fence height is the total height of the safety fence from the floor to the top edge of
the fence element. Fence height = ground clearance + mesh panel height
appendix

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
250  artikelindex

Product Index
produktgruppe beschreibung seite produktgruppe beschreibung seite

A-FTR Aluminium Flügeltür für Griff oder Riegel 83 E-EP-F Eckpfosten für Edelstahl Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 67
A-FTS Aluminium Flügeltür mit Fallenriegelschloss 82 E-EP-Z Eckpfosten für Edelstahl Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II 71
A-STG Aluminium Schiebetür für Griff 109 Eckpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Edelstahl
E-EPHV1-F 67
A-STS Aluminium Schiebetür mit Hakenschloss 108 Schutzzaunsystem Flex II
A-SZ1 Standardgitterelemente für Aluminium Schutzzaunsystem Zaun I 56 Eckpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Edelstahl
E-EPHV1-Z 71
A-ZL1 Aluminium Zaun I-Lasche 147 Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II
BMF Befestigungsmittel Fixanker 148 Eckpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Edelstahl
E-EPHV2-F 67
BMH Befestigungsmittel Hakenschraube 148 Schutzzaunsystem Flex II
BMSV Winkel für Stehverhinderergittermatte 153 Eckpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Edelstahl
E-EPHV2-Z 71
BMT Befestigungsmittel Tellerkopfschraube 148 Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II
BMV Befestigungsmittel Verbundanker 148 E-EPJ-F Eckpfosten justierbar für Edelstahl Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 67
BPSSP System Schutzplanken Montagepack 234 E-EPJ-Z Eckpfosten justierbar für Edelstahl Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II 71
BSG Beschilderung 156 E-FL1 Edelstahl Flex I-Lasche 145
DFAFTR Doppelfaltflügeltür für Riegel 123 E-FL1W Edelstahl Flexwinkel 145
DFASTG Doppelfaltschiebetür für Griff 125 E-FL2 Edelstahl Flex II-Lasche 145
DFTR Doppelflügeltür für Griff oder Riegel 93 E-FL2DP Edelstahl Flex II-Lasche mit Distanzplatte 145
DFTRO Doppelflügeltür für Griff oder Riegel, mit Oberlicht 95 E-FTR Edelstahl Flügeltür für Griff oder Riegel 81
DFTS Doppelflügeltür mit Fallenriegelschloss 92 E-FTS Edelstahl Flügeltür mit Fallenriegelschloss 80
DFTSO Doppelflügeltür mit Fallenriegelschloss und Oberlicht 94 E-SF2 Standardgitterelemente für Edelstahl Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 64
DP-F Line post für Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 33 E-STG Edelstahl Schiebetür für Griff 107
DP-W Durchgangspfosten für Schutzzaunsystem Wand II 51 E-STS Edelstahl Schiebetür mit Hakenschloss 106
DP-Z Durchgangspfosten für Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II 43 E-SZ2 Standardgitterelemente für Edelstahl Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II 68
DP-Z Durchgangspfosten für Aluminium Schutzzaunsystem Zaun I 59 E-TP-F T-Stoßpfosten für Edelstahl Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 67
Durchgangspfosten mit Höhenausgleich für E-TP-Z T-Stoßpfosten für Edelstahl Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II 71
DPHV1-F 33
Schutzzaunsystem Flex II T-Stoßpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Edelstahl
E-TPHV1-F 67
Durchgangspfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Schutzzaunsystem Flex II
DPHV1-W 51
Schutzzaunsystem Wand II T-Stoßpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Edelstahl
E-TPHV1-Z 71
Durchgangspfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II
DPHV1-Z 43
Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II T-Stoßpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Edelstahl
E-TPHV2-F 67
Durchgangspfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Schutzzaunsystem Flex II
DPHV1-Z 59
Aluminium Schutzzaunsystem Zaun I T-Stoßpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Edelstahl
E-TPHV2-Z 71
DPHV2-F Durchgangspfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 33 Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II
Durchgangspfosten mit Höhenausgleich für E-TPJ-F T-Stoßpfosten justierbar für Edelstahl Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 67
DPHV2-W 51
Schutzzaunsystem Wand II E-TPJ-Z T-Stoßpfosten justierbar für Edelstahl Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II 71
Durchgangspfosten mit Höhenausgleich für E-ZL2O Edelstahl Zaun II-Lasche oben 146
DPHV2-Z 43
Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II E-ZL2U Edelstahl Zaun II-Lasche unten 147
Durchgangspfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Aluminium EP-F Eckpfosten für Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 33
DPHV2-Z 59
Schutzzaunsystem Zaun I EP-W Eckpfosten für Schutzzaunsystem Wand II 51
DPJ-F Durchgangspfosten justierbar für Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 33 EP-Z Eckpfosten für Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II 43
DPJ-W Durchgangspfosten justierbar für Schutzzaunsystem Wand II 51 EP-Z Eckpfosten für Aluminium Schutzzaunsystem Zaun I 59
DPJ-Z Durchgangspfosten justierbar für Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II 43 EPHV1-F Eckpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 33
Durchgangspfosten justierbar für Aluminium EPHV1-W Eckpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Schutzzaunsystem Wand II 51
DPJ-Z 59
Schutzzaunsystem Zaun I EPHV1-Z Eckpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II 43
DSTG Doppelschiebetür für Griff 115 Eckpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Aluminium
EPHV1-Z 59
DSTGO Doppelschiebetür für Griff, mit Oberlicht 119 Schutzzaunsystem Zaun I
DSTGT Doppelschiebetür für Griff, teleskopierbar 133 EPHV2-F Eckpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 33
DSTS Doppelschiebetür mit Hakenschloss 114 EPHV2-W Eckpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Schutzzaunsystem Wand II 51
DSTSO Doppelschiebetür mit Hakenschloss und Oberlicht 118 EPHV2-Z Eckpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II 43
DSTST Doppelschiebetür mit Hakenschloss, teleskopierbar 132 Eckpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Aluminium
EPHV2-Z 59
E-BMF Befestigungsmittel Fixanker in Edelstahl 148 Schutzzaunsystem Zaun I
E-BMV Befestigungsmittel Verbundanker in Edelstahl 148 EPJ-F Eckpfosten justierbar für Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 33
E-DP-F Durchgangspfosten für Edelstahl Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 67 EPJ-W Eckpfosten justierbar für Schutzzaunsystem Wand II 51
E-DP-Z Durchgangspfosten für Edelstahl Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II 71 EPJ-Z Eckpfosten justierbar für Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II 43
Durchgangspfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Edelstahl EPJ-Z Eckpfosten justierbar für Aluminium Schutzzaunsystem Zaun I 59
E-DPHV1-F 67
Schutzzaunsystem Flex II FAFTR Faltflügeltür für Riegel 122
Durchgangspfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Edelstahl FASTG Faltschiebetür für Griff 124
E-DPHV1-Z 71
Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II FL1 Flex I-Lasche 144
Durchgangspfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Edelstahl FL1W Flexwinkel 144
E-DPHV2-F 67
Schutzzaunsystem Flex II FL2 Flex II-Lasche 144
Durchgangspfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Edelstahl FL2DP Flex II-Lasche mit Distanzplatte 144
E-DPHV2-Z 71
Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II FSTG Freitragende Schiebetür für Griff 137
Durchgangspfosten justierbar für Edelstahl FSTGT Freitragende Schiebetür für Griff, mit Teleskopführung 139
E-DPJ-F 67
Schutzzaunsystem Flex II FSTS Freitragende Schiebetür mit Hakenschloss 136
Durchgangspfosten justierbar für Edelstahl FSTST Freitragende Schiebetür mit Hakenschloss und Teleskopführung 138
E-DPJ-Z 71
Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II FTR Flügeltür für Griff oder Riegel 79

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 artikelindex 251

produktgruppe beschreibung seite produktgruppe beschreibung seite

FTREO Flügeltür für Griff oder Riegel, einwärts öffnend 89 STGT Schiebetür für Griff, teleskopierbar 129
FTRHV1 Flügeltür für Griff oder Riegel, mit Höhenausgleich 91 STGW Schiebetür für Griff, wechselseitig öffnend 117
FTRO Flügeltür für Griff oder Riegel, mit Oberlicht 85 STGWT Schiebetür für Griff, wechselseitig öffnend und teleskopierbar 131
FTS Flügeltür mit Fallenriegelschloss 78 STR Stützrolle für Flügeltüren 151
FTSEO Flügeltür mit Fallenriegelschloss, einwärts öffnend 88 STS Schiebetür mit Hakenschloss 104
FTSHV1 Flügeltür mit Fallenriegelschloss und Höhenausgleich 90 STSHV1 Schiebetür mit Hakenschloss und Höhenausgleich 112
FTSO Flügeltür mit Fallenriegelschloss und Oberlicht 84 STSO Schiebetür mit Hakenschloss und Oberlicht 110
GL Geländer 215 STST Schiebetür mit Hakenschloss, teleskopierbar 128
GP Gewindeplatte 149 STSW Schiebetür mit Hakenschloss, wechselseitig öffnend 116
GR-F Griffsysteme für Flügeltüren 161 Schiebetür mit Hakenschloss, wechselseitig öffnend
STSWT 130
GR-S Griff für Schiebetür 150 und teleskopierbar
GR-S Griffsysteme für Schiebetüren 161 SV-F Sicherheitsschaltervorbereitungen für Flügeltüren 177
GRK-F Griff mit Kugelschnäpper für Flügeltür 150 Sicherheitsschaltervorbereitungen für einwärts
SV-FEO 177
GRK-F Griffsysteme mit Kugelschnäpper für Flügeltüren 163 öffnende Flügeltüren
GRK-FEO Griffsysteme mit Kugelschnäpper für einwärts öffnende Flügeltüren 163 SVGM Stehverhinderergittermatte 153
GRK-S Griff mit Kugelschnäpper für Schiebetür 150 SW2 Standardblechelemente für Schutzzaunsystem Wand II 48
HAG Harting Anbaugehäuse 203 SZ2 Standardgitterelemente für Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II 40
HDP-F Hoher Durchgangspfosten für Hohes Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 35 SZ2-…-AR Zaun II-Gitterelement mit rechteckigem Ausschnitt 233
Hoher Durchgangspfosten justierbar für SZ2-…-SL Zaun II-Gitterelement mit Schräge links 232
HDPJ-F 35
Hohes Schutzzaunsystem Flex II SZ2-…-SR Zaun II-Gitterelement mit Schräge rechts 232
HEP-F Hoher Eckpfosten für Hohes Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 35 SZ2AE Zaun II-Gitterelement für Außenecke 232
HEPJ-F Hoher Eckpfosten justierbar für Hohes Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 35 SZ2IE Zaun II-Gitterelement für Innenecke 232
HF Hubfeld 140 T Treppe 216
HFE Hubfeld, einseitig 141 TCT Tor-Controller 202
HP-F Halteplattensysteme für Flügeltüren 165 TFR Türflügel für Griff oder Riegel 101
HP-FEO Halteplattensysteme für einwärts öffnende Flügeltüren 165 TFS Türflügel mit Fallenriegelschloss 100
HP-S Halteplattensysteme für Schiebetüren 167 TG Türgarnitur 150
HSF2 Standardgitterelemente für Hohes Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 34 TGL Treppengeländer 216
HTP-F Hoher T-Stoßpfosten für Hohes Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 35 TL Treppenleiter 216
HTPJ-F Hoher T-Stoßpfosten justierbar für Hohes Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 35 TP-F T-Stoßpfosten für Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 33
KKH Kabelkanalhalterung für Energieführung 152 TP-W T-Stoßpfosten für Schutzzaunsystem Wand II 51
KLL Klemmleiste 203 TP-Z T-Stoßpfosten für Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II 43
MSDST Maschinenschutzdoppelschiebetor 197 TP-Z T-Stoßpfosten für Aluminium Schutzzaunsystem Zaun I 59
MSHT Maschinenschutzhubtor 184 TPHV1-F T-Stoßpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 33
MSHTE Maschinenschutzhubtor, einseitig 186 TPHV1-W T-Stoßpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Schutzzaunsystem Wand II 51
MSRT Maschinenschutzrolltor 190 TPHV1-Z T-Stoßpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II 43
MSST Maschinenschutzschiebetor 196 T-Stoßpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Aluminium
TPHV1-Z 59
MSSTF Maschinenschutzschiebetor, freitragend 198 Schutzzaunsystem Zaun I
PA Potenzialausgleich 149 TPHV2-F T-Stoßpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 33
PFTR Portalflügeltür für Griff oder Riegel 87 TPHV2-W T-Stoßpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Schutzzaunsystem Wand II 51
PFTS Portalflügeltür mit Fallenriegelschloss 86 TPHV2-Z T-Stoßpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II 43
PS Pfostenstütze 149 T-Stoßpfosten mit Höhenausgleich für Aluminium
TPHV2-Z 59
PT Pendeltür 98 Schutzzaunsystem Zaun I
PZ Profilzylinder 152 TPJ-F T-Stoßpfosten justierbar für Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 33
RI Riegelsysteme für Flügeltüren 169 TPJ-W T-Stoßpfosten justierbar für Schutzzaunsystem Wand II 51
RI Riegelvorbereitungen für Flügeltüren 171 TPJ-Z T-Stoßpfosten justierbar für Schutzzaunsystem Zaun II 43
SD2 Schildanbausatz für 2 Aufkleber 156 TPJ-Z T-Stoßpfosten justierbar für Aluminium Schutzzaunsystem Zaun I 59
SD3 Schildanbausatz für 3 Aufkleber 156 UER Überschlagriegelsysteme für Flügeltüren 179
SF2 Standardgitterelemente für Schutzzaunsystem Flex II 30 ZL2O Zaun II-Lasche oben 146
SF2-...-AR Flex II-Gitterelement mit rechteckigem Ausschnitt 231 ZL2U Zaun II-Lasche unten 146
SF2-…-SL Flex II-Gitterelement mit Schräge links 230 ZS Zufallsicherung für Flügeltüren 151
SF2-…-SR Flex II-Gitterelement mit Schräge rechts 230 ZSP Zusatzplatine 203
SF2AE Flex II-Gitterelement für Außenecke 230
SF2IE Flex II-Gitterelement für Innenecke 230
SKP Scheiben mit Klemmprofil 154
SL Steigleiter 217
SN-F Schaltnockensysteme für Flügeltüren 173
SN-S Schaltnockensysteme für Schiebetüren 175
SPP Schutzplankenpfosten 234
SSP Schutzplankenholm 234
SSPE System Schutzplanken Eckelement 234
SSPK System Schutzplanken Kopfstück 234
STG Schiebetür für Griff 105
STGHV1 Schiebetür für Griff, mit Höhenaugleich 113
STGO Schiebetür für Griff, mit Oberlicht 111
appendix

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
252  brühl fields of application

brühl Fields of application

Logistics Laser technology

Storage technology Vertical lathes

Rolling mills Lumber industry

Furniture industry Industrial furnaces

High-bay storage Food industry

technology

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 brühl fields of application 253

Welding technology Automation robotics

Materials handling Packaging technology

Automotive industry Metal forming

Research and Aeronautical

education engineering

Plastics technology Special purpose

machinery
appendix

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
254  brühl locations
Contact info and sales regions
for Germany
Region: Palatinate/Saarland/Hesse
→ Headquarters Germany
Hans Georg Brühl GmbH
Schutzgitter und Schutzeinrichtungen
Waldstraße 63b
57250 Netphen, Germany
T: +49 (0) 2737 59 34 0
F: +49 (0)2737 59 19 46
→ Region: North
(Postcodes: 2, 3, 4, 51, 57–59)
IBS Schmid SystemPartner
GmbH & Co. KG
Akazienstraße 24
32760 Detmold, Germany
T: +49 (0) 523 160 15 11
F: +49 (0) 523 160 15 12
www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
Region: North
Region: East
Headquarters
Region: Bavaria
Region: Baden-Wuerttemberg
→ Region: Palatinate/Saarland/Hesse
(Postcodes: 50, 52–56, 60–69, 76)
IBS Schmid SystemPartner
GmbH & Co. KG
Hauptstraße 135
76344 Eggenstein, Germany
T: +49 (0) 721 970 57 0
F: +49 (0) 721 970 57 57
→ Region: Baden-Wuerttemberg
(Postcodes: 7)
IBS Schmid SystemPartner
GmbH & Co. KG
Hauptstraße 135
76344 Eggenstein, Germany
T: +49 (0) 721 970 57 0
F: +49 (0) 721 970 57 57
→ Region: Bavaria
(Postcodes: 8, 9)
IBS Schmid SystemPartner
GmbH & Co. KG
Rosenweg 6
86450 Altenmünster / Hennhofen, Germany
T: +49 (0) 829 590 98 28
F: +49 (0) 829 590 98 29
→ Region: East
(Postcodes: 0, 1, 39, 98, 99)
IBS Schmid SystemPartner
GmbH & Co. KG
Am Weinberg 31
07554 Gera, Germany
T: +49 (0) 366 953 12 59
F: +49 (0) 366 953 12 49
 brühl locations 255

Sales regions for Europe

Sales office: Norway

Sales office: Netherlands

Sales office: Belgium

Sales office: Luxembourg

Sales office: Austria

Sales office: France

Sales office: Switzerland

Sales office: Spain/Portugal

→ You can find detailed information and contact details for our worldwide and European
sales partners on our website: www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
appendix

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
256  notes

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
 notes 257

appendix

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
258  imprint

Would you like to learn more about Brühl?

Then visit us at our website: www.schutzeinrichtungen.com! Here you will find everything
you need to know about our company, our partners and the subject of machine guards –
the complete programme of products and services. Download information or take advan-
tage of our online request feature.

www.safetyfenceguarding.com

Imprint

© Copyright by Hans Georg Brühl GmbH Chief editor:

Kai Wienecke
Managing directors:
Hans Georg Brühl Technical editor:
Heinrich Brühl Frank Hanses, Timo Kleemann

Waldstraße 63b Graphic design:

57250 Netphen Anna Ihle, www.annaihle.de
Postfach 1162
57235 Netphen, Germany Illustrations:
Gotthelf Müller, Anna Ihle
Telefon: +49 (0) 2737 59 34 0
Telefax: +49 (0) 2737 59 19 46 Photography:
info@schutzeinrichtungen.com Heiner Morgenthal

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com Printing:
Druckhaus Kay GmbH, Kreuztal

All images, graphics and illustrations are protected by copy-
right. Information from this catalogue may only be repro-
duced by customers and other interested parties for internal
information purposes only. Any further usage is subject to
written consent by Hans Georg Brühl GmbH.
Subject to technical modifications without notice /
Errors and omissions excepted (2012)
Product photos with friendly support
and permission from:
Carl Cloos Schweißtechnik GmbH, Haiger
Risse + Wilke Kaltband GmbH & Co. KG, Iserlohn
MLOG Logistics GmbH, Neuenstadt am Kocher
Albert Handtmann Holding GmbH & Co. KG, Biberach
Schuler AG, Göppingen
Tilgert Walzwerkmaschinenbau GmbH, Iserlohn
Rittal GmbH & Co. KG, Herborn
Josef Fröhling GmbH & Co. KG, Meinerzhagen
Banss Schlacht- und Fördertechnik GmbH, Biedenkopf

www.schutzeinrichtungen.com
Colour coding for BRÜHL Safety fence systems

Safety Fence System Safety Fence System Safety Fence System Safety Fence System Safety Fence System Safety Fence System
Flex II Fence II Wall II Aluminium Fence I Stainless Steel Flex II Stainless Steel Fence II
www.safetyfenceguarding.com

Hans Georg Brühl GmbH

Waldstraße 63 b / 57250 Netphen / Germany
Telefon +49 (0) 27 37-59 34-0 / Fax +49 (0) 27 37-59 19-46
 info@schutzeinrichtungen.com

Subject to technical modifications without notice /

Errors and omissions excepted (2012)